Help Wiki - User contributions [en]

Vixia HD Camcorder Gear Guide

2020-05-12T17:19:09Z

Highberh: /* Caring for Media Loan Equipment */

=== Introduction ===
'''A proficiency test is required to check out this camcorder.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[Vixia HD Camcorder Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.

'''Please Note:''' This operating guide is not a replacement for the complete manual. For complete operating instructions and information, please read the manual for the appropriate model camcorder. The manuals are available for checkout through Media Loan.

Download the PDF manual for these models: [http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/docs/video_manual_vixiahf200.pdf HF200] | [http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/docs/video_vixiahfm300_manual.pdf HF M300] | [http://cms.evergreen.edu:8080/renderfile/global/evergreen.edu/medialoan/docs/manual_video_vixiahfm400.pdf HF M400] | [http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/docs/video_manual_hfm500.pdf HF M500]
Media Loan has several models of Vixia HD camcorders. The menu functions of the HF 200 are accessed by a joystick control on the LCD panel. The HF M300, HF M400 and HF M500 are operated by the touch screen LCD panel. Each camera comes with a 32 G SDHC memory card for almost 3 hours of recording time.
===Caring for Media Loan Equipment===
*Do not drop the camcorder
*Do not leave the camcorder in excessive heat, such as a car
*Do not subject the camcorder to moisture or water
*Do not use excessive physical force
*Do not store this camcorder in excessive cold or excessive heat
*Never push objects of any kind into the camcorder through any opening
*Do not leave the viewfinder exposed to direct sunlight as it may melt
*You are 100% financially responsible for all equipment checked out from Media Loan.
===Condensation===
To avoid condensation, especially when taking the camera from indoors into colder weather, place the camcorder in an airtight plastic bag and let it adjust to temperature changes slowly before removing it from the bag.
When condensation is detected the camcorder automatically shuts off, the warning message “CONDENSATION HAS BEEN DETECTED” appears for approx. 4 seconds and a water drop icon starts flashing.
After the condensation warning stops flashing, wait for 1 more hour before resuming use.
=== Name of Parts ===
<gallery>
File:HF-M400-01-Name-of-parts.png|HF M400
File:HF-M400-02-Name-of-parts.png|HF M400
File:HF-M400-03-Name-of-parts.png|HF M400
File:HF-M400-04-Name-controller.png|HF M400
File:HF-M500-01-Name-of-parts.png|HF M500
File:HF-M500-02-Name-of-parts.png|HF M500
File:HF-M500-03-Name-of-parts.png|HF M500
</gallery>
=== Battery/AC Power ===
====Charging the Battery/Running Off AC====
Turn off the camcorder and attach the battery pack to the camcorder by lightly pressing the battery pack and sliding it down until it clicks. Plug the power adaptor into a power outlet. Connect the power adaptor to the camcorder’s DC IN terminal. The CHARGE indicator should starts flashing. The indicator will stay on when the charging is completed. Also, when the power adapter is connected, the camera can function without a battery pack.
====To Remove the Battery Pack====
Locate the battery release. On the HF 200, the battery release is on the bottom of the camera under the battery. On the HF 400 and HFM 500, it is on the side of the camera visible when the LCD display is flipped out. Slide the battery release to release the battery pack. Lift and pull out the battery pack.
<gallery>
File:HF-M400-05-battery-charge.png|HF M400 Charge Battery
File:HF-M400-07-battery-remove.png|HF M400 Remove Battery
File:HF-M500-04-battery-charge.png|HF M500 Charge Battery
File:HF-M500-08-battery-remove.png|HF M500 Remove Battery
</gallery>
====Battery Life====
When the camcorder is off, press the BATT.INFO button (3) to display your battery’s state. It will display charge status as a percentage as well as approximate recording time on this charge. The small and large batteries should record at least 45 and 100 minutes, respectively.
Lithium batteries begin to discharge once removed from charger. Although we charge these batteries at Media Loan, you should make sure they are fully charged before you need to use them.
====Battery Precautions====
*Do not expose battery to excessive heat or fire (it might explode!)
*Do not try to disassemble or modify battery
*Do not drop or knock battery
*Do not get battery wet
=== LCD/TOUCHSCREEN ===
<gallery>
File:HF-M400-08-lcd-rotate.png|HF M400 Rotate LCD Screen
File:HF-M400-06-lcd-rotate.png|HF M400 Rotate LCD Screen
File:HF-M400-09-lcd-backlight.png|HF M400 LCD Backlight
File:HF-M400-11-touchscreen-use.png|HF M400 Touchscreen
</gallery>
===Initialize the Memory Card===
Each camcorder comes with a Class 10 32G SDHC memory card which should prove adequate for your recording needs. (If you choose to use your own memory cards, take care to return the original card, undamaged, with the camera. Failure to do so will result in a replacement charge being billed to your student account.)
 HF 200: Press the [HOME] button. Other Settings > Tool Icon > Initialize [card icon] > Initialize > [Complete Initialization] > [Yes] > [OK] > [X] 
<gallery>
File:HF-M400-17-memorycard-insert.png|HF M400 Insert Memory Card
File:HF-M400-19-memory-initialize1.png|HF M400 Initialize Memory
File:HF-M500-06-memorycard.png|HF M500 Insert Memory Card
</gallery>
=== Operating Modes ===
<gallery>
File:HF-M400-12-opmodes-rec.png|HF M400 Record Mode
File:HF-M400-13-opmodes-play.png|HF M400 Play Mode
</gallery>
===Using the Menus===
HF200: The Function menu is accessed by pressing the function button from camera mode. A menu will appear containing options to adjust AE mode, white balance, image effects, digital effects, recording quality, and simultaneous recording. An icon is also present to access the “setup menu.” Navigation is done using the joystick. Scroll up and down the menu using the joystick, and then select the desired option by scrolling left and right. Certain options (like custom white balance) require triggering by pressing the joystick in (set). 
HF M300: The function menu is accessed by touching the [FUNC] key in camera mode.
HF M500: With the LCD display open, press the HOME button on the side of the camcorder to open the HOME menu. The available options vary according to whether the camcorder is in recording or playback mode.
* The Main Functions panel contains frequently used shooting functions and is available only when the camcorder is in recording mode. Alternatively, you can touch FUNC. in the upper-left portion of the recording screen. Touch the function you want to set or adjust.
* The Camera Mode menu, available only in recording mode, allows you to change whether you record movies in AUTO, Manual [M] mode or to use "cinema-look" filters.
* Recording Standard is also only available in recording mode. It allows you to select whether you will record in AVCHD or MP4 format.
<gallery>
File:500 homebutton.png|HF M500 Home
File:HF-M400-14-menu-func.png|HF M400 FUNC. Menu
File:HF-M400-15-menu-edit.png|HF M400 Edit Menu
File:HF-M400-16-menu-setup.png|HF M400 Setup Menu
</gallery>
===Recording===
HF 200: Make sure the camera is powered on and that the mode dial is set to the middle setting (video camera icon).
HF M300: With the camera powered on, set the mode switch to [M]. Make sure the camera icon is at the top of the LCD screen. Otherwise, you can enter video mode by touching the camera icon at the bottom right corner of the screen.
HF M500: Press [START/STOP] to begin and pause recording.
Use the LCD display to compose, and press the record start/stop button to begin recording. Press again to stop recording. The recording time remaining is displayed at the top of the LCD screen.
<gallery>
File:HF-M400-22-manual.png|HF M400 Record in Manual Mode
File:HF-M400-26-framerate.png|HF M400 Frame Rate
File:HF-M400-29-prerecord.png|HF M400 Pre-record
File:HF-M400-23-manual-review.png|HF M400 Review Last Scene
File:HF-M400-21-playback.png|HF M400 Playback
File:HF-M500-07-recordmanual.png|HF M500 Record in Manual Mode
File:HF-M400-25-rectimes.png|Approx. Record Times
</gallery>
===Using the zoom===
The zoom lever, located on the top of the camera, is used to zoom in and out. Toggle it in either direction to zoom in or out. The “W” side of the toggle stands for wide angle or “zoomed out,” and the T side for telephoto or “zoomed in.” When menu settings are typical, you may vary the speed of zooming by using this toggle either gently (for slower zoom) or firmly (for faster zoom).
<gallery>
File:HF-M400-20-zoom.png|HF M400 Zoom
</gallery>
===Manual Focus===
HF 200: In camera mode, press the joystick upwards or downwards to access the joystick menu. Navigate to the focus option and press joystick in (set) to select it. Pressing joystick in again will change the focus mode. In manual mode (M), moving the joystick to the left (towards person icon) will focus closer, while pushing it towards the right (mountain icon) will focus farther away. To revert to auto-focus mode, simply press the joystick in again to change back to auto-focus. 
HFM300: With the touchscreen interface, the camera is able to focus on any part of the frame that the user touches while in record mode. The camera takes note of the pixel configuration of the subject you select, thus allowing it to track a moving subject, adjusting the focus to compensate for it’s changing position. If you would like to manually focus, touch the [FUNC] button at the top-right corner of the screen. Tap on the [FOCUS] button, then tap on the [MF] button at the bottom of the screen so the yellow indicator turns on. You are now in manual focus mode. You can either toggle focus using the two buttons that appear on the left, or touch the part of the screen you would like camera to focus on (this will lock the focus and will NOT track the subject).
<gallery>
File:HF-M400-34-focus2.png|HF M400 Manual Focus
</gallery>

===Exposure Compensation===
Exposure compensation is used to override how bright or dark the camera makes your shot. The camera usually takes in a medium-grey/average amount of light. This may be too much or too little light for your shot. To preserve the darkness of a night shot, or the glaring brightness of a backlit subject, for example, requires the use of exposure compensation.
Exposure comp. is accessed similarly to the focus option mentioned previously:
HF200: Push the joystick up or down and navigate to the “exposure” setting. Then move the joystick to the left or right to make your shot darker or brighter, respectively.
HF M300: Touch the [FUNC] button at the top-right corner of the screen. Tap on the [EXPOSURE] button, then tap on the [M] button at the bottom of the screen so the yellow indicator turns on. You are now in manual exposure mode. You can either toggle exposure by sliding the “dial” that appears on the left, or touch the part of the screen you would like camera to focus on.
Make sure to change this option back to neutral position before your next shot!
<gallery>
File:HF-M400-32-exposure.png|HF M400 Exposure
</gallery>
===White Balance===
White balance determines what the camera sees as “white.” Because light sources have different colors, the camera must be “balanced” to prevent color casts in your footage. “WB” is the second option down in the function menu. Settings include automatic, sunlight, shade, flourescent, etc., as well as a custom setting. To use custom white balance, highlight the “custom WB” icon, point the camera at a white or color-neutral surface (such as a wall or sidewalk) and press [SET]. You will be able to see the color effect of your choice (or custom setting) on the LCD screen.

 HF M500: [FUNC.] > [WB White Balance] > Desired option > [X]
<gallery>
File:HF-M400-36-whitebalance.png|HF M400 White Balance
</gallery>
===AE Mode===
AE mode is the first option in the function menu. It determines where the camera gets its light from. Options include Program AE (camcorder automatically adjusts the aperture and shutter speed), Tv (shutter priority - you set the shutter speed value and the camcorder sets the aperture value), Av (aperture priority - you set the aperture value and the camcorder sets the shutter speed), and scene mode, as well as a more image-altering mode called “Cine,” which achieves a cinematic look. Program is the more typically automatic setting, and recommended for new users. In some situations, Av and Tv modes may be useful. Another option is SCN or scene mode: highlighting this mode and pressing the joystick (set) will bring up a menu of different recording situations such as “sports” or “sunset.” Unlike P, Tv, Av, and Cine, Selecting one of these scene modes also sets other options like white balance, preventing the user from controlling these options manually.
Aperture refers to a variable iris which opens up and stops down, letting more or less light into the camera. It has a side effect of altering “depth of field” or “depth of focus,” that is, how far the range of in-focus objects extends towards and away from the camera. Aperture priority mode (Av) takes advantage of this: the user specifies an aperture value to use and the camera automatically makes up the difference of light using other variables. To use Av mode, select it using the joystick. Then press the joystick (set), which will summon a sub-menu in which to select your desired aperture. Selecting a smaller number (e.g. f/2.0) will reduce depth of field. A larger number (e.g. f/8.0) will increase it. The icon will blink if your selection is too extreme for the camera to make up the difference in light, and this should be avoided.
Shutter speed is a second variable which lets more or less light in, and shutter priority mode (Tv) mode works similarly. Any changes made on these AE options will be visible on the LCD screen, including depth of field changes and loss of light from extreme selections. For a fuller discussion of these modes, as well as cine and portrait modes, refer to the full manual available on the Media Loan web site.
 HF 200: Open the joystick guide by pushing up on the joystick. Using the joystick, navigate to [Exposure]. Push the joystick to the left or right to adjust the exposure. Press the joystick in gently to set.

 HF M500: [FUNC.] > [Rec. Programs > [TV Shutter-Pri. AE] > or [AV Aperture-Pri. AE] > [Left Arrow] or [Right Arrow] to set the desired shutter speed (TV) or aperture value (AV) > [X]
<gallery>
File:HF-M400-30-shutter.png|HF M400 Shutter/AE
File:HF-M400-31-shutter-aperture-guidelines1.png|Shutter Speed and Aperture Value Guidelines
</gallery>
===Image Stabilizer===
When image stabilizer is set to “on,” the lens elements in the camera float freely. This is useful to dampen motion from hand-holding the camera. When attached to a tripod this setting should be off. When this setting is on, after panning on a tripod, the image will “jitter” back and forth as the elements settle. Because the tripod offers a steadied image already, make sure to turn this option off when tripod-mounted.
HF M500: Press [HOME]. Other Settings > Camera Icon > [Image Stabilizer] > Desired IS mode > [X]. Dynamic - compensates for a higher degree of shake, such as when shooting when walking. Standard - Compensates for a lower degree of shake. Off - use when mounted on tripod.
<gallery>
File:HF-M400-27-imgstabilization.png|HF M400 Image Stabilization
File:HF-M400-28-poweredis.png|HF M400 Powered IS
</gallery>
===Audio Recording Level===
You may change the audio levels which get recorded to your sound track, whether recording with the built-in microphone or an external one. If the signal is too low, your audio track will be faint, and will lose quality as you boost volume during playback. If the signal is too high, your audio track will “clip,” having too much data to record at once, and sound garbled. The default setting adjusts this audio level automatically, but it may sometimes be necessary to override this.
This setting is changed similarly to exposure compensation and manual focus. On the HF M300, it is the second button in the right column of the Function Menu. For the HF 200: Move the joystick up or down, while in recording mode, to access the joystick menu. Navigate (using the joystick) to the “Mic. Level” option. Pressing the joystick in (set), at this point, will change to manual control mode, which can be adjusted by moving the joystick to the left or right. Pressing the joystick in once more will toggle back to automatic level control. Refer to p. 76 of the full manual for more information.
<gallery>
File:HF-M400-38-audioreclevel.png|HF M400 Audio Recording Level
File:HF-M400-40-micdir.png|HF M400 Microphone Direction
File:HF-M400-43-headphones1.png|HF M400 Headphones
</gallery>
===Connections===
The camera can be connected to external microphones, TVs, headphones, VCRs, and some computer monitors.
Supplied with the camera are a component video cable, as well as an RCA (red, white, and yellow) A/V cable. The camera also has a HDMI port which can connect to newer computer monitors, LCD TVs, and other newer A/V devices. Media Loan does not supply this cable.
The AV/headphones port is used to connect to RCA devices (such as many TVs and VCRs) via the supplied AV-RCA cable. It can also be used to provide audio only as a standard headphone jack. Because this port also contains a video connection, the headphone/AV option must be set correctly (HF200: located in the fourth tab of the setup menu, HFM300: Third tab in the Main Menu). When using headphones, set it to headphones, and, when connecting via RCA, set it to AV. If headphones are inserted while on the AV setting, they will pick up video signal and output it as garbled noise. If the RCA cable is connected but the option is set to headphones, you will get no video signal.
Component video (red, green, and blue jacks) transmits with higher quality than the (yellow) RCA video jack. A cable is supplied, which plugs into the camera through the component out port.
External microphones can be connected via the microphone terminal. Different microphones can be used to achieve different audio pickup patterns as well as increased sensitivity and flexibility in placement. Media Loan carries compatible microphones.
<gallery>
File:HF-M400-45-terminals.png|HF M400 Terminals
</gallery>
===Uploading/Saving Footage===
Power camera off and connect it to a computer via the supplied USB cable, then power on the camera. The camera’s memory should appear as a drive, from which your footage files can be copied to your computer. Never remove the camera’s memory card when connected via USB, and remember to safely eject the device before disconnecting it when using Apple computers.
PLEASE NOTE!: When recording in AVCHD format your footage cannot be retrieved by simply putting the SD card into your computer. The file structure must be retained in order to access footage. The only alternatives to the steps outlined above are to A) create a disc image of the sd card, or B) copy EVERY file on the card, retaining the folders and file order.
[[category:Media Loan]]

DolphinEar/PRO Hydrophone Gear Guide

2020-05-12T16:51:23Z

Highberh: /* DO NOT */

===INTRO===
The DolphinEar/PRO is a fully submergible, omnidirectional, underwater microphone. The Hydrophone is waterproof up to 100 meters (about 328 feet - however the waterproof cable provided is only 33ft) and is rugged enough to handle oceanic conditions and water pressures. With this hydrophone, you can record various sounds such as underwater animals and wildlife.

[[file:hydrophone.jpg|400px|thumb|right|DolphinEar/PRO Hydrophone]]

===ACCEPTABLE ENVIRONMENTS===
The hydrophone can be used in the following environments: 
Bodies of water (lakes, rivers, oceans, etc) 
Underground (buried in soil) 
Ice (frozen into liquids) 
Swimming pools 

This hydrophone can be used in various liquids. ''Please get approval from Media Loan staff prior to use in potentially hazardous liquids.''

===CARE===

==== DO ====
* Wash the Hydrophone immediately in fresh water after use to remove any debris, or salt deposits, or chlorine if used in pool.
* Dry off before storing.

====DO NOT====
* Tow behind a boat
* Attach the amplifier/sound recording device or hydrophone to your body. Hold with your hand.
* Use excessive force
* Store/use in extremely hot temperatures
* Leave equipment unattended
* Submerge into hazardous chemicals (chlorine is okay)
* Let the hydrophone strike sharp surfaces or collide with objects
* Attach it to your body prior to submerging

===DESIGN===
The DolphinEar/PRO hydrophone is an omnidirectional microphone. It was designed with unique large aperture MPC piezo-electric element that responds to sound pressure variations over a wide dynamic range. It is completely encased in a special epoxy casing, which makes it far more rugged than most other under-water microphone designs.

DolphinEar/PRO provides high quality, balanced audio output over a wide frequency range (15 Hz - 20,000 Hz +/-3db). It is supplied with 10 meters (33 feet) of high quality Neoprene/PVC cable terminated in a standard 3 pin XLR connector. Unlike standard ball-type hydrophones, DolphinEar/PRO’s unique disc design minimized flow noise while recording from a boat in medium to heavy sea conditions. DolphinEar/PRO may be buried in earth or sand for use as a geophone-type microphone as well.

This hydrophone is fitted with a standard 3-pin XLR connector. The shield is connected to pin 1. DolphinEar/PRO does not need external power, but you can still use it on amplifier systems that provide up to 48 volts of phantom power. A set of DC blocking capacitors is fitted inside the XLR connector shell to block the phantom DC power. If you are using the DolphinEar/PRO on unbalanced amplifiers, we recommend the use of a small matching transformer to maintain hum and noise canceling benefits of a balanced microphone.

====Specifications====
'''Frequency response (overall):''' 
15 Hz – 20,000 Hz +/-3db

'''Hydrophone Transducer Type:''' 
MPC (Piezo) High Output

'''Configuration:''' 
Omni-directional, balanced output, 600 ohms XLR

'''Hydrophone packaging:''' 
Rugged epoxy encased, 60mm Dia x 8mm thick

'''Cable Type:''' 
High quality, low noise, neoprene/PVC jacket

'''Output Connector:''' 
Standard 3 pin XLR

'''Power:''' 
None (does not require phantom power)

===OPERATION===
As soon as this hydrophone is submerged it will pick up sounds and is best used at least 7ft deep. The omnidirectional pattern of the hydrophone means that the orientation is versatile.
====Set-up:====
Simply plug the XLR that is attached to the hydrophone into an amplifier or sound recording device. Media Loan sound recorders, such as the [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/Olympus_LS-100_Multi-Track_PCM_Recorder_Operating_Guide Olympus LS-100] and [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/Zoom_H4n_Audio_Recorder_Operating_Guide Zoom H4N], require separate proficiencies from the hydrophone prior to checkout. '''SAFETY TIP''' - '''Do not attach the amplifier/sound recorder or the hydrophone itself to your body.'''Hold it in your hand, or set on a stable surface. You can use various devices to extend the hydrophone outwards from the recorder before submerging.

'''Usage on a boat:''' 
'''DO NOT TOW THIS HYDROPHONE.''' DolphinEar/PRO does not have the proper design to be towed behind a boat. When towed, this hydrophone will pick up extraneous noises, which detracts from the performance. '''There is also a risk that the cable could get caught in a propeller.'''

For best results, turn off the engine and drift – otherwise engine noise will be picked up. You can lift the hydrophone and set it so that your boat hull blocks sounds from other boats that may be nearby. To minimize sounds from your own boat, such as waves, you can use various devices to extend the hydrophone outwards (a fishpole, float, etc).

[[Category:Media Loan]]

DolphinEar/PRO Hydrophone Gear Guide

2020-05-12T16:44:40Z

Highberh: /* DO NOT */

===INTRO===
The DolphinEar/PRO is a fully submergible, omnidirectional, underwater microphone. The Hydrophone is waterproof up to 100 meters (about 328 feet - however the waterproof cable provided is only 33ft) and is rugged enough to handle oceanic conditions and water pressures. With this hydrophone, you can record various sounds such as underwater animals and wildlife.

[[file:hydrophone.jpg|400px|thumb|right|DolphinEar/PRO Hydrophone]]

===ACCEPTABLE ENVIRONMENTS===
The hydrophone can be used in the following environments: 
Bodies of water (lakes, rivers, oceans, etc) 
Underground (buried in soil) 
Ice (frozen into liquids) 
Swimming pools 

This hydrophone can be used in various liquids. ''Please get approval from Media Loan staff prior to use in potentially hazardous liquids.''

===CARE===
After usage, wash the DolphinEar/PRO in fresh water to remove any debris, or salt deposits, or chlorine if used in pool. 
Dry off before storing.

====DO NOT====
* Tow behind a boat Attach the amplifier/sound recording device or hydrophone to your body. Hold with your hand. Use excessive force Store/use in extremely hot temperatures Leave equipment unattended Submerge into hazardous chemicals (chlorine is okay) Let the hydrophone strike sharp surfaces or collide with objects Attach it to your body prior to submerging

===DESIGN===
The DolphinEar/PRO hydrophone is an omnidirectional microphone. It was designed with unique large aperture MPC piezo-electric element that responds to sound pressure variations over a wide dynamic range. It is completely encased in a special epoxy casing, which makes it far more rugged than most other under-water microphone designs.

DolphinEar/PRO provides high quality, balanced audio output over a wide frequency range (15 Hz - 20,000 Hz +/-3db). It is supplied with 10 meters (33 feet) of high quality Neoprene/PVC cable terminated in a standard 3 pin XLR connector. Unlike standard ball-type hydrophones, DolphinEar/PRO’s unique disc design minimized flow noise while recording from a boat in medium to heavy sea conditions. DolphinEar/PRO may be buried in earth or sand for use as a geophone-type microphone as well.

This hydrophone is fitted with a standard 3-pin XLR connector. The shield is connected to pin 1. DolphinEar/PRO does not need external power, but you can still use it on amplifier systems that provide up to 48 volts of phantom power. A set of DC blocking capacitors is fitted inside the XLR connector shell to block the phantom DC power. If you are using the DolphinEar/PRO on unbalanced amplifiers, we recommend the use of a small matching transformer to maintain hum and noise canceling benefits of a balanced microphone.

====Specifications====
'''Frequency response (overall):''' 
15 Hz – 20,000 Hz +/-3db

'''Hydrophone Transducer Type:''' 
MPC (Piezo) High Output

'''Configuration:''' 
Omni-directional, balanced output, 600 ohms XLR

'''Hydrophone packaging:''' 
Rugged epoxy encased, 60mm Dia x 8mm thick

'''Cable Type:''' 
High quality, low noise, neoprene/PVC jacket

'''Output Connector:''' 
Standard 3 pin XLR

'''Power:''' 
None (does not require phantom power)

===OPERATION===
As soon as this hydrophone is submerged it will pick up sounds and is best used at least 7ft deep. The omnidirectional pattern of the hydrophone means that the orientation is versatile.
====Set-up:====
Simply plug the XLR that is attached to the hydrophone into an amplifier or sound recording device. Media Loan sound recorders, such as the [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/Olympus_LS-100_Multi-Track_PCM_Recorder_Operating_Guide Olympus LS-100] and [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/Zoom_H4n_Audio_Recorder_Operating_Guide Zoom H4N], require separate proficiencies from the hydrophone prior to checkout. '''SAFETY TIP''' - '''Do not attach the amplifier/sound recorder or the hydrophone itself to your body.'''Hold it in your hand, or set on a stable surface. You can use various devices to extend the hydrophone outwards from the recorder before submerging.

'''Usage on a boat:''' 
'''DO NOT TOW THIS HYDROPHONE.''' DolphinEar/PRO does not have the proper design to be towed behind a boat. When towed, this hydrophone will pick up extraneous noises, which detracts from the performance. '''There is also a risk that the cable could get caught in a propeller.'''

For best results, turn off the engine and drift – otherwise engine noise will be picked up. You can lift the hydrophone and set it so that your boat hull blocks sounds from other boats that may be nearby. To minimize sounds from your own boat, such as waves, you can use various devices to extend the hydrophone outwards (a fishpole, float, etc).

[[Category:Media Loan]]

APS/AS Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Proficiency Test

2020-05-04T15:49:41Z

Highberh: /* WRITTEN TEST */

====WRITTEN TEST====
Answers may be found in the [[Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Operating Guide]]. Complete this written portion and bring it with you to your scheduled operational proficiency. Call Media Loan at 867-6253 if you have any questions. 

# What is the importance of formatting the SD card before you record audio?
# What are the steps you take in order to format the SD card correctly?
# Name the different microphone inputs options on this recorder?
# In what setting would you use the MS and the XY Microphones ?
# How do you set the recording format?
# What format should you choose for a high quality recording and why?
# What is "Back Up Recording"?
# What are the different types of batteries you can insert in the Zoom H6n recorder?
# How do you use this recorder as an audio interface?
# What is the extent of your financial responsibility when you checkout equipment from Media Loan?
 

==== OPERATIONAL PROFICIENCY ====
(TO BE DONE DURING YOUR SCHEDULED APPOINTMENT ) 
# Turn the recorder on.
# Demonstrate how to navigate through the menus of recorder.
# Format the SD card correctly and prepare for recording.
# Plug/Unplug the XY mic correctly input.
# Plug an XRL mic to correct input.
# Record 30 seconds of audio.
# Connect headphones and playback your recording.
# Erase track.
# Show that you understand how to import your audio files from the recorder to the computer.

[[Category:Media Loan]]

APS/AS Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Operating Guide

2020-05-04T15:43:57Z

Highberh: /* Attachable Microphone Overview */

[[File:Zoom H6 Accessories.jpg]]
[[File:Zoom H6 right view.jpg]]
 

A proficiency test is required to check out this Audio Recorder. Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [https://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/APS/AS_Zoom_H6n_Audio_Recorder_Proficiency_Test APS Zoom H4n Audio Recorder Proficiency Test] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.

===Introduction===
The Zoom H6n is a versatile and extremely portable 6 track field recorder for use in the field for sound collection, studio recording, and audio for video shoots. The H6n comes with one XY stereo field microphone and one mid-side capsule. Both of these capsules fit on the top slot on the recorder. There are also 4 XLR/Line in ports, each with their own individual volume, pad controls, and phantom power (+12V/ +24V/ +48V). It also features a headphone out jack and a 3.5mm line out jack that can hook up directly to a DSLR camera. Finally, the recorder features a metronome, chromatic tuner, and playback speed/pitch adjustments. 

===Safety Precaution & Care===
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to severe impacts or prolonged vibrations.'''
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to extreme temperatures. Drastic temperature changes cause a condensation build up in electronics.'''
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to water, sand, or mud.'''
* '''Do NOT use excessive force when operating this equipment.'''
* '''Do NOT drop the equipment!'''
* '''ALWAYS turn the power off before inserting or removing an SD card.'''
** '''Removing card while power is on may result in loss of data!'''
* '''When inserting an SD card, be sure to insert the correct end with the top side up as shown.'''
* '''When an SD card is not loaded, recording and playback are not possible.'''
<big>'''YOU ARE 100% FINANCIALLY RESPONSIBLE FOR THIS EQUIPMENT UPON CHECKOUT!!!!'''</big> 

<gallery>
File:Front diagram.jpg|Front View
File:Right diagram.jpg|Right View
File:Left diagram.jpg|Left View
File:Bottom diagram.jpg|Bottom View
</gallery>

===POWER===
====USING BATTERIES====
The Zoom H6n uses alkaline batteries or nickel metal hydride batteries. 
[[File:Replace batteries H6.png]]
 
'''To place/replace batteries:'''
# Turn the power off and then remove the battery.
# Remove the battery cover.
# Install the batteries.
# Replace the battery cover.
#Select the correct type of battery you are using (Menu >> System >> Battery >> Alkaline or Ni-Mh)

If the battery indicator becomes empty, turn the power off immediately and install new batteries. 

====Using an AC adapter====
#Connect a USB cable to the USB jack.
#Plug the adapter into an outlet.

===OPERATIONS===
====SCROLL WHEEL====
Just like in the previous model, the Zoom H6n uses a scroll wheel to navigate through the menus. 
To navigate up and down, gently push up and down the scroll wheel. 
To validate your option choices (in this article we refer to it as"OK"), PRESS DOWN on the scroll wheel. 

[[File:Scroll wheel.gif]]

====ATTACHABLE MICROPHONE OVERVIEW====
The Zoom H6N kit comes with two attachable microphones, one is a stereo XY microphone and the other is a cardioid capsule, each has a L/R output. 

=====XY MICROPHONE=====
<gallery>
File:Zoom H6n YX mic.jpg|XY Mic
File:XY mic.png|XY Mic
</gallery>

 
The XY microphone has two crossing directional microphones which can be set for either 90 degrees or 120 degrees, dependent upon the field you wish to capture. Best for close/medium range recording (chamber music, live concert, interview, field recording, etc). 

=====MS MICROPHONE=====
<gallery>
File:Zoom H6n MS mic.jpg|MS Mic
File:MS mic.png|MS Mic
</gallery>
 
This microphone has a unidirectional mid-range microphone for central recording capture and a bidirectional microphone build in that can be adjusted to change the stereo field. This mic can capture a fairly accurate and crisp stereo field. Best for mono recording (interviews, narrations, and meetings). 

====CONNECTING AND DISCONNECTING ATTACHABLE MICROPHONES====

'''CONNECTION'''
# Remove the protective caps from the H6n main unit and the microphone.
# While Pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, connect it to the main unit, inserting the connector completely.
 
'''DISCONNECTION'''
# While pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, pull it gently out of the main unit.

====CONNECTING EXTERNAL MICROPHONES/ OTHER DEVICES TO IMPUTS 1-4 ====

'''CONNECTING EXTERNAL MICROPHONES''' 
Connect dynamic and condenser microphones to the Input 1-4 XLR jacks. 
If a Condenser Microphone without dedicated power, set the onboard phantom power to (+12V/+24V/+48V) 

'''CONNECTING INSTRUMENTS/OTHER DEVICES''' 
Connect keyboards and mixers directly in the input 1-4 TRS jacks. 
Direct input of passive guitars and basses is not supported. 
Set PAD to -20dB when connecting a mixer or other device with standard output level. 

'''STEREO IMPUTS''' 
By linking tracks 1 and 2 (tracks 3 and 4) as stereo tracks, these can be used as stereo inputs. 
In this case, input 1 and 3 become the left channels and 2 and 4 become the right channels. 

====CONNECTION EXAMPLES====
The Zoom H6n allows you to record in a variety of configurations. 
=====INTERVIEW SET UP=====
'''WHILE FILMING:''' 
L/R input mic: Main subject 
Shotgun/lapel mics connected to Inputs 1/2: Performer 
Mics connected to Inputs 3/4: Ambient sound 
[[File:Interview setting H6n.png]] 

=====CONCERT SET UP=====
'''CONCERT RECORDING:''' 
L/R input mic: Performance on stage 
Inputs 1/2: Line outputs from mixer 
Mics connected to Inputs 3/4: Audience sound 
[[File:Concert setup H6n.png]] 

====TURNING DEVICE ON/OFF====
'''TO TURN ON''' 
Slide the hold button to the right (Where the power symbol is). 

'''TO TURN OFF''' 
Slide the hold button the right again (Where the power symbol is). 

====SETTING DATE AND TIME====
# Press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SYSTEM” and press the scroll wheel down.
# Use the scroll wheel, selected “Date/Time”, and press the scroll wheel down.
# Set date and time!
# Press the menu button again to return to the home screen.

====SETTING THE RECORDING FORMAT====
Set the format according to the desired audio quality and file size.

# Press Menu and use scroll wheel to select “REC”, and press OK.
# Use Scroll wheel to select “Rec Format”, and press OK.
# Use Scroll wheel to select the desired format, and press OK. 

<gallery>
File:Recording Format 1.png|Recording Format Step 1
File:Recording Format 2.png|Recording Format Step 2
File:Recording Format 3.png| Recording Format Step 3
File:Recording Format.png| Recording Format Quality Chart
</gallery>

'''NOTES:'''
* Use the WAV format for recording high-quality audio.
* The MP3 format reduces file size through compression, which also reduces the audio quality. Use this format if you need to conserve space on the SD card to store many recordings, for example.
* When recording in MP3 format, a single stereo MP3 file will be created regardless of the number of tracks selected. You can use the monitoring mixer to adjust the balance of all the tracks in the stereo mix.
 

====DISPLAY OVERVIEW====
=====HOME RECORDING SCREEN=====
[[File:Home recording screen.png]] 
=====PLAYBACK SCREEN=====
[[File:Playback screen.png]]

====LOADING AN SD CARD====
# Turn the power off and then open the SD card slot cover.
# Insert card into the slot.
# To eject an SD card: Push the card further into the slot and then pull it out. 

====FORMATTING AN SD CARD====
# Press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press down on the wheel.
# Using the wheel to select “SD CARD Remain” and press the scroll wheel button to see the amount of remaining open space on a card.
# To being the formatting process, press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press the scroll button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Format” and press the scroll wheel button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Yes” and press down on the scroll wheel to format the SD card. 

====RECORDING====
When recording with the Zoom H6n Audio Recorder, the following file structure/folders and files are created on the SD card: 
[[File:Screen Shot 2016-11-21 at 3.11.48 PM.png]] 

=====AUTOMATIC=====
# Press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press the scroll button down.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Auto Rec” and press the button down.
# Use the scroll wheel to select on/off and press the button.
# Select “On” and press the button down.
# Return to the Home Screen, and press the record button and put the recorder in standby.
# Press the record button again to exit standby and stop recording. 

=====PRE-RECORD=====
# Press the menu button.
# Use the scroll to select “REC” and press Ok.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Pre-Rec” and press the scroll button down.
# Select “On” and press Ok. 

=====BACK UP RECORDING=====
When using the L/R input, in addition to the recording at the set input level, the recorder can also record a separate file at a level 12dB below. This backup can be used if the recording level was set too high, causing distortion, for example. 

<gallery>
File:BackUpRecording1.png|BackUp Recording Step 1
File:BackUpRecording2.png|BackUp Recording Step 2
File:BackUpRecording3.png|BackUp Recording Step 3
</gallery>

# Press the menu button
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press Ok.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Backup Rec” and press Ok.
# Select “On” and press Ok. 

HINT: If the name of the original file is, for example, “ZOOM0001_LR.wav”, the name of the backup file will be “ZOOM0001_BU.wav”. 

=====OVERDUBBING=====
This recording option will only work with external microphones. 
The X/Y and DS mic capsules will not work with the overdubbing mode. 

# Press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok.
# Use the scroll to select “Overdub” and press Ok.
# Press the track button until the indicator lights red for the track to be overdubbed.
# Turn the volume knob to make adjustments.
# To monitor already recorded tracks, press their track buttons so their indicators light green.
# Press the record button to begin recording.
# Press the record button to stop recording.
# Press the menu button to stop overdubbing. When you play back or edit an overdubbed project, the last selected take will be used. 

====PLAYBACK====
=====NORMAL PLAYBACK=====
# Press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT LIST”, and press Ok.
# Use the scroll wheel to select desired folder and press Ok.
# Use the scroll wheel to select the desired project and press Ok. Playback will begin. 

=====CHANGING THE PLAYBACK SPEED=====
# Press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok.
# Select “Playback Speed” and press Ok,
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust playback speed, press Ok. 

===FILE MANAGEMENT===
====DELETE PROJECT====
# To delete one project, press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU”, Press Ok.
# Select “Trash” and press Ok.
# Select “Delete” and press Ok.
# Select “Yes” and press Ok.
# To delete all projects in a folder, select “Delete All Projects” instead, and press Ok.
# Note: Deletion of a project cannot be reversed! 

====FILE TRANSFERS====
# Press menu.
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok.
# Select “SD Card Reader” and press Ok.
# Connect the H6N to the computer using a USB cable.
# Make sure to safely disconnect the H6N from the computer when finished to avoid damage to the files and the recorder! 

===USING THE H6n RECORDER AS AN AUDIO INTERFACE===
# Press the menu button.
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok.
# Select “Audio Interface” and press Ok.
# Select either “Stereo Mix” or “Multi Track” and press Ok.
# Select either: “PC/Mac”, “PC/MAC using battery power” or “iPad using battery power”, and press Ok.
# Connect the H6N to the computer or iPad using a USB cable.
# Press the menu to disconnect.
# Select “EXIT” and press Ok.
# Select “Yes” and press Ok.
# Disconnect the cable from the computer or iPad and the H6, and press the menu button. 

===H6n CHROMATIC TUNER===
# Press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL”, press Ok.
# Select “Tuner” and press Ok.
# Select preferred tuning type and press Ok.
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust standard pitch.
# For all tuner types besides chromatic, use the forward and rewind button to change pitch (For drop tuning)
# Press a track button to select input to use.
# Use the tuner according to the type.
# Chromatic: shows pitch inaccuracies and note that the device is detecting.
# Guitar/Bass Tuning: The number of strings being tuned is automatically detected, allowing for tuning one at a time. 

===USING THE METRONOME===
# Press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL” and press Ok.
# Select “Metronome” and press Ok.
# Use the scroll wheel to select a menu item, and press Ok.
# Select “Click”, use the scroll wheel to set when the metronome is active, and press Ok.
# Select “Precount”.
# Select “Tempo”. Use the scroll wheel to select the speed, and press the menu button.
# Select “Sound”. Use the scroll wheel to set the sound and press Ok.
# Select “Pattern” use the scroll wheel to select desired musical pattern.
# Select “Level” and set to desired volume, press Ok.

===LINKING IMPUTS===
You can link inputs so that they become one stereo track. Do this by holding down one input button and then press another. You will see on the screen that they have become linked and both lights will illuminate simultaneously. 

Example: To link inputs 1 and 2, hold down the input 1 button and then press 2. 

Use the same method to unlink inputs.

[[Category:Media Loan]]

APS/AS Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Operating Guide

2020-05-04T15:27:30Z

Highberh: /* Power */

[[File:Zoom H6 Accessories.jpg]]
[[File:Zoom H6 right view.jpg]]
 

A proficiency test is required to check out this Audio Recorder. Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [https://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/APS/AS_Zoom_H6n_Audio_Recorder_Proficiency_Test APS Zoom H4n Audio Recorder Proficiency Test] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.

===Introduction===
The Zoom H6n is a versatile and extremely portable 6 track field recorder for use in the field for sound collection, studio recording, and audio for video shoots. The H6n comes with one XY stereo field microphone and one mid-side capsule. Both of these capsules fit on the top slot on the recorder. There are also 4 XLR/Line in ports, each with their own individual volume, pad controls, and phantom power (+12V/ +24V/ +48V). It also features a headphone out jack and a 3.5mm line out jack that can hook up directly to a DSLR camera. Finally, the recorder features a metronome, chromatic tuner, and playback speed/pitch adjustments. 

===Safety Precaution & Care===
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to severe impacts or prolonged vibrations.'''
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to extreme temperatures. Drastic temperature changes cause a condensation build up in electronics.'''
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to water, sand, or mud.'''
* '''Do NOT use excessive force when operating this equipment.'''
* '''Do NOT drop the equipment!'''
* '''ALWAYS turn the power off before inserting or removing an SD card.'''
** '''Removing card while power is on may result in loss of data!'''
* '''When inserting an SD card, be sure to insert the correct end with the top side up as shown.'''
* '''When an SD card is not loaded, recording and playback are not possible.'''
<big>'''YOU ARE 100% FINANCIALLY RESPONSIBLE FOR THIS EQUIPMENT UPON CHECKOUT!!!!'''</big> 

<gallery>
File:Front diagram.jpg|Front View
File:Right diagram.jpg|Right View
File:Left diagram.jpg|Left View
File:Bottom diagram.jpg|Bottom View
</gallery>

===POWER===
====Using Batteries====
The Zoom H6n uses alkaline batteries or nickel metal hydride batteries. 
[[File:Replace batteries H6.png]]
 
'''To place/replace batteries:'''
# Turn the power off and then remove the battery.
# Remove the battery cover.
# Install the batteries.
# Replace the battery cover.
#Select the correct type of battery you are using (Menu >> System >> Battery >> Alkaline or Ni-Mh) 

If the battery indicator becomes empty, turn the power off immediately and install new batteries. 

====Using an AC adapter====
#Connect a USB cable to the USB jack. 
#Plug the adapter into an outlet. 

===OPERATIONS===
====Scroll Wheel====
Just like in the previous model, the Zoom H6n uses a scroll wheel to navigate through the menus. 
To navigate up and down, gently push up and down the scroll wheel. 
To validate your option choices (in this article we refer to it as"OK"), PRESS DOWN on the scroll wheel. 

[[File:Scroll wheel.gif]]

====Attachable Microphone Overview====
The Zoom H6N kit comes with two attachable microphones, one is a stereo XY microphone and the other is a cardioid capsule, each has a L/R output. 

=====XY Microphone=====
<gallery>
File:Zoom H6n YX mic.jpg|XY Mic
File:XY mic.png|XY Mic
</gallery>

 
The XY microphone has two crossing directional microphones which can be set for either 90 degrees or 120 degrees, dependent upon the field you wish to capture. Best for close/medium range recording (chamber music, live concert, interview, field recording, etc). 

=====MS Microphone=====
<gallery>
File:Zoom H6n MS mic.jpg|MS Mic
File:MS mic.png|MS Mic
</gallery>
 
This microphone has a unidirectional mid-range microphone for central recording capture and a bidirectional microphone build in that can be adjusted to change the stereo field. This mic can capture a fairly accurate and crisp stereo field. Best for mono recording (interviews, narrations, and meetings). 

======Connecting and Disconnecting Attachable Microphones======

'''Connection'''
# Remove the protective caps from the H6 main unit and the microphone.
# While Pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, connect it to the main unit, inserting the connector completely.
 
'''Disconnection''' 
# While pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, pull it gently out of the main unit.
 
'''DO NOT SUBJECT THESE MICROPHONES TO HARSH TEMPERATURES, EXTREME WEATHER, OR IMPACT!!!'''

======Connecting External Microphones/ Other Devices to Inputs 1-4======

'''* Connecting External Microphones''' 
Connect dynamic and condenser microphones to the Input 1-4 XLR jacks. 
If a Condenser Microphone without dedicated power, set the onboard phantom power to (+12V/+24V/+48V) 

'''* Connecting instruments/ Other devices''' 
Connect keyboards and mixers directly in the input 1-4 TRS jacks. 
Direct input of passive guitars and basses is not supported. 
Set PAD to -20dB when connecting a mixer or other device with standard output level. 

'''* Stereo Inputs''' 
By linking tracks 1 and 2 (tracks 3 and 4) as stereo tracks, these can be used as stereo inputs. 
In this case, input 1 and 3 become the left channels and 2 and 4 become the right channels. 

====Connection Examples====
The Zoom H6n allows you to record in a variety of configurations. 
=====Interview Set Up=====
'''While filming:''' 
L/R input mic: Main subject 
Shotgun/lapel mics connected to Inputs 1/2: Performer 
Mics connected to Inputs 3/4: Ambient sound 
[[File:Interview setting H6n.png]] 

=====Concert Set Up=====
'''Concert recording:''' 
L/R input mic: Performance on stage 
Inputs 1/2: Line outputs from mixer 
Mics connected to Inputs 3/4: Audience sound 
[[File:Concert setup H6n.png]] 

====Turning the Device On/Off====
'''To Turn On''' 
Slide the hold button to the right (Where the power symbol is). 

'''To Turn Off''' 
Slide the hold button the right again (Where the power symbol is). 

====Setting Date and Time====
# Press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SYSTEM” and press the scroll wheel down.
# Use the scroll wheel, selected “Date/Time”, and press the scroll wheel down.
# Set date and time!
# Press the menu button again to return to the home screen.

====Setting The Recording Format====
Set the format according to the desired audio quality and file size. 

# Press Menu and use scroll wheel to select “REC”, and press OK. 
# Use Scroll wheel to select “Rec Format”, and press OK. 
# Use Scroll wheel to select the desired format, and press OK. 

<gallery>
File:Recording Format 1.png|Recording Format Step 1
File:Recording Format 2.png|Recording Format Step 2
File:Recording Format 3.png| Recording Format Step 3
File:Recording Format.png| Recording Format Quality Chart
</gallery>

'''NOTES:''' 
* Use the WAV format for recording high-quality audio.
* The MP3 format reduces file size through compression, which also reduces the audio quality. Use this format if you need to conserve space on the SD card to store many recordings, for example.
* When recording in MP3 format, a single stereo MP3 file will be created regardless of the number of tracks selected. You can use the monitoring mixer to adjust the balance of all the tracks in the stereo mix.
 

====Display Overview====
=====Home Recording Screen=====
[[File:Home recording screen.png]] 
=====Playback Screen=====
[[File:Playback screen.png]]

====Loading an SD Card====
# Turn the power off and then open the SD card slot cover. 
# Insert card into the slot. 
# To eject an SD card: Push the card further into the slot and then pull it out. 

====Formatting SD Cards====
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press down on the wheel. 
# Using the wheel to select “SD CARD Remain” and press the scroll wheel button to see the amount of remaining open space on a card. 
# To being the formatting process, press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press the scroll button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Format” and press the scroll wheel button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Yes” and press down on the scroll wheel to format the SD card. 

====Recording====
When recording with the Zoom H6n Audio Recorder, the following file structure/folders and files are created on the SD card: 
[[File:Screen Shot 2016-11-21 at 3.11.48 PM.png]] 

=====Automatic=====
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press the scroll button down. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Auto Rec” and press the button down. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select on/off and press the button. 
# Select “On” and press the button down. 
# Return to the Home Screen, and press the record button and put the recorder in standby. 
# Press the record button again to exit standby and stop recording. 

=====Pre-Record=====
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll to select “REC” and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Pre-Rec” and press the scroll button down. 
# Select “On” and press Ok. 

=====Back Up Recording=====
When using the L/R input, in addition to the recording at the set input level, the recorder can also record a separate file at a level 12dB below. This backup can be used if the recording level was set too high, causing distortion, for example. 

<gallery>
File:BackUpRecording1.png|BackUp Recording Step 1
File:BackUpRecording2.png|BackUp Recording Step 2
File:BackUpRecording3.png|BackUp Recording Step 3
</gallery>

# Press the menu button 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Backup Rec” and press Ok. 
# Select “On” and press Ok. 

HINT: If the name of the original file is, for example, “ZOOM0001_LR.wav”, the name of the backup file will be “ZOOM0001_BU.wav”. 

=====Overdubbing=====
This recording option will only work with external microphones. 
The X/Y and DS mic capsules will not work with the overdubbing mode. 

# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll to select “Overdub” and press Ok. 
# Press the track button until the indicator lights red for the track to be overdubbed. 
# Turn the volume knob to make adjustments. 
# To monitor already recorded tracks, press their track buttons so their indicators light green. 
# Press the record button to begin recording. 
# Press the record button to stop recording. 
# Press the menu button to stop overdubbing. When you play back or edit an overdubbed project, the last selected take will be used. 

====Playback====
=====Normal Playback=====
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT LIST”, and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select desired folder and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select the desired project and press Ok. Playback will begin. 

=====Changing Playback Speed=====
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok. 
# Select “Playback Speed” and press Ok, 
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust playback speed, press Ok. 

===File Management===
====Delete Project====
# To delete one project, press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU”, Press Ok. 
# Select “Trash” and press Ok. 
# Select “Delete” and press Ok. 
# Select “Yes” and press Ok. 
# To delete all projects in a folder, select “Delete All Projects” instead, and press Ok. 
# Note: Deletion of a project cannot be reversed! 

====File Transfers====
# Press menu. 
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok. 
# Select “SD Card Reader” and press Ok. 
# Connect the H6N to the computer using a USB cable. 
# Make sure to safely disconnect the H6N from the computer when finished to avoid damage to the files and the recorder! 

===Using the H6N Recorder as an Audio Interface===
# Press the menu button. 
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok. 
# Select “Audio Interface” and press Ok. 
# Select either “Stereo Mix” or “Multi Track” and press Ok. 
# Select either: “PC/Mac”, “PC/MAC using battery power” or “iPad using battery power”, and press Ok. 
# Connect the H6N to the computer or iPad using a USB cable. 
# Press the menu to disconnect. 
# Select “EXIT” and press Ok. 
# Select “Yes” and press Ok. 
# Disconnect the cable from the computer or iPad and the H6, and press the menu button. 

===H6N Chromatic Tuner===
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL”, press Ok. 
# Select “Tuner” and press Ok. 
# Select preferred tuning type and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust standard pitch. 
# For all tuner types besides chromatic, use the forward and rewind button to change pitch (For drop tuning) 
# Press a track button to select input to use. 
# Use the tuner according to the type. 
# Chromatic: shows pitch inaccuracies and note that the device is detecting. 
# Guitar/Bass Tuning: The number of strings being tuned is automatically detected, allowing for tuning one at a time. 

===Using the Metronome===
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL” and press Ok. 
# Select “Metronome” and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select a menu item, and press Ok. 
# Select “Click”, use the scroll wheel to set when the metronome is active, and press Ok. 
# Select “Precount”. 
# Select “Tempo”. Use the scroll wheel to select the speed, and press the menu button. 
# Select “Sound”. Use the scroll wheel to set the sound and press Ok. 
# Select “Pattern” use the scroll wheel to select desired musical pattern. 
# Select “Level” and set to desired volume, press Ok. 

===Linking Inputs===
You can link inputs so that they become one stereo track. Do this by holding down one input button and then press another. You will see on the screen that they have become linked and both lights will illuminate simultaneously. 

Example: To link inputs 1 and 2, hold down the input 1 button and then press 2. 

Use the same method to unlink inputs.

[[Category:Media Loan]]

APS/AS Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Operating Guide

2020-05-04T15:27:06Z

Highberh: /* Operations */

[[File:Zoom H6 Accessories.jpg]]
[[File:Zoom H6 right view.jpg]]
 

A proficiency test is required to check out this Audio Recorder. Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [https://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/APS/AS_Zoom_H6n_Audio_Recorder_Proficiency_Test APS Zoom H4n Audio Recorder Proficiency Test] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.

===Introduction===
The Zoom H6n is a versatile and extremely portable 6 track field recorder for use in the field for sound collection, studio recording, and audio for video shoots. The H6n comes with one XY stereo field microphone and one mid-side capsule. Both of these capsules fit on the top slot on the recorder. There are also 4 XLR/Line in ports, each with their own individual volume, pad controls, and phantom power (+12V/ +24V/ +48V). It also features a headphone out jack and a 3.5mm line out jack that can hook up directly to a DSLR camera. Finally, the recorder features a metronome, chromatic tuner, and playback speed/pitch adjustments. 

===Safety Precaution & Care===
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to severe impacts or prolonged vibrations.'''
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to extreme temperatures. Drastic temperature changes cause a condensation build up in electronics.'''
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to water, sand, or mud.'''
* '''Do NOT use excessive force when operating this equipment.'''
* '''Do NOT drop the equipment!'''
* '''ALWAYS turn the power off before inserting or removing an SD card.'''
** '''Removing card while power is on may result in loss of data!'''
* '''When inserting an SD card, be sure to insert the correct end with the top side up as shown.'''
* '''When an SD card is not loaded, recording and playback are not possible.'''
<big>'''YOU ARE 100% FINANCIALLY RESPONSIBLE FOR THIS EQUIPMENT UPON CHECKOUT!!!!'''</big> 

<gallery>
File:Front diagram.jpg|Front View
File:Right diagram.jpg|Right View
File:Left diagram.jpg|Left View
File:Bottom diagram.jpg|Bottom View
</gallery>

===Power===
====Using Batteries====
The Zoom H6n uses alkaline batteries or nickel metal hydride batteries. 
[[File:Replace batteries H6.png]]
 
'''To place/replace batteries:'''
# Turn the power off and then remove the battery.
# Remove the battery cover.
# Install the batteries.
# Replace the battery cover.
#Select the correct type of battery you are using (Menu >> System >> Battery >> Alkaline or Ni-Mh) 

If the battery indicator becomes empty, turn the power off immediately and install new batteries. 

====Using an AC adapter====
#Connect a USB cable to the USB jack. 
#Plug the adapter into an outlet. 

===OPERATIONS===
====Scroll Wheel====
Just like in the previous model, the Zoom H6n uses a scroll wheel to navigate through the menus. 
To navigate up and down, gently push up and down the scroll wheel. 
To validate your option choices (in this article we refer to it as"OK"), PRESS DOWN on the scroll wheel. 

[[File:Scroll wheel.gif]]

====Attachable Microphone Overview====
The Zoom H6N kit comes with two attachable microphones, one is a stereo XY microphone and the other is a cardioid capsule, each has a L/R output. 

=====XY Microphone=====
<gallery>
File:Zoom H6n YX mic.jpg|XY Mic
File:XY mic.png|XY Mic
</gallery>

 
The XY microphone has two crossing directional microphones which can be set for either 90 degrees or 120 degrees, dependent upon the field you wish to capture. Best for close/medium range recording (chamber music, live concert, interview, field recording, etc). 

=====MS Microphone=====
<gallery>
File:Zoom H6n MS mic.jpg|MS Mic
File:MS mic.png|MS Mic
</gallery>
 
This microphone has a unidirectional mid-range microphone for central recording capture and a bidirectional microphone build in that can be adjusted to change the stereo field. This mic can capture a fairly accurate and crisp stereo field. Best for mono recording (interviews, narrations, and meetings). 

======Connecting and Disconnecting Attachable Microphones======

'''Connection'''
# Remove the protective caps from the H6 main unit and the microphone.
# While Pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, connect it to the main unit, inserting the connector completely.
 
'''Disconnection''' 
# While pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, pull it gently out of the main unit.
 
'''DO NOT SUBJECT THESE MICROPHONES TO HARSH TEMPERATURES, EXTREME WEATHER, OR IMPACT!!!'''

======Connecting External Microphones/ Other Devices to Inputs 1-4======

'''* Connecting External Microphones''' 
Connect dynamic and condenser microphones to the Input 1-4 XLR jacks. 
If a Condenser Microphone without dedicated power, set the onboard phantom power to (+12V/+24V/+48V) 

'''* Connecting instruments/ Other devices''' 
Connect keyboards and mixers directly in the input 1-4 TRS jacks. 
Direct input of passive guitars and basses is not supported. 
Set PAD to -20dB when connecting a mixer or other device with standard output level. 

'''* Stereo Inputs''' 
By linking tracks 1 and 2 (tracks 3 and 4) as stereo tracks, these can be used as stereo inputs. 
In this case, input 1 and 3 become the left channels and 2 and 4 become the right channels. 

====Connection Examples====
The Zoom H6n allows you to record in a variety of configurations. 
=====Interview Set Up=====
'''While filming:''' 
L/R input mic: Main subject 
Shotgun/lapel mics connected to Inputs 1/2: Performer 
Mics connected to Inputs 3/4: Ambient sound 
[[File:Interview setting H6n.png]] 

=====Concert Set Up=====
'''Concert recording:''' 
L/R input mic: Performance on stage 
Inputs 1/2: Line outputs from mixer 
Mics connected to Inputs 3/4: Audience sound 
[[File:Concert setup H6n.png]] 

====Turning the Device On/Off====
'''To Turn On''' 
Slide the hold button to the right (Where the power symbol is). 

'''To Turn Off''' 
Slide the hold button the right again (Where the power symbol is). 

====Setting Date and Time====
# Press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SYSTEM” and press the scroll wheel down.
# Use the scroll wheel, selected “Date/Time”, and press the scroll wheel down.
# Set date and time!
# Press the menu button again to return to the home screen.

====Setting The Recording Format====
Set the format according to the desired audio quality and file size. 

# Press Menu and use scroll wheel to select “REC”, and press OK. 
# Use Scroll wheel to select “Rec Format”, and press OK. 
# Use Scroll wheel to select the desired format, and press OK. 

<gallery>
File:Recording Format 1.png|Recording Format Step 1
File:Recording Format 2.png|Recording Format Step 2
File:Recording Format 3.png| Recording Format Step 3
File:Recording Format.png| Recording Format Quality Chart
</gallery>

'''NOTES:''' 
* Use the WAV format for recording high-quality audio.
* The MP3 format reduces file size through compression, which also reduces the audio quality. Use this format if you need to conserve space on the SD card to store many recordings, for example.
* When recording in MP3 format, a single stereo MP3 file will be created regardless of the number of tracks selected. You can use the monitoring mixer to adjust the balance of all the tracks in the stereo mix.
 

====Display Overview====
=====Home Recording Screen=====
[[File:Home recording screen.png]] 
=====Playback Screen=====
[[File:Playback screen.png]]

====Loading an SD Card====
# Turn the power off and then open the SD card slot cover. 
# Insert card into the slot. 
# To eject an SD card: Push the card further into the slot and then pull it out. 

====Formatting SD Cards====
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press down on the wheel. 
# Using the wheel to select “SD CARD Remain” and press the scroll wheel button to see the amount of remaining open space on a card. 
# To being the formatting process, press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press the scroll button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Format” and press the scroll wheel button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Yes” and press down on the scroll wheel to format the SD card. 

====Recording====
When recording with the Zoom H6n Audio Recorder, the following file structure/folders and files are created on the SD card: 
[[File:Screen Shot 2016-11-21 at 3.11.48 PM.png]] 

=====Automatic=====
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press the scroll button down. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Auto Rec” and press the button down. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select on/off and press the button. 
# Select “On” and press the button down. 
# Return to the Home Screen, and press the record button and put the recorder in standby. 
# Press the record button again to exit standby and stop recording. 

=====Pre-Record=====
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll to select “REC” and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Pre-Rec” and press the scroll button down. 
# Select “On” and press Ok. 

=====Back Up Recording=====
When using the L/R input, in addition to the recording at the set input level, the recorder can also record a separate file at a level 12dB below. This backup can be used if the recording level was set too high, causing distortion, for example. 

<gallery>
File:BackUpRecording1.png|BackUp Recording Step 1
File:BackUpRecording2.png|BackUp Recording Step 2
File:BackUpRecording3.png|BackUp Recording Step 3
</gallery>

# Press the menu button 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Backup Rec” and press Ok. 
# Select “On” and press Ok. 

HINT: If the name of the original file is, for example, “ZOOM0001_LR.wav”, the name of the backup file will be “ZOOM0001_BU.wav”. 

=====Overdubbing=====
This recording option will only work with external microphones. 
The X/Y and DS mic capsules will not work with the overdubbing mode. 

# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll to select “Overdub” and press Ok. 
# Press the track button until the indicator lights red for the track to be overdubbed. 
# Turn the volume knob to make adjustments. 
# To monitor already recorded tracks, press their track buttons so their indicators light green. 
# Press the record button to begin recording. 
# Press the record button to stop recording. 
# Press the menu button to stop overdubbing. When you play back or edit an overdubbed project, the last selected take will be used. 

====Playback====
=====Normal Playback=====
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT LIST”, and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select desired folder and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select the desired project and press Ok. Playback will begin. 

=====Changing Playback Speed=====
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok. 
# Select “Playback Speed” and press Ok, 
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust playback speed, press Ok. 

===File Management===
====Delete Project====
# To delete one project, press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU”, Press Ok. 
# Select “Trash” and press Ok. 
# Select “Delete” and press Ok. 
# Select “Yes” and press Ok. 
# To delete all projects in a folder, select “Delete All Projects” instead, and press Ok. 
# Note: Deletion of a project cannot be reversed! 

====File Transfers====
# Press menu. 
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok. 
# Select “SD Card Reader” and press Ok. 
# Connect the H6N to the computer using a USB cable. 
# Make sure to safely disconnect the H6N from the computer when finished to avoid damage to the files and the recorder! 

===Using the H6N Recorder as an Audio Interface===
# Press the menu button. 
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok. 
# Select “Audio Interface” and press Ok. 
# Select either “Stereo Mix” or “Multi Track” and press Ok. 
# Select either: “PC/Mac”, “PC/MAC using battery power” or “iPad using battery power”, and press Ok. 
# Connect the H6N to the computer or iPad using a USB cable. 
# Press the menu to disconnect. 
# Select “EXIT” and press Ok. 
# Select “Yes” and press Ok. 
# Disconnect the cable from the computer or iPad and the H6, and press the menu button. 

===H6N Chromatic Tuner===
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL”, press Ok. 
# Select “Tuner” and press Ok. 
# Select preferred tuning type and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust standard pitch. 
# For all tuner types besides chromatic, use the forward and rewind button to change pitch (For drop tuning) 
# Press a track button to select input to use. 
# Use the tuner according to the type. 
# Chromatic: shows pitch inaccuracies and note that the device is detecting. 
# Guitar/Bass Tuning: The number of strings being tuned is automatically detected, allowing for tuning one at a time. 

===Using the Metronome===
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL” and press Ok. 
# Select “Metronome” and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select a menu item, and press Ok. 
# Select “Click”, use the scroll wheel to set when the metronome is active, and press Ok. 
# Select “Precount”. 
# Select “Tempo”. Use the scroll wheel to select the speed, and press the menu button. 
# Select “Sound”. Use the scroll wheel to set the sound and press Ok. 
# Select “Pattern” use the scroll wheel to select desired musical pattern. 
# Select “Level” and set to desired volume, press Ok. 

===Linking Inputs===
You can link inputs so that they become one stereo track. Do this by holding down one input button and then press another. You will see on the screen that they have become linked and both lights will illuminate simultaneously. 

Example: To link inputs 1 and 2, hold down the input 1 button and then press 2. 

Use the same method to unlink inputs.

[[Category:Media Loan]]

APS/AS Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Operating Guide

2020-05-04T15:26:36Z

Highberh: /* XY Microphone */

[[File:Zoom H6 Accessories.jpg]]
[[File:Zoom H6 right view.jpg]]
 

A proficiency test is required to check out this Audio Recorder. Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [https://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/APS/AS_Zoom_H6n_Audio_Recorder_Proficiency_Test APS Zoom H4n Audio Recorder Proficiency Test] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.

===Introduction===
The Zoom H6n is a versatile and extremely portable 6 track field recorder for use in the field for sound collection, studio recording, and audio for video shoots. The H6n comes with one XY stereo field microphone and one mid-side capsule. Both of these capsules fit on the top slot on the recorder. There are also 4 XLR/Line in ports, each with their own individual volume, pad controls, and phantom power (+12V/ +24V/ +48V). It also features a headphone out jack and a 3.5mm line out jack that can hook up directly to a DSLR camera. Finally, the recorder features a metronome, chromatic tuner, and playback speed/pitch adjustments. 

===Safety Precaution & Care===
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to severe impacts or prolonged vibrations.'''
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to extreme temperatures. Drastic temperature changes cause a condensation build up in electronics.'''
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to water, sand, or mud.'''
* '''Do NOT use excessive force when operating this equipment.'''
* '''Do NOT drop the equipment!'''
* '''ALWAYS turn the power off before inserting or removing an SD card.'''
** '''Removing card while power is on may result in loss of data!'''
* '''When inserting an SD card, be sure to insert the correct end with the top side up as shown.'''
* '''When an SD card is not loaded, recording and playback are not possible.'''
<big>'''YOU ARE 100% FINANCIALLY RESPONSIBLE FOR THIS EQUIPMENT UPON CHECKOUT!!!!'''</big> 

<gallery>
File:Front diagram.jpg|Front View
File:Right diagram.jpg|Right View
File:Left diagram.jpg|Left View
File:Bottom diagram.jpg|Bottom View
</gallery>

===Power===
====Using Batteries====
The Zoom H6n uses alkaline batteries or nickel metal hydride batteries. 
[[File:Replace batteries H6.png]]
 
'''To place/replace batteries:'''
# Turn the power off and then remove the battery.
# Remove the battery cover.
# Install the batteries.
# Replace the battery cover.
#Select the correct type of battery you are using (Menu >> System >> Battery >> Alkaline or Ni-Mh) 

If the battery indicator becomes empty, turn the power off immediately and install new batteries. 

====Using an AC adapter====
#Connect a USB cable to the USB jack. 
#Plug the adapter into an outlet. 

===Operations===
====Scroll Wheel====
Just like in the previous model, the Zoom H6n uses a scroll wheel to navigate through the menus. 
To navigate up and down, gently push up and down the scroll wheel. 
To validate your option choices (in this article we refer to it as"OK"), PRESS DOWN on the scroll wheel. 

[[File:Scroll wheel.gif]]

====Attachable Microphone Overview====
The Zoom H6N kit comes with two attachable microphones, one is a stereo XY microphone and the other is a cardioid capsule, each has a L/R output. 

=====XY Microphone=====
<gallery>
File:Zoom H6n YX mic.jpg|XY Mic
File:XY mic.png|XY Mic
</gallery>

 
The XY microphone has two crossing directional microphones which can be set for either 90 degrees or 120 degrees, dependent upon the field you wish to capture. Best for close/medium range recording (chamber music, live concert, interview, field recording, etc). 

=====MS Microphone=====
<gallery>
File:Zoom H6n MS mic.jpg|MS Mic
File:MS mic.png|MS Mic
</gallery>
 
This microphone has a unidirectional mid-range microphone for central recording capture and a bidirectional microphone build in that can be adjusted to change the stereo field. This mic can capture a fairly accurate and crisp stereo field. Best for mono recording (interviews, narrations, and meetings). 

======Connecting and Disconnecting Attachable Microphones======

'''Connection'''
# Remove the protective caps from the H6 main unit and the microphone.
# While Pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, connect it to the main unit, inserting the connector completely.
 
'''Disconnection''' 
# While pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, pull it gently out of the main unit.
 
'''DO NOT SUBJECT THESE MICROPHONES TO HARSH TEMPERATURES, EXTREME WEATHER, OR IMPACT!!!'''

======Connecting External Microphones/ Other Devices to Inputs 1-4======

'''* Connecting External Microphones''' 
Connect dynamic and condenser microphones to the Input 1-4 XLR jacks. 
If a Condenser Microphone without dedicated power, set the onboard phantom power to (+12V/+24V/+48V) 

'''* Connecting instruments/ Other devices''' 
Connect keyboards and mixers directly in the input 1-4 TRS jacks. 
Direct input of passive guitars and basses is not supported. 
Set PAD to -20dB when connecting a mixer or other device with standard output level. 

'''* Stereo Inputs''' 
By linking tracks 1 and 2 (tracks 3 and 4) as stereo tracks, these can be used as stereo inputs. 
In this case, input 1 and 3 become the left channels and 2 and 4 become the right channels. 

====Connection Examples====
The Zoom H6n allows you to record in a variety of configurations. 
=====Interview Set Up=====
'''While filming:''' 
L/R input mic: Main subject 
Shotgun/lapel mics connected to Inputs 1/2: Performer 
Mics connected to Inputs 3/4: Ambient sound 
[[File:Interview setting H6n.png]] 

=====Concert Set Up=====
'''Concert recording:''' 
L/R input mic: Performance on stage 
Inputs 1/2: Line outputs from mixer 
Mics connected to Inputs 3/4: Audience sound 
[[File:Concert setup H6n.png]] 

====Turning the Device On/Off====
'''To Turn On''' 
Slide the hold button to the right (Where the power symbol is). 

'''To Turn Off''' 
Slide the hold button the right again (Where the power symbol is). 

====Setting Date and Time====
# Press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SYSTEM” and press the scroll wheel down.
# Use the scroll wheel, selected “Date/Time”, and press the scroll wheel down.
# Set date and time!
# Press the menu button again to return to the home screen.

====Setting The Recording Format====
Set the format according to the desired audio quality and file size. 

# Press Menu and use scroll wheel to select “REC”, and press OK. 
# Use Scroll wheel to select “Rec Format”, and press OK. 
# Use Scroll wheel to select the desired format, and press OK. 

<gallery>
File:Recording Format 1.png|Recording Format Step 1
File:Recording Format 2.png|Recording Format Step 2
File:Recording Format 3.png| Recording Format Step 3
File:Recording Format.png| Recording Format Quality Chart
</gallery>

'''NOTES:''' 
* Use the WAV format for recording high-quality audio.
* The MP3 format reduces file size through compression, which also reduces the audio quality. Use this format if you need to conserve space on the SD card to store many recordings, for example.
* When recording in MP3 format, a single stereo MP3 file will be created regardless of the number of tracks selected. You can use the monitoring mixer to adjust the balance of all the tracks in the stereo mix.
 

====Display Overview====
=====Home Recording Screen=====
[[File:Home recording screen.png]] 
=====Playback Screen=====
[[File:Playback screen.png]]

====Loading an SD Card====
# Turn the power off and then open the SD card slot cover. 
# Insert card into the slot. 
# To eject an SD card: Push the card further into the slot and then pull it out. 

====Formatting SD Cards====
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press down on the wheel. 
# Using the wheel to select “SD CARD Remain” and press the scroll wheel button to see the amount of remaining open space on a card. 
# To being the formatting process, press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press the scroll button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Format” and press the scroll wheel button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Yes” and press down on the scroll wheel to format the SD card. 

====Recording====
When recording with the Zoom H6n Audio Recorder, the following file structure/folders and files are created on the SD card: 
[[File:Screen Shot 2016-11-21 at 3.11.48 PM.png]] 

=====Automatic=====
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press the scroll button down. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Auto Rec” and press the button down. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select on/off and press the button. 
# Select “On” and press the button down. 
# Return to the Home Screen, and press the record button and put the recorder in standby. 
# Press the record button again to exit standby and stop recording. 

=====Pre-Record=====
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll to select “REC” and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Pre-Rec” and press the scroll button down. 
# Select “On” and press Ok. 

=====Back Up Recording=====
When using the L/R input, in addition to the recording at the set input level, the recorder can also record a separate file at a level 12dB below. This backup can be used if the recording level was set too high, causing distortion, for example. 

<gallery>
File:BackUpRecording1.png|BackUp Recording Step 1
File:BackUpRecording2.png|BackUp Recording Step 2
File:BackUpRecording3.png|BackUp Recording Step 3
</gallery>

# Press the menu button 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Backup Rec” and press Ok. 
# Select “On” and press Ok. 

HINT: If the name of the original file is, for example, “ZOOM0001_LR.wav”, the name of the backup file will be “ZOOM0001_BU.wav”. 

=====Overdubbing=====
This recording option will only work with external microphones. 
The X/Y and DS mic capsules will not work with the overdubbing mode. 

# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll to select “Overdub” and press Ok. 
# Press the track button until the indicator lights red for the track to be overdubbed. 
# Turn the volume knob to make adjustments. 
# To monitor already recorded tracks, press their track buttons so their indicators light green. 
# Press the record button to begin recording. 
# Press the record button to stop recording. 
# Press the menu button to stop overdubbing. When you play back or edit an overdubbed project, the last selected take will be used. 

====Playback====
=====Normal Playback=====
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT LIST”, and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select desired folder and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select the desired project and press Ok. Playback will begin. 

=====Changing Playback Speed=====
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok. 
# Select “Playback Speed” and press Ok, 
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust playback speed, press Ok. 

===File Management===
====Delete Project====
# To delete one project, press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU”, Press Ok. 
# Select “Trash” and press Ok. 
# Select “Delete” and press Ok. 
# Select “Yes” and press Ok. 
# To delete all projects in a folder, select “Delete All Projects” instead, and press Ok. 
# Note: Deletion of a project cannot be reversed! 

====File Transfers====
# Press menu. 
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok. 
# Select “SD Card Reader” and press Ok. 
# Connect the H6N to the computer using a USB cable. 
# Make sure to safely disconnect the H6N from the computer when finished to avoid damage to the files and the recorder! 

===Using the H6N Recorder as an Audio Interface===
# Press the menu button. 
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok. 
# Select “Audio Interface” and press Ok. 
# Select either “Stereo Mix” or “Multi Track” and press Ok. 
# Select either: “PC/Mac”, “PC/MAC using battery power” or “iPad using battery power”, and press Ok. 
# Connect the H6N to the computer or iPad using a USB cable. 
# Press the menu to disconnect. 
# Select “EXIT” and press Ok. 
# Select “Yes” and press Ok. 
# Disconnect the cable from the computer or iPad and the H6, and press the menu button. 

===H6N Chromatic Tuner===
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL”, press Ok. 
# Select “Tuner” and press Ok. 
# Select preferred tuning type and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust standard pitch. 
# For all tuner types besides chromatic, use the forward and rewind button to change pitch (For drop tuning) 
# Press a track button to select input to use. 
# Use the tuner according to the type. 
# Chromatic: shows pitch inaccuracies and note that the device is detecting. 
# Guitar/Bass Tuning: The number of strings being tuned is automatically detected, allowing for tuning one at a time. 

===Using the Metronome===
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL” and press Ok. 
# Select “Metronome” and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select a menu item, and press Ok. 
# Select “Click”, use the scroll wheel to set when the metronome is active, and press Ok. 
# Select “Precount”. 
# Select “Tempo”. Use the scroll wheel to select the speed, and press the menu button. 
# Select “Sound”. Use the scroll wheel to set the sound and press Ok. 
# Select “Pattern” use the scroll wheel to select desired musical pattern. 
# Select “Level” and set to desired volume, press Ok. 

===Linking Inputs===
You can link inputs so that they become one stereo track. Do this by holding down one input button and then press another. You will see on the screen that they have become linked and both lights will illuminate simultaneously. 

Example: To link inputs 1 and 2, hold down the input 1 button and then press 2. 

Use the same method to unlink inputs.

[[Category:Media Loan]]

APS/AS Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Operating Guide

2020-05-04T15:23:28Z

Highberh: /* Introduction */

[[File:Zoom H6 Accessories.jpg]]
[[File:Zoom H6 right view.jpg]]
 

A proficiency test is required to check out this Audio Recorder. Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [https://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/APS/AS_Zoom_H6n_Audio_Recorder_Proficiency_Test APS Zoom H4n Audio Recorder Proficiency Test] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.

===Introduction===
The Zoom H6n is a versatile and extremely portable 6 track field recorder for use in the field for sound collection, studio recording, and audio for video shoots. The H6n comes with one XY stereo field microphone and one mid-side capsule. Both of these capsules fit on the top slot on the recorder. There are also 4 XLR/Line in ports, each with their own individual volume, pad controls, and phantom power (+12V/ +24V/ +48V). It also features a headphone out jack and a 3.5mm line out jack that can hook up directly to a DSLR camera. Finally, the recorder features a metronome, chromatic tuner, and playback speed/pitch adjustments. 

===Safety Precaution & Care===
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to severe impacts or prolonged vibrations.'''
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to extreme temperatures. Drastic temperature changes cause a condensation build up in electronics.'''
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to water, sand, or mud.'''
* '''Do NOT use excessive force when operating this equipment.'''
* '''Do NOT drop the equipment!'''
* '''ALWAYS turn the power off before inserting or removing an SD card.'''
** '''Removing card while power is on may result in loss of data!'''
* '''When inserting an SD card, be sure to insert the correct end with the top side up as shown.'''
* '''When an SD card is not loaded, recording and playback are not possible.'''
<big>'''YOU ARE 100% FINANCIALLY RESPONSIBLE FOR THIS EQUIPMENT UPON CHECKOUT!!!!'''</big> 

<gallery>
File:Front diagram.jpg|Front View
File:Right diagram.jpg|Right View
File:Left diagram.jpg|Left View
File:Bottom diagram.jpg|Bottom View
</gallery>

===Power===
====Using Batteries====
The Zoom H6n uses alkaline batteries or nickel metal hydride batteries. 
[[File:Replace batteries H6.png]]
 
'''To place/replace batteries:'''
# Turn the power off and then remove the battery.
# Remove the battery cover.
# Install the batteries.
# Replace the battery cover.
#Select the correct type of battery you are using (Menu >> System >> Battery >> Alkaline or Ni-Mh) 

If the battery indicator becomes empty, turn the power off immediately and install new batteries. 

====Using an AC adapter====
#Connect a USB cable to the USB jack. 
#Plug the adapter into an outlet. 

===Operations===
====Scroll Wheel====
Just like in the previous model, the Zoom H6n uses a scroll wheel to navigate through the menus. 
To navigate up and down, gently push up and down the scroll wheel. 
To validate your option choices (in this article we refer to it as"OK"), PRESS DOWN on the scroll wheel. 

[[File:Scroll wheel.gif]]

====Attachable Microphone Overview====
The Zoom H6N kit comes with two attachable microphones, one is a stereo XY microphone and the other is a cardioid capsule, each has a L/R output. 

=====XY Microphone=====
<gallery>
File:Zoom H6n YX mic.jpg|XY Mic
File:XY mic.png|XY Mic
</gallery>

 
Has two crossing directional microphones which can be set for either 90 degrees or 120 degrees, dependent upon the field you wish to capture. Best for close/medium range recording (chamber music, live concert, interview, field recording, etc). 

=====MS Microphone=====
<gallery>
File:Zoom H6n MS mic.jpg|MS Mic
File:MS mic.png|MS Mic
</gallery>
 
This microphone has a unidirectional mid-range microphone for central recording capture and a bidirectional microphone build in that can be adjusted to change the stereo field. This mic can capture a fairly accurate and crisp stereo field. Best for mono recording (interviews, narrations, and meetings). 

======Connecting and Disconnecting Attachable Microphones======

'''Connection'''
# Remove the protective caps from the H6 main unit and the microphone.
# While Pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, connect it to the main unit, inserting the connector completely.
 
'''Disconnection''' 
# While pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, pull it gently out of the main unit.
 
'''DO NOT SUBJECT THESE MICROPHONES TO HARSH TEMPERATURES, EXTREME WEATHER, OR IMPACT!!!'''

======Connecting External Microphones/ Other Devices to Inputs 1-4======

'''* Connecting External Microphones''' 
Connect dynamic and condenser microphones to the Input 1-4 XLR jacks. 
If a Condenser Microphone without dedicated power, set the onboard phantom power to (+12V/+24V/+48V) 

'''* Connecting instruments/ Other devices''' 
Connect keyboards and mixers directly in the input 1-4 TRS jacks. 
Direct input of passive guitars and basses is not supported. 
Set PAD to -20dB when connecting a mixer or other device with standard output level. 

'''* Stereo Inputs''' 
By linking tracks 1 and 2 (tracks 3 and 4) as stereo tracks, these can be used as stereo inputs. 
In this case, input 1 and 3 become the left channels and 2 and 4 become the right channels. 

====Connection Examples====
The Zoom H6n allows you to record in a variety of configurations. 
=====Interview Set Up=====
'''While filming:''' 
L/R input mic: Main subject 
Shotgun/lapel mics connected to Inputs 1/2: Performer 
Mics connected to Inputs 3/4: Ambient sound 
[[File:Interview setting H6n.png]] 

=====Concert Set Up=====
'''Concert recording:''' 
L/R input mic: Performance on stage 
Inputs 1/2: Line outputs from mixer 
Mics connected to Inputs 3/4: Audience sound 
[[File:Concert setup H6n.png]] 

====Turning the Device On/Off====
'''To Turn On''' 
Slide the hold button to the right (Where the power symbol is). 

'''To Turn Off''' 
Slide the hold button the right again (Where the power symbol is). 

====Setting Date and Time====
# Press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SYSTEM” and press the scroll wheel down.
# Use the scroll wheel, selected “Date/Time”, and press the scroll wheel down.
# Set date and time!
# Press the menu button again to return to the home screen.

====Setting The Recording Format====
Set the format according to the desired audio quality and file size. 

# Press Menu and use scroll wheel to select “REC”, and press OK. 
# Use Scroll wheel to select “Rec Format”, and press OK. 
# Use Scroll wheel to select the desired format, and press OK. 

<gallery>
File:Recording Format 1.png|Recording Format Step 1
File:Recording Format 2.png|Recording Format Step 2
File:Recording Format 3.png| Recording Format Step 3
File:Recording Format.png| Recording Format Quality Chart
</gallery>

'''NOTES:''' 
* Use the WAV format for recording high-quality audio.
* The MP3 format reduces file size through compression, which also reduces the audio quality. Use this format if you need to conserve space on the SD card to store many recordings, for example.
* When recording in MP3 format, a single stereo MP3 file will be created regardless of the number of tracks selected. You can use the monitoring mixer to adjust the balance of all the tracks in the stereo mix.
 

====Display Overview====
=====Home Recording Screen=====
[[File:Home recording screen.png]] 
=====Playback Screen=====
[[File:Playback screen.png]]

====Loading an SD Card====
# Turn the power off and then open the SD card slot cover. 
# Insert card into the slot. 
# To eject an SD card: Push the card further into the slot and then pull it out. 

====Formatting SD Cards====
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press down on the wheel. 
# Using the wheel to select “SD CARD Remain” and press the scroll wheel button to see the amount of remaining open space on a card. 
# To being the formatting process, press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press the scroll button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Format” and press the scroll wheel button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Yes” and press down on the scroll wheel to format the SD card. 

====Recording====
When recording with the Zoom H6n Audio Recorder, the following file structure/folders and files are created on the SD card: 
[[File:Screen Shot 2016-11-21 at 3.11.48 PM.png]] 

=====Automatic=====
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press the scroll button down. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Auto Rec” and press the button down. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select on/off and press the button. 
# Select “On” and press the button down. 
# Return to the Home Screen, and press the record button and put the recorder in standby. 
# Press the record button again to exit standby and stop recording. 

=====Pre-Record=====
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll to select “REC” and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Pre-Rec” and press the scroll button down. 
# Select “On” and press Ok. 

=====Back Up Recording=====
When using the L/R input, in addition to the recording at the set input level, the recorder can also record a separate file at a level 12dB below. This backup can be used if the recording level was set too high, causing distortion, for example. 

<gallery>
File:BackUpRecording1.png|BackUp Recording Step 1
File:BackUpRecording2.png|BackUp Recording Step 2
File:BackUpRecording3.png|BackUp Recording Step 3
</gallery>

# Press the menu button 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Backup Rec” and press Ok. 
# Select “On” and press Ok. 

HINT: If the name of the original file is, for example, “ZOOM0001_LR.wav”, the name of the backup file will be “ZOOM0001_BU.wav”. 

=====Overdubbing=====
This recording option will only work with external microphones. 
The X/Y and DS mic capsules will not work with the overdubbing mode. 

# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll to select “Overdub” and press Ok. 
# Press the track button until the indicator lights red for the track to be overdubbed. 
# Turn the volume knob to make adjustments. 
# To monitor already recorded tracks, press their track buttons so their indicators light green. 
# Press the record button to begin recording. 
# Press the record button to stop recording. 
# Press the menu button to stop overdubbing. When you play back or edit an overdubbed project, the last selected take will be used. 

====Playback====
=====Normal Playback=====
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT LIST”, and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select desired folder and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select the desired project and press Ok. Playback will begin. 

=====Changing Playback Speed=====
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok. 
# Select “Playback Speed” and press Ok, 
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust playback speed, press Ok. 

===File Management===
====Delete Project====
# To delete one project, press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU”, Press Ok. 
# Select “Trash” and press Ok. 
# Select “Delete” and press Ok. 
# Select “Yes” and press Ok. 
# To delete all projects in a folder, select “Delete All Projects” instead, and press Ok. 
# Note: Deletion of a project cannot be reversed! 

====File Transfers====
# Press menu. 
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok. 
# Select “SD Card Reader” and press Ok. 
# Connect the H6N to the computer using a USB cable. 
# Make sure to safely disconnect the H6N from the computer when finished to avoid damage to the files and the recorder! 

===Using the H6N Recorder as an Audio Interface===
# Press the menu button. 
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok. 
# Select “Audio Interface” and press Ok. 
# Select either “Stereo Mix” or “Multi Track” and press Ok. 
# Select either: “PC/Mac”, “PC/MAC using battery power” or “iPad using battery power”, and press Ok. 
# Connect the H6N to the computer or iPad using a USB cable. 
# Press the menu to disconnect. 
# Select “EXIT” and press Ok. 
# Select “Yes” and press Ok. 
# Disconnect the cable from the computer or iPad and the H6, and press the menu button. 

===H6N Chromatic Tuner===
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL”, press Ok. 
# Select “Tuner” and press Ok. 
# Select preferred tuning type and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust standard pitch. 
# For all tuner types besides chromatic, use the forward and rewind button to change pitch (For drop tuning) 
# Press a track button to select input to use. 
# Use the tuner according to the type. 
# Chromatic: shows pitch inaccuracies and note that the device is detecting. 
# Guitar/Bass Tuning: The number of strings being tuned is automatically detected, allowing for tuning one at a time. 

===Using the Metronome===
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL” and press Ok. 
# Select “Metronome” and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select a menu item, and press Ok. 
# Select “Click”, use the scroll wheel to set when the metronome is active, and press Ok. 
# Select “Precount”. 
# Select “Tempo”. Use the scroll wheel to select the speed, and press the menu button. 
# Select “Sound”. Use the scroll wheel to set the sound and press Ok. 
# Select “Pattern” use the scroll wheel to select desired musical pattern. 
# Select “Level” and set to desired volume, press Ok. 

===Linking Inputs===
You can link inputs so that they become one stereo track. Do this by holding down one input button and then press another. You will see on the screen that they have become linked and both lights will illuminate simultaneously. 

Example: To link inputs 1 and 2, hold down the input 1 button and then press 2. 

Use the same method to unlink inputs.

[[Category:Media Loan]]

APS/AS Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Operating Guide

2020-05-04T15:20:58Z

Highberh: /* Introduction */

[[File:Zoom H6 Accessories.jpg]]
[[File:Zoom H6 right view.jpg]]
 

A proficiency test is required to check out this Audio Recorder. Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [https://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/APS/AS_Zoom_H6n_Audio_Recorder_Proficiency_Test APS Zoom H4n Audio Recorder Proficiency Test] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.

===Introduction===
The ZOOM H6N is a versatile and extremely portable 6 track field recorder for use in the field for sound collection, studio recording, and audio for video shoots. The H6N comes with one XY stereo field microphone and one mid-side capsule. Both of these capsules fit on the top slot on the recorder. There are also 4 XLR/Line in ports, each with their own individual volume, pad controls, and phantom power (+12V/ +24V/ +48V). It also features a headphone out jack and a 3.5mm line out jack that can hook up directly to a DSLR camera. Finally, the recorder features a metronome, chromatic tuner, and playback speed/pitch adjustments. 

===Safety Precaution & Care===
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to severe impacts or prolonged vibrations.''' 
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to extreme temperatures. Drastic temperature changes cause a condensation build up in electronics.''' 
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to water, sand, or mud.''' 
* '''Do NOT use excessive force when operating this equipment.''' 
* '''Do NOT drop the equipment!''' 
* '''Always turn the power off before inserting or removing an SD card.''' 
* '''Removing card while power is on may result in loss of data!''' 
* '''When inserting an SD card, be sure to insert the correct end with the top side up as shown.''' 
* '''When an SD card is not loaded, recording and playback are not possible.''' 
 

<big>'''YOU ARE 100% FINANCIALLY RESPONSIBLE FOR THIS EQUIPMENT UPON CHECKOUT!!!!'''</big> 

<gallery>
File:Front diagram.jpg|Front View
File:Right diagram.jpg|Right View
File:Left diagram.jpg|Left View
File:Bottom diagram.jpg|Bottom View
</gallery>

===Power===
====Using Batteries====
The Zoom H6n uses alkaline batteries or nickel metal hydride batteries. 
[[File:Replace batteries H6.png]]
 
'''To place/replace batteries:'''
# Turn the power off and then remove the battery.
# Remove the battery cover.
# Install the batteries.
# Replace the battery cover.
#Select the correct type of battery you are using (Menu >> System >> Battery >> Alkaline or Ni-Mh) 

If the battery indicator becomes empty, turn the power off immediately and install new batteries. 

====Using an AC adapter====
#Connect a USB cable to the USB jack. 
#Plug the adapter into an outlet. 

===Operations===
====Scroll Wheel====
Just like in the previous model, the Zoom H6n uses a scroll wheel to navigate through the menus. 
To navigate up and down, gently push up and down the scroll wheel. 
To validate your option choices (in this article we refer to it as"OK"), PRESS DOWN on the scroll wheel. 

[[File:Scroll wheel.gif]]

====Attachable Microphone Overview====
The Zoom H6N kit comes with two attachable microphones, one is a stereo XY microphone and the other is a cardioid capsule, each has a L/R output. 

=====XY Microphone=====
<gallery>
File:Zoom H6n YX mic.jpg|XY Mic
File:XY mic.png|XY Mic
</gallery>

 
Has two crossing directional microphones which can be set for either 90 degrees or 120 degrees, dependent upon the field you wish to capture. Best for close/medium range recording (chamber music, live concert, interview, field recording, etc). 

=====MS Microphone=====
<gallery>
File:Zoom H6n MS mic.jpg|MS Mic
File:MS mic.png|MS Mic
</gallery>
 
This microphone has a unidirectional mid-range microphone for central recording capture and a bidirectional microphone build in that can be adjusted to change the stereo field. This mic can capture a fairly accurate and crisp stereo field. Best for mono recording (interviews, narrations, and meetings). 

======Connecting and Disconnecting Attachable Microphones======

'''Connection'''
# Remove the protective caps from the H6 main unit and the microphone.
# While Pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, connect it to the main unit, inserting the connector completely.
 
'''Disconnection''' 
# While pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, pull it gently out of the main unit.
 
'''DO NOT SUBJECT THESE MICROPHONES TO HARSH TEMPERATURES, EXTREME WEATHER, OR IMPACT!!!'''

======Connecting External Microphones/ Other Devices to Inputs 1-4======

'''* Connecting External Microphones''' 
Connect dynamic and condenser microphones to the Input 1-4 XLR jacks. 
If a Condenser Microphone without dedicated power, set the onboard phantom power to (+12V/+24V/+48V) 

'''* Connecting instruments/ Other devices''' 
Connect keyboards and mixers directly in the input 1-4 TRS jacks. 
Direct input of passive guitars and basses is not supported. 
Set PAD to -20dB when connecting a mixer or other device with standard output level. 

'''* Stereo Inputs''' 
By linking tracks 1 and 2 (tracks 3 and 4) as stereo tracks, these can be used as stereo inputs. 
In this case, input 1 and 3 become the left channels and 2 and 4 become the right channels. 

====Connection Examples====
The Zoom H6n allows you to record in a variety of configurations. 
=====Interview Set Up=====
'''While filming:''' 
L/R input mic: Main subject 
Shotgun/lapel mics connected to Inputs 1/2: Performer 
Mics connected to Inputs 3/4: Ambient sound 
[[File:Interview setting H6n.png]] 

=====Concert Set Up=====
'''Concert recording:''' 
L/R input mic: Performance on stage 
Inputs 1/2: Line outputs from mixer 
Mics connected to Inputs 3/4: Audience sound 
[[File:Concert setup H6n.png]] 

====Turning the Device On/Off====
'''To Turn On''' 
Slide the hold button to the right (Where the power symbol is). 

'''To Turn Off''' 
Slide the hold button the right again (Where the power symbol is). 

====Setting Date and Time====
# Press the menu button.
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SYSTEM” and press the scroll wheel down.
# Use the scroll wheel, selected “Date/Time”, and press the scroll wheel down.
# Set date and time!
# Press the menu button again to return to the home screen.

====Setting The Recording Format====
Set the format according to the desired audio quality and file size. 

# Press Menu and use scroll wheel to select “REC”, and press OK. 
# Use Scroll wheel to select “Rec Format”, and press OK. 
# Use Scroll wheel to select the desired format, and press OK. 

<gallery>
File:Recording Format 1.png|Recording Format Step 1
File:Recording Format 2.png|Recording Format Step 2
File:Recording Format 3.png| Recording Format Step 3
File:Recording Format.png| Recording Format Quality Chart
</gallery>

'''NOTES:''' 
* Use the WAV format for recording high-quality audio.
* The MP3 format reduces file size through compression, which also reduces the audio quality. Use this format if you need to conserve space on the SD card to store many recordings, for example.
* When recording in MP3 format, a single stereo MP3 file will be created regardless of the number of tracks selected. You can use the monitoring mixer to adjust the balance of all the tracks in the stereo mix.
 

====Display Overview====
=====Home Recording Screen=====
[[File:Home recording screen.png]] 
=====Playback Screen=====
[[File:Playback screen.png]]

====Loading an SD Card====
# Turn the power off and then open the SD card slot cover. 
# Insert card into the slot. 
# To eject an SD card: Push the card further into the slot and then pull it out. 

====Formatting SD Cards====
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press down on the wheel. 
# Using the wheel to select “SD CARD Remain” and press the scroll wheel button to see the amount of remaining open space on a card. 
# To being the formatting process, press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press the scroll button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Format” and press the scroll wheel button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Yes” and press down on the scroll wheel to format the SD card. 

====Recording====
When recording with the Zoom H6n Audio Recorder, the following file structure/folders and files are created on the SD card: 
[[File:Screen Shot 2016-11-21 at 3.11.48 PM.png]] 

=====Automatic=====
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press the scroll button down. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Auto Rec” and press the button down. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select on/off and press the button. 
# Select “On” and press the button down. 
# Return to the Home Screen, and press the record button and put the recorder in standby. 
# Press the record button again to exit standby and stop recording. 

=====Pre-Record=====
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll to select “REC” and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Pre-Rec” and press the scroll button down. 
# Select “On” and press Ok. 

=====Back Up Recording=====
When using the L/R input, in addition to the recording at the set input level, the recorder can also record a separate file at a level 12dB below. This backup can be used if the recording level was set too high, causing distortion, for example. 

<gallery>
File:BackUpRecording1.png|BackUp Recording Step 1
File:BackUpRecording2.png|BackUp Recording Step 2
File:BackUpRecording3.png|BackUp Recording Step 3
</gallery>

# Press the menu button 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Backup Rec” and press Ok. 
# Select “On” and press Ok. 

HINT: If the name of the original file is, for example, “ZOOM0001_LR.wav”, the name of the backup file will be “ZOOM0001_BU.wav”. 

=====Overdubbing=====
This recording option will only work with external microphones. 
The X/Y and DS mic capsules will not work with the overdubbing mode. 

# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll to select “Overdub” and press Ok. 
# Press the track button until the indicator lights red for the track to be overdubbed. 
# Turn the volume knob to make adjustments. 
# To monitor already recorded tracks, press their track buttons so their indicators light green. 
# Press the record button to begin recording. 
# Press the record button to stop recording. 
# Press the menu button to stop overdubbing. When you play back or edit an overdubbed project, the last selected take will be used. 

====Playback====
=====Normal Playback=====
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT LIST”, and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select desired folder and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select the desired project and press Ok. Playback will begin. 

=====Changing Playback Speed=====
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok. 
# Select “Playback Speed” and press Ok, 
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust playback speed, press Ok. 

===File Management===
====Delete Project====
# To delete one project, press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU”, Press Ok. 
# Select “Trash” and press Ok. 
# Select “Delete” and press Ok. 
# Select “Yes” and press Ok. 
# To delete all projects in a folder, select “Delete All Projects” instead, and press Ok. 
# Note: Deletion of a project cannot be reversed! 

====File Transfers====
# Press menu. 
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok. 
# Select “SD Card Reader” and press Ok. 
# Connect the H6N to the computer using a USB cable. 
# Make sure to safely disconnect the H6N from the computer when finished to avoid damage to the files and the recorder! 

===Using the H6N Recorder as an Audio Interface===
# Press the menu button. 
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok. 
# Select “Audio Interface” and press Ok. 
# Select either “Stereo Mix” or “Multi Track” and press Ok. 
# Select either: “PC/Mac”, “PC/MAC using battery power” or “iPad using battery power”, and press Ok. 
# Connect the H6N to the computer or iPad using a USB cable. 
# Press the menu to disconnect. 
# Select “EXIT” and press Ok. 
# Select “Yes” and press Ok. 
# Disconnect the cable from the computer or iPad and the H6, and press the menu button. 

===H6N Chromatic Tuner===
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL”, press Ok. 
# Select “Tuner” and press Ok. 
# Select preferred tuning type and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust standard pitch. 
# For all tuner types besides chromatic, use the forward and rewind button to change pitch (For drop tuning) 
# Press a track button to select input to use. 
# Use the tuner according to the type. 
# Chromatic: shows pitch inaccuracies and note that the device is detecting. 
# Guitar/Bass Tuning: The number of strings being tuned is automatically detected, allowing for tuning one at a time. 

===Using the Metronome===
# Press the menu button. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL” and press Ok. 
# Select “Metronome” and press Ok. 
# Use the scroll wheel to select a menu item, and press Ok. 
# Select “Click”, use the scroll wheel to set when the metronome is active, and press Ok. 
# Select “Precount”. 
# Select “Tempo”. Use the scroll wheel to select the speed, and press the menu button. 
# Select “Sound”. Use the scroll wheel to set the sound and press Ok. 
# Select “Pattern” use the scroll wheel to select desired musical pattern. 
# Select “Level” and set to desired volume, press Ok. 

===Linking Inputs===
You can link inputs so that they become one stereo track. Do this by holding down one input button and then press another. You will see on the screen that they have become linked and both lights will illuminate simultaneously. 

Example: To link inputs 1 and 2, hold down the input 1 button and then press 2. 

Use the same method to unlink inputs.

[[Category:Media Loan]]

Zoom H4n Audio Recorder Proficiency Test

2020-05-03T23:08:01Z

Highberh: /* Zoom H4N */

==='''Written Test'''===
Answers may be found in the [https://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Zoom_H4n_Audio_Recorder_Operating_Guide Zoom H4n Audio Recorder Operating Guide]. Complete this written portion and bring it with you to your scheduled operational proficiency. Call (360) 867-6253 if you have any questions. 
# What is the importance of formatting the recorder before you record audio?
# Give three example of precautions you should take when handling an H4.
# What are the steps you must follow in order to import your files onto a computer for editing for both recorders?
# Describe how to set the date and time on the H4n.
# Name and describe the 4 modes on the H4n.
# What kind of mic configuration does the H4n utilize?
# What is the extent of your financial responsibility for the recorders when you check them out from Media Loan?
===Operational Proficiency===
(TO BE DONE DURING YOUR SCHEDULED APPOINTMENT )
* Turn recorder on.
* Demonstrate how to navigate through the menus of the recorder.
* Format the recorder correctly and prepare for recording.
* Set the proper record fie size.
* Demonstrate how to change the mic angels from 90 to 120 and back on the H4n.
* Plug preferred mic to correct input. Select input setup from the menu.
* Record 30 seconds of audio.
* Connect headphones or speakers to line-out and playback your file.
* Demonstrate the difference between pausing and stoping a recording.
* Connect USB from the recorder to a laptop provided by Media Loan.
* Show that you understand how to import your audio files from the recorder to the computer.
[[category:Media Loan]]

Zoom H4n Audio Recorder Gear Guide

2020-05-03T22:56:14Z

Highberh: /* Operation */

A proficiency test is required to check out this Audio Recorder. Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[Zoom H4n Audio Recorder Proficiency Test|Zoom H4n Audio Recorder Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes. 

[[file:zoomh4front.jpg|300px|thumb|Zoom H4N Front]]
[[file:zoom4back.jpg|300px|thumb|Zoom H4N Back]]

[http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/2014/03/26/how-to-record-high-quality-audio-on-a-budget/ Video Tutorial - How to record high quality audio on a budget]
 

===Safety Precautions===
* '''DO NOT use in or subject unit to extreme temperatures, near heat sources, high humidity or moisture, excessive dust or sand, excessive vibration or shock.'''
* '''DO NOT insert foreign objects into or allow liquid to enter the unit.'''
* '''DO NOT exert undue pressure on the keys or other controls.'''
* '''DO NOT put the H4n speaker next to other precision instruments, such as a computer, or next to magnetic cards.'''
* '''ALWAYS power down the H4n and all attached equipment before unplugging any cables. Unplug cables before moving the H4n unit to avoid jarring the jacks.'''
* '''NEVER open the casing of the H4n or attempt to modify it in any way. Bring the unit to Media Loan for service immediately if it is not functioning correctly.'''
* '''DO NOT use the H4n at loud volumes for extended periods of time, as it may cause hearing impairment.'''
* '''REMEMBER that you are 100% financially responsible for all equipment you check out from Media Loan!'''
 
This is a basic guide for the Zoom H4n Audio Recorder. Additional information can be found in the [https://www.zoom-na.com/sites/default/files/products/downloads/pdfs/E_H4nSP.pdf operating manual]

===Operation===
<gallery>
File:zoomfront.jpg|
File:zoomback.jpg|
File:zoomac.jpg|
</gallery>
====Supplying Power to the H4n====
Since power consumption of this unit is fairly high, we recommend the use of an AC power adapter whenever possible. If using batteries is necessary, make sure to use Alkaline or Nickel-Metal Hydride (NiMH) batteries.
::Use only the AC adapter provided by Media Loan. Use of any other adapter could damage the H4n.
::During lightning or when not using the recorder for an extended period, disconnect the recorder from the AC outlet.
::When powering with batteries, use two conventional size AA - 1.5 volt batteries of the same type.
::When not using the recorder from an extended period, remove the batteries.
::When using the recorder, the battery cover should be closed.
::Before plugging in or unplugging, inserting or removing batteries, make sure the H4n is powered down, otherwise, any data on the recorder may be destroyed.
::The H4n can be powered by USB, but ONLY when it is being used as a USB audio interface or to transfer files.
====SD Card====
Media Loan provides a SD card with the H4n recorder, This should provide a large amount of recording time, even while recording in very high definition formats. If you need longer recording times than the card can provide, the H4n will accept SD and SDHC cards.
::Do not remove the SD card unless absolutely necessary.
::Make sure the recorder is turned off before attempting to change the SD card.
::SD cards are expensive. Always remember to return your recorder with the SD card it came with from Media Loan.
::If the SD card does not seem to fit or you are having difficulty removing it, please return to Media Loan for assistance.
::Do not exert any excessive force on the SD card or the recorder.
====Power/HOLD Switch====
<gallery>
File:zoompowerhold.jpg|
</gallery>
The power switch to the H4n is a two-way slider switch. To power on the H4, push the switch toward the power logo, then release it. The switch will return to its original position, and the H4n will begin to boot up. To power off the recorder, pull the switch towards the power logo and hold it there until the screen displays “Goodbye See You!”
The power switch also functions as a key hold switch to prevent any unwanted changes during recording. To put the H4n into key hold mode, push the power switch into the hold position. The screen will show that the H4n is in key hold mode, and all buttons will not respond until key hold mode is deactivated. To switch out of key hold mode, simply pull the power switch back to the center position. The screen will display that the key guard has been released.
====Main Menu and Controls====
<gallery>
File:zoommenureclevel.jpg|
</gallery>
To access the main menu, press the MENU button on the right side of the recorder. Once inside the main menu, turn the dial to select the desired option and press the dial to select. To go back to the previous menu screen, press the MENU button again.
====Menu Options====
'''[Folder]''' - The H4n offers 10 folders to keep recorded files separate and organized. When in the menu, the current folder will display at the bottom of the screen. 
'''[File]''' - File Management within the selected folder. 
'''[Input]''' - Fine tune controls for different inputs. 
'''[Rec]''' - Controls for file format/quality, and prerecording/volume activated recording. 
'''[Mixer]''' - Controls volume and pan settings for recording. 
'''[Mode]''' - Use to select a recording mode. 

:::'''NOTE:''' All modes can be changed from the mode menu '''EXCEPT''' stamina mode! For complete details on using stamina mode, see the '''Recording Modes''' section of this manual.

====Recording Sources====
<gallery>
File:zoommics.jpg|
File:zoominputs.jpg|
File:zoommonomix.jpg|
</gallery>
The H4n can record from several different sources, including the built in stereo microphone, an external stereo microphone, and external microphones or instruments attached with XLR or 1/4” jacks. Recording sources can be chosen with the input buttons on the face of the recorder. 

'''Built in Stereo Mic''' - The H4n features a versatile built in XY stereo microphone, capable of recording in a 120° or 90° spread. Behind the built in stereo mic, there is a stereo mini jack to plug in an external stereo mic. an external mic is plugged into this jack, it will supersede the built in microphone. To record from this source, press the MIC button. When the source is active, the MIC button will glow. 

'''Input Jacks [1] and [2]''' - The input jacks on the bottom of the recorder accept both XLR cables for microphones, and 1/4” cables for instruments. The input jacks are controlled by the [1] and [2] buttons on the input panel. In 2CH and 4CH modes, the two input jacks operate as a stereo pair. If you select one jack input button, both will glow to indicate that they are both active. IN MTR mode, the two jacks can be used independently. 

:::'''NOTE:'''To record one microphone onto both sides of a stereo track, select the input jacks as the recording source, then make sure the '''MONO MIX''' setting of the '''INPUT''' sub-menu is '''ON'''. When '''MONO MIX''' is active, the H4n will record both stereo channels from one of the mono input jacks.

====Recording Modes====
<gallery>
File:zoomstamina.jpg|
File:zoommenureclevel.jpg|
File:zoomheadphoneusb.jpg|
</gallery>
The H4n has several different recording modes, which change the way the recorder operates, and which inputs can be used. All recording modes except for stamina mode can be chosen in the '''MODE''' sub-menu. 

'''Stamina Mode''' - Stamina mode is designed for the sole purpose of conserving battery life, and should only be used if it is necessary to record for extremely long periods with no access to fresh batteries or AC power. Stamina mode will increase battery life from about 6 hours to about 11 hours. In stamina mode, the H4n operates exactly like stereo mode with several limitations:

# In stamina mode, the zoom cannot record in any format other than the lowest quality WAV.
# In stamina mode, the MODE sub-menu is locked out. To turn stamina mode on or off, the user must power down the recorder, and hit the stamina mode switch inside the battery door, then restart the recorder. 
 
'''Stereo Mode''' - Stereo mode uses either the H4n’s built in stereo microphone or inputs [1] and [2]. The input select buttons will illuminate to reflect which source the H4n is recording from. While recording in stereo mode, the sources can be switched at any time, including while the recorder is capturing audio. To change the recording volume, simply hit the REC LEVEL (+) or (-) button. 

'''4CH Mode''' - Simultaneously uses the H4n’s built in stereo mic and inputs [1] and [2]. Recording volumes are controlled by source. Before using the REC LEVEL (+) or (-) button, you must first choose which source you wish to modify the volume for by pressing the corresponding input select button.
 
:::'''NOTE:''' The '''REC LEVEL''' (+) or (-) button should not be confused with the '''VOLUME''' (+) or (-) button found on the other side of the recorder. The '''VOLUME''' button controls the levels of audio output (the speakers or headphones).
'''MTR Mode''' - MTR mode is designed to record onto 4 separate tracks. Each of the tracks can be recorded and modified independently from any of the others. Additionally, tracks 1 & 2 or 3 & 4 can be recorded together. Each track can record from any of the input sources. To begin recording in MTR mode:
# Choose which track (or pair of tracks) you would like to record to.
# Choose the inputs you would like to record onto that track.
 
To change the recording volume in MTR mode:
# Press the track number and input source buttons that you would like to change the recording level for.
# Use the '''REC LEVEL''' (+) or (-) button to change the recording levels. This will only change the recording levels for the selected inputs on the selected track. Setting for the same inputs on other tracks will remain unchanged.

====Recording Formats====
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! Recording Time Per 1 Gigabyte (GB)
|-
| MP3 || 128Kbps || 17Hrs 21 Mins
|-
||| 320 Kbps || 6 Hrs 56 Mins
|-
| WAV || 16 Bit / 44.1 Khz || 1 hr 34 Mins
|-
||| 16 Bit / 48 Khz || 1 Hr 26 Mins
|-
||| 24 Bit / 96 Khz || 28 Mins
|}
The Zoom H4n is capable of recording in both Mp3 or WAV file formats. WAV is an uncompressed and loss-less file formal, while Mp3 is compressed and lossy. This means that WAV files are larger, but retain more detail than MP3's, which trade audio resolution for much smaller file sizes. The H4n’s highest recording quality is 24 bit / 96 Khz WAV, which is higher quality than CDs, but may be unreadable by many applications due to its large file size. Zoom recorders from Media Loan are provided with a SD card. Total recording time per GB will change depending on format and quality.
===File Transfer===
Transferring audio files from the H4n to a computer is simple, and much like using an external hard drive. To connect the H4n to a computer, make sure the recorder is off, then connect the recorder to your computer via USB. When this is done, turn on the recorder and allow it to boot up. Once the recorder has started, it will give you options for connection modes. Choose '''STORAGE’'', and the H4n will show up like an external hard drive plugged into your computer. You can now drag and drop files or folders off of the zoom recorder onto your computer’s hard drive. Make sure to eject the USB connection before disconnecting the H4n.

[[category:Media Loan]]

Zoom H4n Audio Recorder Gear Guide

2020-05-03T22:32:02Z

Highberh: /* Safety Precautions */

A proficiency test is required to check out this Audio Recorder. Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[Zoom H4n Audio Recorder Proficiency Test|Zoom H4 Audio Recorder Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes. 

[[file:zoomh4front.jpg|300px|thumb|Zoom H4N Front]]
[[file:zoom4back.jpg|300px|thumb|Zoom H4N Back]]

[http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/2014/03/26/how-to-record-high-quality-audio-on-a-budget/ Video Tutorial - How to record high quality audio on a budget]
 

===Safety Precautions===
* '''DO NOT use in or subject unit to extreme temperatures, near heat sources, high humidity or moisture, excessive dust or sand, excessive vibration or shock.'''
* '''DO NOT insert foreign objects into or allow liquid to enter the unit.'''
* '''DO NOT exert undue pressure on the keys or other controls.'''
* '''DO NOT put the H4n speaker next to other precision instruments, such as a computer, or next to magnetic cards.'''
* '''ALWAYS power down the H4n and all attached equipment before unplugging any cables. Unplug cables before moving the H4n unit to avoid jarring the jacks.'''
* '''NEVER open the casing of the H4n or attempt to modify it in any way. Bring the unit to Media Loan for service immediately if it is not functioning correctly.'''
* '''DO NOT use the H4n at loud volumes for extended periods of time, as it may cause hearing impairment.'''
* '''REMEMBER that you are 100% financially responsible for all equipment you check out from Media Loan!'''
 
It is highly recommended that you consult the complete H4n manual for detailed information regarding recording, modes and all further H4n details. There is simply too much information to be included in a simple guide such as this. The complete H4n manual is available from '''Media Loan'''.

===Operation===
<gallery>
File:zoomfront.jpg|
File:zoomback.jpg|
File:zoomac.jpg|
</gallery>
====Supplying Power to the H4n====
Since power consumption of this unit is fairly high, we recommend the use of an AC power adapter whenever possible. If using batteries is necessary, make sure to use Alkaline or Nickel-Metal Hydride (NiMH) batteries.
::Use only the AC adapter provided by Media Loan. Use of any other adapter could damage the H4n.
::During lightning or when not using the recorder for an extended period, disconnect the recorder from the AC outlet.
::When powering with batteries, use two conventional size AA - 1.5 volt batteries of the same type.
::When not using the recorder from an extended period, remove the batteries.
::When using the recorder, the battery cover should be closed.
::Before plugging in or unplugging, inserting or removing batteries, make sure the H4n is powered down, otherwise, any data on the recorder may be destroyed.
::The H4n can be powered by USB, but ONLY when it is being used as a USB audio interface or to transfer files.
====SD Card====
Media Loan provides a SD card with the H4n recorder, This should provide a large amount of recording time, even while recording in very high definition formats. If you need longer recording times than the card can provide, the H4n will accept SD and SDHC cards.
::Do not remove the SD card unless absolutely necessary.
::Make sure the recorder is turned off before attempting to change the SD card.
::SD cards are expensive. Always remember to return your recorder with the SD card it came with from Media Loan.
::If the SD card does not seem to fit or you are having difficulty removing it, please return to Media Loan for assistance.
::Do not exert any excessive force on the SD card or the recorder.
====Power/HOLD Switch====
<gallery>
File:zoompowerhold.jpg|
</gallery>
The power switch to the H4n is a two-way slider switch. To power on the H4, push the switch toward the power logo, then release it. The switch will return to its original position, and the H4n will begin to boot up. To power off the recorder, pull the switch towards the power logo and hold it there until the screen displays “Goodbye See You!”
The power switch also functions as a key hold switch to prevent any unwanted changes during recording. To put the H4n into key hold mode, push the power switch into the hold position. The screen will show that the H4n is in key hold mode, and all buttons will not respond until key hold mode is deactivated. To switch out of key hold mode, simply pull the power switch back to the center position. The screen will display that the key guard has been released.
====Main Menu and Controls====
<gallery>
File:zoommenureclevel.jpg|
</gallery>
To access the main menu, press the MENU button on the right side of the recorder. Once inside the main menu, turn the dial to select the desired option and press the dial to select. To go back to the previous menu screen, press the MENU button again.
====Menu Options====
'''[Folder]''' - The H4n offers 10 folders to keep recorded files separate and organized. When in the menu, the current folder will display at the bottom of the screen. 
'''[File]''' - File Management within the selected folder. 
'''[Input]''' - Fine tune controls for different inputs. 
'''[Rec]''' - Controls for file format/quality, and prerecording/volume activated recording. 
'''[Mixer]''' - Controls volume and pan settings for recording. 
'''[Mode]''' - Use to select a recording mode. 

:::'''NOTE:''' All modes can be changed from the mode menu '''EXCEPT''' stamina mode! For complete details on using stamina mode, see the '''Recording Modes''' section of this manual.

====Recording Sources====
<gallery>
File:zoommics.jpg|
File:zoominputs.jpg|
File:zoommonomix.jpg|
</gallery>
The H4n can record from several different sources, including the built in stereo microphone, an external stereo microphone, and external microphones or instruments attached with XLR or 1/4” jacks. Recording sources can be chosen with the input buttons on the face of the recorder. 

'''Built in Stereo Mic''' - The H4n features a versatile built in XY stereo microphone, capable of recording in a 120° or 90° spread. Behind the built in stereo mic, there is a stereo mini jack to plug in an external stereo mic. an external mic is plugged into this jack, it will supersede the built in microphone. To record from this source, press the MIC button. When the source is active, the MIC button will glow. 

'''Input Jacks [1] and [2]''' - The input jacks on the bottom of the recorder accept both XLR cables for microphones, and 1/4” cables for instruments. The input jacks are controlled by the [1] and [2] buttons on the input panel. In 2CH and 4CH modes, the two input jacks operate as a stereo pair. If you select one jack input button, both will glow to indicate that they are both active. IN MTR mode, the two jacks can be used independently. 

:::'''NOTE:'''To record one microphone onto both sides of a stereo track, select the input jacks as the recording source, then make sure the '''MONO MIX''' setting of the '''INPUT''' sub-menu is '''ON'''. When '''MONO MIX''' is active, the H4n will record both stereo channels from one of the mono input jacks.

====Recording Modes====
<gallery>
File:zoomstamina.jpg|
File:zoommenureclevel.jpg|
File:zoomheadphoneusb.jpg|
</gallery>
The H4n has several different recording modes, which change the way the recorder operates, and which inputs can be used. All recording modes except for stamina mode can be chosen in the '''MODE''' sub-menu. 

'''Stamina Mode''' - Stamina mode is designed for the sole purpose of conserving battery life, and should only be used if it is necessary to record for extremely long periods with no access to fresh batteries or AC power. Stamina mode will increase battery life from about 6 hours to about 11 hours. In stamina mode, the H4n operates exactly like stereo mode with several limitations:

# In stamina mode, the zoom cannot record in any format other than the lowest quality WAV.
# In stamina mode, the MODE sub-menu is locked out. To turn stamina mode on or off, the user must power down the recorder, and hit the stamina mode switch inside the battery door, then restart the recorder. 
 
'''Stereo Mode''' - Stereo mode uses either the H4n’s built in stereo microphone or inputs [1] and [2]. The input select buttons will illuminate to reflect which source the H4n is recording from. While recording in stereo mode, the sources can be switched at any time, including while the recorder is capturing audio. To change the recording volume, simply hit the REC LEVEL (+) or (-) button. 

'''4CH Mode''' - Simultaneously uses the H4n’s built in stereo mic and inputs [1] and [2]. Recording volumes are controlled by source. Before using the REC LEVEL (+) or (-) button, you must first choose which source you wish to modify the volume for by pressing the corresponding input select button.
 
:::'''NOTE:''' The '''REC LEVEL''' (+) or (-) button should not be confused with the '''VOLUME''' (+) or (-) button found on the other side of the recorder. The '''VOLUME''' button controls the levels of audio output (the speakers or headphones).
'''MTR Mode''' - MTR mode is designed to record onto 4 separate tracks. Each of the tracks can be recorded and modified independently from any of the others. Additionally, tracks 1 & 2 or 3 & 4 can be recorded together. Each track can record from any of the input sources. To begin recording in MTR mode:
# Choose which track (or pair of tracks) you would like to record to.
# Choose the inputs you would like to record onto that track.
 
To change the recording volume in MTR mode:
# Press the track number and input source buttons that you would like to change the recording level for.
# Use the '''REC LEVEL''' (+) or (-) button to change the recording levels. This will only change the recording levels for the selected inputs on the selected track. Setting for the same inputs on other tracks will remain unchanged.

====Recording Formats====
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! Recording Time Per 1 Gigabyte (GB)
|-
| MP3 || 128Kbps || 17Hrs 21 Mins
|-
||| 320 Kbps || 6 Hrs 56 Mins
|-
| WAV || 16 Bit / 44.1 Khz || 1 hr 34 Mins
|-
||| 16 Bit / 48 Khz || 1 Hr 26 Mins
|-
||| 24 Bit / 96 Khz || 28 Mins
|}
The Zoom H4n is capable of recording in both Mp3 or WAV file formats. WAV is an uncompressed and loss-less file formal, while Mp3 is compressed and lossy. This means that WAV files are larger, but retain more detail than MP3's, which trade audio resolution for much smaller file sizes. The H4n’s highest recording quality is 24 bit / 96 Khz WAV, which is higher quality than CDs, but may be unreadable by many applications due to its large file size. Zoom recorders from Media Loan are provided with a SD card. Total recording time per GB will change depending on format and quality.
===File Transfer===
Transferring audio files from the H4n to a computer is simple, and much like using an external hard drive. To connect the H4n to a computer, make sure the recorder is off, then connect the recorder to your computer via USB. When this is done, turn on the recorder and allow it to boot up. Once the recorder has started, it will give you options for connection modes. Choose '''STORAGE’'', and the H4n will show up like an external hard drive plugged into your computer. You can now drag and drop files or folders off of the zoom recorder onto your computer’s hard drive. Make sure to eject the USB connection before disconnecting the H4n.

[[category:Media Loan]]

APS VariZoom Dolly Track Proficiency Test

2020-05-01T19:38:08Z

Highberh: /* Written Test: */

Answers may be found in [[APS VariZoom Dolly Track Operating Guide]]. Complete this written portion and bring it with you to your scheduled operational proficiency. Call 867-6253 if you have any questions.

=== Written Test: ===
# What are some precautions when using the VariZoom Dolly Track?
# If the width of the track is slightly off the for the dolly, what should you do?
# If the tripod doesn't fit in the dolly, what should you do?
# What does adding a sandbag between the tripod legs do?
# Pushing the dolly-tripod from a lower point decreases the likelihood of what?
# What track pieces are connected with the 2 crossmember pieces?
# If you check out this kit and it is lost, stolen or damaged, who is 100% responsible for the replacement costs of it?

=== Operational Test: ===
* Identify all equipment included in the VariZoom Dolly Track kit.
* Demonstrate setting up the track.
* Demonstrate setting up the dolly.
* Demonstrate attaching the tripod to the dolly.
* Demonstrate operating the dolly.
* Demonstrate putting away the kit.

[[Category:Media Loan]]

APS VariZoom Solo Jib Proficiency Test

2020-05-01T19:29:04Z

Highberh:

Answers may be found in [[APS VariZoom Solo Jib Operating Guide]]. Complete this written portion and bring it with you to your scheduled operational proficiency. Call 867-6253 if you have any questions.

=== Written Test: ===
# What are some precautions when using the VariZoom Solo Jib?
# What can help stabilize the VariZoom Solo Jib?
# What should you do to the jib before attaching it to the tripod?
# Should the jib start out "arm" heavy or "tail" heavy before it is balanced with a camera?
# What is the maximum camera weight the VariZoom Solo Jib can support?
# Are the tilt and pan brakes hard- or soft-stops? What does this mean for operation of the jib?
# How do you achieve smooth shoots with the jib?
# If you check out this kit and it is lost, stolen or damaged, who is 100% responsible for the replacement costs of it?

=== Operational Test: ===
* Identify all equipment included in the VariZoom Solo Jib kit.
* Demonstrate setting up the tripod.
* Demonstrate attaching the jib to the tripod.
* Demonstrate setting the length of the jib.
* Demonstrate attaching a camera to the camera platform.
* Demonstrate using counterweights and arm and tail length adjustments to balance the jib with the camera on it.
* Demonstrate basic crane shots with the jib.

[[Category:Media Loan]]

APS VariZoom Solo Jib Operating Guide

2020-05-01T19:24:56Z

Highberh: /* Introduction: */

==== '''The VariZoom Solo Jib is a lightweight telescoping jib that works with a counterweight system to elevate a camera. Without proper setup and operation, damage to the equipment and/or injury to the user and people around the equipment could occur.''' ====

=== Introduction: ===
The VariZoom Solo Jib is part of '''Advanced Production Services''' equipment at Media Loan. This kit requires a '''[[APS VariZoom Solo Jib Proficiency|proficiency]]''' to use. The Solo Jib is an ultra-portable, lightweight aluminum jib crane with a 2-stage telescoping arm that provides up to 9.2 ft. of height. Special features include soft-stop pan and tilt brakes so you can fix the position of the jib without danger of tipping over, as well as a telescoping tail for counterweight adjustment. Please return equipment like it is checked out to you. Do not disassemble any pieces of the equipment not mentioned in this operating guide.

=== Precautions: ===
* Never remove the camera or counterweights without proper support to prevent the jib from swinging up or down.
* Do not extend the telescoping sections of the jib while the camera is mounted. The weight of the camera might cause a section to slide suddenly and pinch your hands or damage the camera.
* Only use the jib with DSLR or lightweight cameras (4-10 pounds).
* Make sure the jib is securely mounted to the tripod and leveled so no slipping or loosening can occur.
* Make sure the tripod is adequately level and stable relative to the ground.
* Tighten all joints thoroughly to prevent unwanted extension/contraction.
* Never swing the jib around in a crowd of people.
* You are 100% financially liable for damages or loss of equipment from Media Loan.

=== Kit Items: ===
* Telescoping Jib Arm
* 2 x Counterweights
* Jib Head Hand Knob
* Weight Hand Knob
* Weight Spacer Nut
* Camera Platform Tripod Plate
* Tripod

=== Step One: Setting up the Tripod ===
# This is the first step in using the jib. It is a good idea to use '''sandbags''' to counterweight your tripod to add stability and prevent tipping over. Always make sure that the tripod legs are properly tightened to prevent sliding and toppling of the entire assembly.
# When setting up the tripod, make sure you have an adequate radius of clearance to operate the jib. You should have at least an arm-spam of clearance all the way around the tripod to be safe.
# The two-stage locking legs of the tripod allow for a wide range of height adjustments. To adjust the leg length, simply twist the locking knobs. Make sure each knob is secured completely to prevent leg sections from shifting under the weight of the camera.
# The spreader located at the center of the tripod is not adjustable. Do not remove it.
# Only use the tripod in the VariZoom Solo Jib Kit with the jib.

=== Step 2: Attaching the Jib to the Tripod ===
# Tighten the '''tilt brake''' and '''pan brake''' before attaching the jib to your tripod.
# To attach the mounting stud of jib head adaptor, fit the jib base into the bowl mount, level the jib base, and then tighten the hand knob on the mounting stud. Make sure to tighten this knob thoroughly.

=== Step 3: Setting the Length of the Jib ===

==== '''The Solo jib has a 2-stage telescoping arm and single-telescoping tail. The longer the arm—the front of the jib—is extended, the more you will have to extend the tail—the back of the jib.''' ====
# Start by attaching the counterweight to the '''tail''' of the jib. Only use the second spacer nut if you add more than one weight. The jib will start out tail-heavy, but as you extend the jib it will balance out.
# Decide how long you want to extend the jib, then start by expanding the first stage. Loosen the first set of twist locks—the lager set closet to the tripod—and grab the '''camera platform'''—front end with “Solo Jib” printed on it—and pull out the first stage to the desired length. Use the bubble level under the camera plate to even the tube lengths until the camera platform is level. This might require slightly twisting the camera platform side-to-side to get the bubble centered. Then tighten the twist locks.
# If you need the jib to be longer than the full extension of the first stage, extend the second stage. Using the second set of locks, repeat the same process as before, extending the second stage and making sure to level the camera platform and tighten the twist locks.
# If the jib is front heavy, extend the '''tail''' by loosening the twist lock and pulling the tube out slowly until the jib stays level. After extending the tail to the desired length, tighten the twist lock on the tail.

=== Step 4: Setting up a Camera on the Jib ===

==== '''Only use DSLR or lightweight cameras (4-10 pounds) on the jib arm.''' ====
# Make sure all the twist locks are tightened before attaching the camera. You will need to support the front of jib (a chair, table, a c-stand, etc.) while attaching the camera.
# Use the threading screw of the tripod plate to secure your camera to the plate.
# Slide the tripod plate with the camera mounted to it into the receiver on the camera platform.
# Tighten the slide plate lock on the camera platform.

=== Helpful Counterweight Information: ===

==== '''A Canon Rebel or Canon 6D DSLR camera with a lens and battery will weigh around 3 to 4 pounds, depending on the lens. The weight will not be exact and this guide is to help approximate what will be needed to counterweight the camera.''' ====

==== Fully-Extended Jib: ====
* 3 lbs camera requires 9.25 lbs counterweight with tail extended almost fully
* 4 lbs camera requires 13.75 lbs counterweight with tail extended almost fully

==== Half-Extended Jib: ====
* 3 lbs camera requires 6.75 lbs counterweight with tail extended almost fully
* 4 lbs camera requires 9.25 lbs counterweight with tail extended almost fully

==== Compact Jib (not extended at all): ====
* 3 lbs camera requires 6.75 lbs counterweight with tail not extended OR 3.75 lbs counterweight with tail extended almost fully
* 4 lbs camera requires 9.25 lbs counterweight with tail not extended OR 5.5 lbs counterweight with tail extended almost fully

==== '''Once the camera is attached and the counterweight is added, fine-tune the balance by sliding the tail section in or out. When the jib is level—parallel to the ground—it should float in place. At full extension, the jib may move when tilted all the way up or down—tighten the tilt brake slightly to hold the position.''' ====

=== Step 5: Operating the Jib ===
# The jib will only be as steady as the tripod on which it is mounted. Make sure to be on a level surface and use sandbags to secure the tripod.
# Because the Solo Jib is so lightweight, in order to achieve smooth shots, the jib needs to be operated with a light touch. It’s important to start and stop gradually to receive smooth results. This becomes more important the longer the jib is extended.
# If you keep your hands on the jib, you may be able to operate it without the tilt or pan brake tightened. If you take your hands off the jib, you may want to tighten the tilt and/or pan brakes to hold the positions. These are not hard-stop mechanisms, they are soft-stops that can be pushed-through.

[[Category:Media Loan]]

APS Canon 6D Proficiency Test

2020-04-25T22:16:59Z

Highberh:

<div class="container-fluid">
<div class="row">
<div class="col-md-8">
<div class="lead">
Proficiency test for the APS Canon 6D

</div>[[File:6d 1.jpg|thumb]]Answers may be found in the [[Canon 6D Operating Guide]]. Complete this written portion and bring it with you to your scheduled operational proficiency. Call 867-6253 if you have any questions.

'''Note:''' the APS 6D kits come with lenses that have de-clicked, manual aperture rings. You can not change the aperture digitally through the body and subsequently the aperture preview button does not function with these lenses.

'''Note:''' Because these lenses have no digital components, they do not properly communicate with the light meter when taking photos through the viewfinder. The light meter is unaffected for video and live-view photography.
</div>
</div>
</div>

==== Written ====
<div class="col-md-8">
# What type of media are these 6D kits intended for?
# What are the main differences between the Canon 6D and a Canon Rebel?
# Describe at least one method to adjust each of the three exposure settings: aperture, ISO and shutter speed.
# Where are two places you can view your exposure settings?
# How do you activate Live View when taking pictures?
# How do you record video?
# Describe how to change a lens.
# Briefly define and describe why you would change the drive mode and metering mode.
# How is this different from APS kit lenses different than the lenses in General Access?
# The APS kit comes with variable neutral density (ND) filters. What are these for and how do you attach them?
# The 6D can record video at frame rates of 30 or 24 FPS at 1080p and 60 FPS at 720p. Talk about what these numbers mean.
# What lens mount is compatible with this camera? What other similar lens mount is ''not'' and can cause permanent damage?
# Describe at least three ways this camera can be permanently damaged.
# If your equipment is lost, stolen or damaged who is 100% financially responsible?

==== Operational ====
# Turn the camera on and show how to change the ISO, shutter speed, and aperture settings.
# Adjust the diopter
# Demonstrate how to switch between photo/video mode as well as turn on Live View.
# Change the picture and video resolution/quality.
# Show how to format a memory card.
# Activate the Quick menu (Q) and name ALL of the settings that this button can change.
# Attach a lens and attach an ND filter to it.
# Demonstrate how to change and remove a lens.
# Create a proper exposure and record a video.
# Demonstrate how to critical focus.
# Demonstrate how to change the white balance and how to set a custom white balance.


</div>
<div class="col-md-1"></div>
<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">
{{GetHelp}}


</div>



__NOTOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

[[Category:Media Loan]]

APS Canon 6D Proficiency Test

2020-04-25T22:14:24Z

Highberh:

<div class="container-fluid">
<div class="row">
<div class="col-md-8">
<div class="lead">
Proficiency test for the APS Canon 6D

</div>[[File:6d 1.jpg|thumb]]Answers may be found in the [[Canon 6D Operating Guide]]. Complete this written portion and bring it with you to your scheduled operational proficiency. Call 867-6253 if you have any questions.

'''Note:''' the APS 6D kits come with lenses that have de-clicked, manual aperture rings. You can not change the aperture digitally through the body and subsequently the aperture preview button does not function with these lenses.

'''Note:''' Because these lenses have no digital components, they do not properly communicate with the light meter when taking photos through the viewfinder. The light meter is unaffected for video and live-view photography.
</div>
</div>
</div>

==== Written ====
<div class="col-md-8">
# What type of media are these 6D kits intended for?
# What are the main differences between the Canon 6D and a Canon Rebel?
# Describe at least one method to adjust each of the three exposure settings: aperture, ISO and shutter speed.
# Where are two places you can view your exposure settings?
# How do you activate Live View when taking pictures?
# How do you record video?
# Describe how to change a lens.
# Briefly define and describe why you would change the drive mode and metering mode.
# How is this different from APS kit lenses different than the lenses in General Access?
# The APS kit comes with variable neutral density (ND) filters. What are these for and how do you attach them?
# The 6D can record video at frame rates of 30 or 24 FPS at 1080p and 60 FPS at 720p. Talk about what these numbers mean. Also include the difference between ALL-I and IPD recording formats.
# What lens mount is compatible with this camera? What other similar lens mount is ''not'' and can cause permanent damage?
# Describe at least three ways this camera can be permanently damaged.
# If your equipment is lost, stolen or damaged who is 100% financially responsible?

==== Operational ====
# Turn the camera on and show how to change the ISO, shutter speed, and aperture settings.
# Adjust the diopter
# Demonstrate how to switch between photo/video mode as well as turn on Live View.
# Change the picture and video resolution/quality.
# Show how to format a memory card.
# Activate the Quick menu (Q) and name ALL of the settings that this button can change.
# Attach a lens and attach an ND filter to it.
# Demonstrate how to change and remove a lens.
# Create a proper exposure and record a video.
# Demonstrate how to critical focus.
# Demonstrate how to change the white balance and how to set a custom white balance.


</div>
<div class="col-md-1"></div>
<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">
{{GetHelp}}


</div>



__NOTOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

[[Category:Media Loan]]

Canon 6D Gear Guide

2020-04-25T22:11:57Z

Highberh: /* INTRODUCTION */

[[File:6d_1.jpg|600x600px]]

=INTRODUCTION=
{{#ev:vimeo|159257397|500|right|APS Canon 6D Kit}}

{{#ev:vimeo|159256566|500|left|General Access Canon 6D Kit}} 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

'''Here is where you can find the [https://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test GA Canon 6D proficiency test]'''

'''Here is where you can find the [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test APS Canon 6D proficiency test.]'''

The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.

Media Loan's other major DSLR is the Canon Rebel. Compared to the Rebel T5i, the 6D has:
* 30% better image quality
* Water sealing
* Longer battery life (2x more photos per battery charge)
* More light sensitivity - 2 f-stops
* 20% better resolution (20.9MP vs. 17.9)

...and more!

[[File:diagram_1.png|250px|right|thumb]]

There are two 6D kit options at Media Loan.
The 6D kits in '''general access''' are built for photography purposes. They include:
* 1x 1:4 24-105mm lens
* 1x remote kit
* 1x battery grip
* 1x battery charger
* 1x class 10 memory card
* 3x batteries

 
'''APS''' has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera. The lenses are cine, manual, and prime, with an f/1.5. The kit includes:
* 1x shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder.
* 1x 24mm lens
* 1x 35mm lens
* 1x 85mm lens
* 2x variable ND (neutral density) filters
* 3x batteries and a
* 1x plug in power supply
* 1x class 10 memory card
 
 

Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.
 

=CARING FOR THE CANON 6D=
[[File:diagram_2.png|250px|right|thumb]]
<nowiki>*</nowiki>NEVER LEAVE THE CAMERA BODY ANYWHERE BUT IN THE KIT -- THE SCREEN AND OTHER SENSITIVE INSTRUMENTS CAN GET SCRATCHED OR RUINED!*

Media Loan has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.

'''DO NOT''': 
Drop this camera 
Point camera toward Sun 
Submerge this camera in water 
Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field! 
Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car 
Store this camera in excessive heat or cold 
Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera 
Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals 
'''Mount an EF-S Lens onto the body''' 
Use excessive physical force 
Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!

====EF-S Lenses:====
EF-S Mount lenses ''cannot'' be used with the 6D. The back of EF-S lenses extends too far back into the camera body and could damage the mirror or sensor. ONLY USE EF LENSES WITH THE 6D. All of the EF-S lenses at Media Loan are noted as such on their case, as well as on the lens itself. If you want to use any lenses other than the lens(es) that come with the kit, you need to check with the Media Loan staff.

=Quick Exposure Settings Guide=
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the 6D. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder, the bottom of the LCD screen in live view mode, and on the top right panel display. '''In the APS 6D kit, aperture can only be adjusted with a ring on the manual lenses.'''
# Q Menu: The most familiar way to adjust these is through the Quick selection button, Q. This can only be activated in photo mode when live view is off. Once activated, you can scroll through and adjust each setting accordingly.
# Exterior buttons: In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. The circular quick control dial changes the aperture and the top main dial changes the shutter speed. To adjust the ISO, turn the top dial while holding down the top ISO button.

=FRONT CONTROLS=
===Depth-of-Field Preview button===
[[File:depth_preview.png]]

This button is located on the opposite side of the lens release. Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus as determined by the set aperture. The viewfinder will probably get much darker, and current settings will also be displayed near the bottom. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu. (p. 147)

===Lens Release Button===
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.

=TOP CONTROLS=

[[file:6d_2.jpg|400px|left|thumb|Canon 6D Top Controls]]
 
 
 
 
 
 

Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.
===Exposure Mode (Top left knob)===
Use this knob to set the exposure mode. Use M for full manual mode. The other settings will have some automatic features, depending on the mode you select.
===Top Main Dial===
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.

===AF Mode===
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses do. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.

You select between autofocus and manual focus with the switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.

===Drive===
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press the DRIVE button and move the top dial to change the drive mode. The settings are: 

[[file:6d_drive.png]]

===ISO (sensitivity to light)===
ISO sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. The higher the ISO, the more noise there will be in your image. Try to keep the ISO as low as possible. To adjust ISO, press ISO and turn the top dial.

===Metering===
Use the following chart to determine which metering mode you should use. Change the metering mode by pressing the meter button above the top LCD panel. 

[[file:6d_meter.png]]

===LCD Dial Light===
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.

=REAR CONTROLS=
[[File:6d_3.jpg|400px|left|thumb|Canon 6D Rear View]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

====MENU Button====
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings (see notes below).
====INFO Button====
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again. Pressing INFO multiple times will display an electronic level.

====Diopter Control====
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.
====Photo/Video Lever====
To switch between movie and photo mode, turn the lever to the proper selection. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots.

====Start/Stop (Live View)====
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever to your desired mode. Then press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power. This button is also used to start/stop video recording.

====AF-ON Button====
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.
====Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button====
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.
====AF-Area Mode Button====
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.
====Magnification Button====
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.
====Play Button====
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.
====The Quick Control [Q] Button====
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.
====Master Controls====
The master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. These include: the set button, the multi-controller, and quick control dial. The '''SET''' button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring, called the '''multi-controller'''. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big '''quick control dial'''. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The '''LOCK''' switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.

====Delete Button====
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.

=MENU SETTINGS=
Access the MENU to change various camera system settings, such as video/photo resolution and formats. The MENU is organized into various tabs. You can access the video settings in the MENU when the camera is set to video mode, and the photography settings when the camera is set to photo mode. 

'''Notes on settings:'''
====Movie Rec. Size====
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. 

'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use.

====Format card====
Format the memory card before returning your camera to Media Loan. This not only clears it for the next user, but it also ensures protection of your work. Make sure to transfer the files off of the card before you format. Select “low level format” to completely clear the information (without low level format, your data will be retrievable by certain computer programs).

====Video system====
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.

==== Custom White Balance ====
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this procedure under the actual light source to be used.

'''Photograph a white object.'''
* The plain, white object should fill the spot metering circle.
* Focus manually and set the standard exposure for the white object.
* You can have have any white balance set for initial photograph--AWB, daylight, etc.
 
'''Select Custom White Balance in the menus.'''
* Under the second camera sub menu, select Custom White Balance, then press set.
* The photo you took should appear and then select OK and this white balance data will be imported.
* When the menu reappears, press the MENU button to exit the menu.
 
'''Make sure you are on the custom white balance setting.'''
* Press the WB button or the Quick Menu and select custom white balance and press set.
 
[[File:Media Loan Custom White Balance.png|none|thumb|100x100px]]

=REMOTE (GA Kit)=
The General Access kit comes with a remote, and there is multiple ways to use it. With this remote, 6D does not need to be in "remote" drive mode.

Steps for usage:
# Set the remote and receiver to the same channel. On each, remove the battery cover and flip the switch up to a matching channel (typically ch. 1). '''These must match'''.
# Plug the receiver into the corresponding input on the left side of the camera body.
# Power on the receiver and the camera.
# The shooting mode can be selected with the remote as well as the camera. The most direct way to use the remote is to set the camera to single shooting drive mode, and then use the remote to select your actual desired mode (single, continuous, BULB, and timer). The BULB function can be used two ways: two take quick, continuous shots (set the remote to bulb and the drive mode on the camera to continuous) and to take long exposures (set the remote to bulb and the exposure mode on the camera to BULB). In both uses, press the remote button one to start shooting and again to stop.
# If set to AF, hold the main button on the remote down halfway to focus. Press down all the way to take a picture in single shooting and timer modes. In burst mode, keep the button pressed to take multiple shots. In BULB, press the button once to open the shutter and a second time to close it.
# After a picture is take, you can hold the remote button halfway down again for a quick preview.

=SHOULDER RIG (APS Kit)=
The APS 6D kit can be checked out with a shoulder rig. This piece of equipment allows for stabilization of the camera. Please watch the APS Canon 6D Kit video at the top of this page to learn how to assemble this rig.

 

[[Category:Media Loan]]

Canon 6D Gear Guide

2020-04-25T22:11:31Z

Highberh: /* INTRODUCTION */

Canon 6D Proficiency Test

2020-04-25T22:08:18Z

Highberh: /* Written Test */

=== Written Test ===
Answers may be found in the [https://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Canon_6D_Operating_Guide Canon 6D Proficiency Guide]. Complete this written portion and bring it with you to your scheduled operational proficiency. Call (360) 867-6253 if you have any questions.
# Describe at least one method to adjust the three exposure settings: aperture, ISO and shutter speed.
# What is the purpose of the depth-of-field preview button?
# Where are three places you can view your exposure settings?
# What is the difference between the Canon 6D and a Canon Rebel?
# How do you activate Live View when taking pictures?
# What class of memory card should always be used in the 6D?
# Describe how to change a lens.
# For what lighting situation is the 6D’s full frame censor advantageous?
# How do you set the included GA kit lenses to auto focus? How is this different from APS kit lenses?
# Which type of lens mount can you use with the 6D? Which type should you '''definitely not''' use?
# Describe at least three ways this camera can be permanently damaged.
# If your equipment is lost, stolen or damaged who is 100% financially responsible?

=== Operational ===
To be done during your scheduled proficiency at Media Loan/APS or class workshop.

# Identify all the major parts/controls.
# Demonstrate how to switch between photo/video mode as well as turn on Live View.
# Adjust each of the exposure settings: ISO, aperture, shutter speed, with any method(s).
# Change the picture and video resolution/quality.
# Activate the Quick menu (Q) and navigate the settings.
# Set a custom white balance.
# Navigate the different exposure modes.
# Navigate through the MENU.
# (GA) Detach/Attach the battery grip.
# (GA) Set-up the remote
# (APS) Set-up the shoulder rig
# (APS) Attach an ND filter.

[[Category:Media Loan]]

Canon 6D Proficiency Test

2020-04-25T22:06:13Z

Highberh: /* Written */

=== Written Test ===
Answers may be found in the Canon 6D Proficiency Guide. Complete this written portion and bring it with you to your scheduled operational proficiency. Call (360) 867-6253 if you have any questions.
# Describe at least one method to adjust the three exposure settings: aperture, ISO and shutter speed.
# What is the purpose of the depth-of-field preview button?
# Where are three places you can view your exposure settings?
# What is the difference between the Canon 6D and a Canon Rebel?
# How do you activate Live View when taking pictures?
# What class of memory card should always be used in the 6D?
# Describe how to change a lens.
# For what lighting situation is the 6D’s full frame censor advantageous?
# How do you set the included GA kit lenses to auto focus? How is this different from APS kit lenses?
# Which type of lens mount can you use with the 6D? Which type should you '''definitely not''' use?
# Describe at least three ways this camera can be permanently damaged.
# If your equipment is lost, stolen or damaged who is 100% financially responsible?

=== Operational ===
To be done during your scheduled proficiency at Media Loan/APS or class workshop.

# Identify all the major parts/controls.
# Demonstrate how to switch between photo/video mode as well as turn on Live View.
# Adjust each of the exposure settings: ISO, aperture, shutter speed, with any method(s).
# Change the picture and video resolution/quality.
# Activate the Quick menu (Q) and navigate the settings.
# Set a custom white balance.
# Navigate the different exposure modes.
# Navigate through the MENU.
# (GA) Detach/Attach the battery grip.
# (GA) Set-up the remote
# (APS) Set-up the shoulder rig
# (APS) Attach an ND filter.

[[Category:Media Loan]]

Canon 6D Gear Guide

2020-04-25T22:02:26Z

Highberh: /* INTRODUCTION */

[[File:6d_1.jpg|600x600px]]

=INTRODUCTION=
{{#ev:vimeo|159257397|500|right|APS Canon 6D Kit}}

{{#ev:vimeo|159256566|500|left|General Access Canon 6D Kit}} 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

'''Here is where you can find the [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test Canon 6D proficiency test.]'''

The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.

Media Loan's other major DSLR is the Canon Rebel. Compared to the Rebel T5i, the 6D has:
* 30% better image quality
* Water sealing
* Longer battery life (2x more photos per battery charge)
* More light sensitivity - 2 f-stops
* 20% better resolution (20.9MP vs. 17.9)

...and more!

[[File:diagram_1.png|250px|right|thumb]]

There are two 6D kit options at Media Loan.
The 6D kits in '''general access''' are built for photography purposes. They include:
* 1x 1:4 24-105mm lens
* 1x remote kit
* 1x battery grip
* 1x battery charger
* 1x class 10 memory card
* 3x batteries

 
'''APS''' has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera. The lenses are cine, manual, and prime, with an f/1.5. The kit includes:
* 1x shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder.
* 1x 24mm lens
* 1x 35mm lens
* 1x 85mm lens
* 2x variable ND (neutral density) filters
* 3x batteries and a
* 1x plug in power supply
* 1x class 10 memory card
 
 

Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.
 

=CARING FOR THE CANON 6D=
[[File:diagram_2.png|250px|right|thumb]]
<nowiki>*</nowiki>NEVER LEAVE THE CAMERA BODY ANYWHERE BUT IN THE KIT -- THE SCREEN AND OTHER SENSITIVE INSTRUMENTS CAN GET SCRATCHED OR RUINED!*

Media Loan has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.

'''DO NOT''': 
Drop this camera 
Point camera toward Sun 
Submerge this camera in water 
Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field! 
Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car 
Store this camera in excessive heat or cold 
Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera 
Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals 
'''Mount an EF-S Lens onto the body''' 
Use excessive physical force 
Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!

====EF-S Lenses:====
EF-S Mount lenses ''cannot'' be used with the 6D. The back of EF-S lenses extends too far back into the camera body and could damage the mirror or sensor. ONLY USE EF LENSES WITH THE 6D. All of the EF-S lenses at Media Loan are noted as such on their case, as well as on the lens itself. If you want to use any lenses other than the lens(es) that come with the kit, you need to check with the Media Loan staff.

=Quick Exposure Settings Guide=
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the 6D. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder, the bottom of the LCD screen in live view mode, and on the top right panel display. '''In the APS 6D kit, aperture can only be adjusted with a ring on the manual lenses.'''
# Q Menu: The most familiar way to adjust these is through the Quick selection button, Q. This can only be activated in photo mode when live view is off. Once activated, you can scroll through and adjust each setting accordingly.
# Exterior buttons: In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. The circular quick control dial changes the aperture and the top main dial changes the shutter speed. To adjust the ISO, turn the top dial while holding down the top ISO button.

=FRONT CONTROLS=
===Depth-of-Field Preview button===
[[File:depth_preview.png]]

This button is located on the opposite side of the lens release. Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus as determined by the set aperture. The viewfinder will probably get much darker, and current settings will also be displayed near the bottom. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu. (p. 147)

===Lens Release Button===
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.

=TOP CONTROLS=

[[file:6d_2.jpg|400px|left|thumb|Canon 6D Top Controls]]
 
 
 
 
 
 

Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.
===Exposure Mode (Top left knob)===
Use this knob to set the exposure mode. Use M for full manual mode. The other settings will have some automatic features, depending on the mode you select.
===Top Main Dial===
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.

===AF Mode===
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses do. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.

You select between autofocus and manual focus with the switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.

===Drive===
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press the DRIVE button and move the top dial to change the drive mode. The settings are: 

[[file:6d_drive.png]]

===ISO (sensitivity to light)===
ISO sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. The higher the ISO, the more noise there will be in your image. Try to keep the ISO as low as possible. To adjust ISO, press ISO and turn the top dial.

===Metering===
Use the following chart to determine which metering mode you should use. Change the metering mode by pressing the meter button above the top LCD panel. 

[[file:6d_meter.png]]

===LCD Dial Light===
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.

=REAR CONTROLS=
[[File:6d_3.jpg|400px|left|thumb|Canon 6D Rear View]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

====MENU Button====
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings (see notes below).
====INFO Button====
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again. Pressing INFO multiple times will display an electronic level.

====Diopter Control====
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.
====Photo/Video Lever====
To switch between movie and photo mode, turn the lever to the proper selection. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots.

====Start/Stop (Live View)====
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever to your desired mode. Then press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power. This button is also used to start/stop video recording.

====AF-ON Button====
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.
====Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button====
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.
====AF-Area Mode Button====
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.
====Magnification Button====
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.
====Play Button====
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.
====The Quick Control [Q] Button====
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.
====Master Controls====
The master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. These include: the set button, the multi-controller, and quick control dial. The '''SET''' button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring, called the '''multi-controller'''. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big '''quick control dial'''. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The '''LOCK''' switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.

====Delete Button====
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.

=MENU SETTINGS=
Access the MENU to change various camera system settings, such as video/photo resolution and formats. The MENU is organized into various tabs. You can access the video settings in the MENU when the camera is set to video mode, and the photography settings when the camera is set to photo mode. 

'''Notes on settings:'''
====Movie Rec. Size====
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. 

'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use.

====Format card====
Format the memory card before returning your camera to Media Loan. This not only clears it for the next user, but it also ensures protection of your work. Make sure to transfer the files off of the card before you format. Select “low level format” to completely clear the information (without low level format, your data will be retrievable by certain computer programs).

====Video system====
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.

==== Custom White Balance ====
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this procedure under the actual light source to be used.

'''Photograph a white object.'''
* The plain, white object should fill the spot metering circle.
* Focus manually and set the standard exposure for the white object.
* You can have have any white balance set for initial photograph--AWB, daylight, etc.
 
'''Select Custom White Balance in the menus.'''
* Under the second camera sub menu, select Custom White Balance, then press set.
* The photo you took should appear and then select OK and this white balance data will be imported.
* When the menu reappears, press the MENU button to exit the menu.
 
'''Make sure you are on the custom white balance setting.'''
* Press the WB button or the Quick Menu and select custom white balance and press set.
 
[[File:Media Loan Custom White Balance.png|none|thumb|100x100px]]

=REMOTE (GA Kit)=
The General Access kit comes with a remote, and there is multiple ways to use it. With this remote, 6D does not need to be in "remote" drive mode.

Steps for usage:
# Set the remote and receiver to the same channel. On each, remove the battery cover and flip the switch up to a matching channel (typically ch. 1). '''These must match'''.
# Plug the receiver into the corresponding input on the left side of the camera body.
# Power on the receiver and the camera.
# The shooting mode can be selected with the remote as well as the camera. The most direct way to use the remote is to set the camera to single shooting drive mode, and then use the remote to select your actual desired mode (single, continuous, BULB, and timer). The BULB function can be used two ways: two take quick, continuous shots (set the remote to bulb and the drive mode on the camera to continuous) and to take long exposures (set the remote to bulb and the exposure mode on the camera to BULB). In both uses, press the remote button one to start shooting and again to stop.
# If set to AF, hold the main button on the remote down halfway to focus. Press down all the way to take a picture in single shooting and timer modes. In burst mode, keep the button pressed to take multiple shots. In BULB, press the button once to open the shutter and a second time to close it.
# After a picture is take, you can hold the remote button halfway down again for a quick preview.

=SHOULDER RIG (APS Kit)=
The APS 6D kit can be checked out with a shoulder rig. This piece of equipment allows for stabilization of the camera. Please watch the APS Canon 6D Kit video at the top of this page to learn how to assemble this rig.

 

[[Category:Media Loan]]

Canon 6D Gear Guide

2020-04-25T21:57:29Z

Highberh: /* INTRODUCTION */

[[File:6d_1.jpg|600x600px]]

=INTRODUCTION=
{{#ev:vimeo|159257397|500|right|APS Canon 6D Kit}}

{{#ev:vimeo|159256566|500|left|General Access Canon 6D Kit}} 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

'''[http://www.evergreen.edu//medialoan/docs/aps-docs/canon6dmanual.pdf Complete Manual for the Canon 6D]'''

'''Here is where you can find the [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test Canon 6D proficiency test.]'''

The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.

Media Loan's other major DSLR is the Canon Rebel. Compared to the Rebel T5i, the 6D has:
* 30% better image quality
* Water sealing
* Longer battery life (2x more photos per battery charge)
* More light sensitivity - 2 f-stops
* 20% better resolution (20.9MP vs. 17.9)

...and more!

[[File:diagram_1.png|250px|right|thumb]]

There are two 6D kit options at Media Loan.
The 6D kits in '''general access''' are built for photography purposes. They include:
* 1x 1:4 24-105mm lens
* 1x remote kit
* 1x battery grip
* 1x battery charger
* 1x class 10 memory card
* 3x batteries

 
'''APS''' has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera. The lenses are cine, manual, and prime, with an f/1.5. The kit includes:
* 1x shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder.
* 1x 24mm lens
* 1x 35mm lens
* 1x 85mm lens
* 2x variable ND (neutral density) filters
* 3x batteries and a
* 1x plug in power supply
* 1x class 10 memory card
 
 

Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.
 

=CARING FOR THE CANON 6D=
[[File:diagram_2.png|250px|right|thumb]]
<nowiki>*</nowiki>NEVER LEAVE THE CAMERA BODY ANYWHERE BUT IN THE KIT -- THE SCREEN AND OTHER SENSITIVE INSTRUMENTS CAN GET SCRATCHED OR RUINED!*

Media Loan has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.

'''DO NOT''': 
Drop this camera 
Point camera toward Sun 
Submerge this camera in water 
Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field! 
Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car 
Store this camera in excessive heat or cold 
Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera 
Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals 
'''Mount an EF-S Lens onto the body''' 
Use excessive physical force 
Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!

====EF-S Lenses:====
EF-S Mount lenses ''cannot'' be used with the 6D. The back of EF-S lenses extends too far back into the camera body and could damage the mirror or sensor. ONLY USE EF LENSES WITH THE 6D. All of the EF-S lenses at Media Loan are noted as such on their case, as well as on the lens itself. If you want to use any lenses other than the lens(es) that come with the kit, you need to check with the Media Loan staff.

=Quick Exposure Settings Guide=
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the 6D. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder, the bottom of the LCD screen in live view mode, and on the top right panel display. '''In the APS 6D kit, aperture can only be adjusted with a ring on the manual lenses.'''
# Q Menu: The most familiar way to adjust these is through the Quick selection button, Q. This can only be activated in photo mode when live view is off. Once activated, you can scroll through and adjust each setting accordingly.
# Exterior buttons: In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. The circular quick control dial changes the aperture and the top main dial changes the shutter speed. To adjust the ISO, turn the top dial while holding down the top ISO button.

=FRONT CONTROLS=
===Depth-of-Field Preview button===
[[File:depth_preview.png]]

This button is located on the opposite side of the lens release. Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus as determined by the set aperture. The viewfinder will probably get much darker, and current settings will also be displayed near the bottom. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu. (p. 147)

===Lens Release Button===
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.

=TOP CONTROLS=

[[file:6d_2.jpg|400px|left|thumb|Canon 6D Top Controls]]
 
 
 
 
 
 

Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.
===Exposure Mode (Top left knob)===
Use this knob to set the exposure mode. Use M for full manual mode. The other settings will have some automatic features, depending on the mode you select.
===Top Main Dial===
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.

===AF Mode===
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses do. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.

You select between autofocus and manual focus with the switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.

===Drive===
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press the DRIVE button and move the top dial to change the drive mode. The settings are: 

[[file:6d_drive.png]]

===ISO (sensitivity to light)===
ISO sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. The higher the ISO, the more noise there will be in your image. Try to keep the ISO as low as possible. To adjust ISO, press ISO and turn the top dial.

===Metering===
Use the following chart to determine which metering mode you should use. Change the metering mode by pressing the meter button above the top LCD panel. 

[[file:6d_meter.png]]

===LCD Dial Light===
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.

=REAR CONTROLS=
[[File:6d_3.jpg|400px|left|thumb|Canon 6D Rear View]]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

====MENU Button====
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings (see notes below).
====INFO Button====
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again. Pressing INFO multiple times will display an electronic level.

====Diopter Control====
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.
====Photo/Video Lever====
To switch between movie and photo mode, turn the lever to the proper selection. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots.

====Start/Stop (Live View)====
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever to your desired mode. Then press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power. This button is also used to start/stop video recording.

====AF-ON Button====
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.
====Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button====
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.
====AF-Area Mode Button====
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.
====Magnification Button====
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.
====Play Button====
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.
====The Quick Control [Q] Button====
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.
====Master Controls====
The master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. These include: the set button, the multi-controller, and quick control dial. The '''SET''' button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring, called the '''multi-controller'''. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big '''quick control dial'''. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The '''LOCK''' switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.

====Delete Button====
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.

=MENU SETTINGS=
Access the MENU to change various camera system settings, such as video/photo resolution and formats. The MENU is organized into various tabs. You can access the video settings in the MENU when the camera is set to video mode, and the photography settings when the camera is set to photo mode. 

'''Notes on settings:'''
====Movie Rec. Size====
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. 

'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use.

====Format card====
Format the memory card before returning your camera to Media Loan. This not only clears it for the next user, but it also ensures protection of your work. Make sure to transfer the files off of the card before you format. Select “low level format” to completely clear the information (without low level format, your data will be retrievable by certain computer programs).

====Video system====
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.

==== Custom White Balance ====
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this procedure under the actual light source to be used.

'''Photograph a white object.'''
* The plain, white object should fill the spot metering circle.
* Focus manually and set the standard exposure for the white object.
* You can have have any white balance set for initial photograph--AWB, daylight, etc.
 
'''Select Custom White Balance in the menus.'''
* Under the second camera sub menu, select Custom White Balance, then press set.
* The photo you took should appear and then select OK and this white balance data will be imported.
* When the menu reappears, press the MENU button to exit the menu.
 
'''Make sure you are on the custom white balance setting.'''
* Press the WB button or the Quick Menu and select custom white balance and press set.
 
[[File:Media Loan Custom White Balance.png|none|thumb|100x100px]]

=REMOTE (GA Kit)=
The General Access kit comes with a remote, and there is multiple ways to use it. With this remote, 6D does not need to be in "remote" drive mode.

Steps for usage:
# Set the remote and receiver to the same channel. On each, remove the battery cover and flip the switch up to a matching channel (typically ch. 1). '''These must match'''.
# Plug the receiver into the corresponding input on the left side of the camera body.
# Power on the receiver and the camera.
# The shooting mode can be selected with the remote as well as the camera. The most direct way to use the remote is to set the camera to single shooting drive mode, and then use the remote to select your actual desired mode (single, continuous, BULB, and timer). The BULB function can be used two ways: two take quick, continuous shots (set the remote to bulb and the drive mode on the camera to continuous) and to take long exposures (set the remote to bulb and the exposure mode on the camera to BULB). In both uses, press the remote button one to start shooting and again to stop.
# If set to AF, hold the main button on the remote down halfway to focus. Press down all the way to take a picture in single shooting and timer modes. In burst mode, keep the button pressed to take multiple shots. In BULB, press the button once to open the shutter and a second time to close it.
# After a picture is take, you can hold the remote button halfway down again for a quick preview.

=SHOULDER RIG (APS Kit)=
The APS 6D kit can be checked out with a shoulder rig. This piece of equipment allows for stabilization of the camera. Please watch the APS Canon 6D Kit video at the top of this page to learn how to assemble this rig.

 

[[Category:Media Loan]]

Medium Format Cameras Gear Guide

2020-04-20T23:34:20Z

Highberh: /* Loading Film */

[[File:MediumFormat-top-large.jpg|centre|800x800px]]
'''A proficiency test is required to check out these cameras.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[Medium Format Cameras Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. (You must already be proficient in the 35mm manual camera before obtaining this proficiency.) Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.

=== Introduction to Medium Format ===

==== Medium Format vs. 35mm ====
This is an instructional guide to the medium format film
cameras available at Media Loan. It will cover a brief introduction to medium
format photography and then go through the operating steps for each of our
models.

When talking about film photography, there are three main
types of film, or formats: 35mm, medium format, and large format. With medium
and large format, the frame size on the film is much larger than 35mm film and yields significantly more detail and the ability to be printed at very large sizes. In essence, it
is a question of quality. The size and shape of the actual frame is variable
depending on the camera (whether your picture is a square, rectangle, skinny
rectangle, etc.) The size of the frame is often indicated in the name of the
camera, like the Pentax 6x7 whose frame dimensions are 6cm by 7cm. With 35mm
photography the size of the frame is always 35mm across regardless of the
camera used.

Medium format film comes wrapped around a plastic spool with
light-safe black paper layered around the film itself. There is no metal
canister like with 35mm film. Additionally, when there are no more exposures
left on the roll, medium format film is not rewound back on to the spool but is
transferred to another take-up spool on the other side of the camera.

There are two types of medium format film, 120 and 220. The
film is exactly the same except that 220 film contains twice the amount of
exposures as 120. However, most medium format cameras can shoot only one or the
other. The Pentax 6x7 and the Mamiya cameras have the ability to shoot both but the camera needs to be adjusted
to the right setting prior to loading the film. 120 film is the most common and
allows for 10-12 exposures depending on the camera’s aspect ratio. Keep in mind that the Photo Store and many other stores do not process 220 film.

==== Tools Required ====
In order to shoot on a medium format camera, you will need some
accessories. Some are optional while others are not. The essentials include an
'''empty film spool''' that your exposed film will be transferred on to (there should
already be one in the camera from the previous user. If there isn’t, ask a Media
Loan staff member to give you one.) You will also need a '''light meter''' as most of our medium
format cameras do not have built in meters.

Refer
to [http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Light_Meters_Quick_Guide Media Loan’s operating guide for light meters] to find out how to use what
might be called your medium format camera’s best friend.

Other accessories include tripods, cable releases, and
flashes. If using a flash, remember to also pick up a flash sync cable.

==== Precautions ====
These cameras are old, expensive, and used by many students. Please give them the respect they deserve. Before handling a camera, be
aware of what can potentially damage it and what improper usage looks like.

Some general rules for these cameras are:

·
Do not expose them to water or moisture. They
are not weather proof.

·
Do not leave in excessive heat, like in a car.

·
Do not leave in excessive cold, like the
freezer.

·
Do not try to force any mechanism on the camera.
You’re probably doing it wrong if it feels like a lot of force.

·
Do not remove the prism viewfinder or the lens. This will
get dust inside the camera.

·
'''NEVER LEAVE ANYTHING FROM MEDIA LOAN IN YOUR'''
'''CAR'''!

·
As with all Media Loan equipment, you are 100% financially
responsibly for any damage and repairs done to the camera.
[[File:Pentax-top.jpg|thumb|Pentax 6x7]][[File:Pentax film type.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Film type dial]]
=== Pentax 6x7 ===
The Pentax 6x7 is perhaps the easiest to use of
all our medium format cameras, as it most resembles the shape and operation
of a 35mm camera. It is a single lens reflex (SLR) camera meaning that what you see
through the viewfinder is the actual image that will appear on the film. This
camera can shoot both 120 and 220 film. You will not be able to release the
shutter until there is film loaded
==== Before Loading Film ====
[[File:IMG 3315.JPG|thumb|150x150px|left|Handle screw]]
Firstly, be sure that the wooden handle grip is screwed on tight. All of the camera’s weight rests on this handle.

Then you need to set
the film type you are working with, either 120 or 220. There are two places
that need to be adjusted for this. If you’re holding the camera like you would
to shoot, the first is on the right side of the camera. [[File:Pentax Pressure Plate.jpg|thumb|150x150px|left|Pressure plate film type]]There is a dial that
[[File:Pentax locks.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Spool dial locks]]
[[File:Pentax wrong.jpg|150x150px|thumb|Incorrect film direction]]
lets your choose between the two. You will need a quarter or a strong finger
nail to move it. The second adjustment is found on the inside of the camera.
Open the camera by pulling down on the silver release on the bottom left side
of the camera. Notice the black speckled pressure plate on the door. Following
the direction of the arrows there, gently push the pressure plate down and to
the side that corresponds to your film type.

==== Loading Film ====
[[File:Pentax back cover.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Cover release latch]]
It is best to do this while sitting as these cameras do not come with neck straps.
# First, open the back of the camera if it is not already open from the previous step. On the bottom of the camera are two silver dials that hold the film spools in place.
# Fold out their handles and turn these counter-clockwise and pull them up until the stay put. Make sure your empty take-up spool is on the right side. If there is no spool in the camera, ask a Media Loan or Photoland staff to give you one. (It is common medium format etiquette to leave your old spool in the camera
when you’re done using it as it is not needed for developing.) [[File:Pentax correct.jpg|150x150px|thumb|Correct film direction]]Like with 35mm film, the Pentax 6x7 needs to be loaded in a “up and over” style and not “down and under.”

3. After you’ve aligned the cross in the top of the film spool with the notch in the camera, close the silver dials on the bottom of the
camera.

4. Pull the film across to the right side of the camera and thread the film into the take-up spool just as you would with 35mm film.

5. Use the crank lever to advance the film and stop when the arrows on the film paper line up with the arrow on the inside
of the camera.

6. Close the back of the camera and advance the film until “0” is line up with the red dot in the frame counter.

==== Exposing, Focusing, & Taking a Picture ====
The '''shutter speed''' is set by the dial on the top left side
of the camera. The current setting is indicated by whatever number is next to the
small red LED just to the right of the dial. Since there is no built in light
meter on this camera, there is no need to set the '''ISO''' for whatever film you are
using.

If using a flash, you must use a shutter speed on this
camera of 1/30th of slower.

If you wish to do a timed exposure longer than one second
and you don’t want to keep you finger on the shutter as the “Bulb”
setting would allow, rotate the shutter speed dial to anywhere between the red “X” and “1000.”
Now, releasing the shutter will keep it open until you rotate the shutter speed
dial back to “X”.

The '''aperture''' ring is located on the lens. This is the ring
closest to the body of the camera and ranges from f/2.4 to f/22. The aperture
ring will be your primary tool for exposing. Also located on the lens is an
aperture preview mechanism. This allows you get see your depth of field before
actually taking a picture. You can lock this switch in "AUTO" mode so
that you will always be previewing your aperture. To do this, slide the switch
to "AUTO" and push down. To release it back to manual, push down on the other side of
the switch.

To focus, simply look through the viewfinder and adjust the
focus ring until the split viewfinder is even and the image looks crisp.

To release the shutter and take a picture, first crank the film advance level with your right thumb and smoothly and firmly depress the silver button next to the crank.

A cable release can be attached by screwing one into the shutter release button just as with Media Loan's 35mm Pentax K-1000 cameras.

The Pentax 6x7 can not take multiple exposure pictures.

==== Unloading Film ====

Once all of the frames are exposed you’ll want to unload
your film. When you’re ready to do this, wind the crank a few more times until
there is no more tension in the crank lever. By now the protective light-safe
paper should be covering the film and totally wrapped around the spool.
Unfasten the silver dials just like when loading film. Keeping a firm grip on the film so that it doesn't unroll,
lick or peel off the sticky tape on the roll and make sure it is securely attached to the
spool. Close everything back up.

==== Using a Flash ====
To use a flash with the Pentax 6x7, first attach the flash to the hot shoe mount on the handle. This camera has options for both X-type sync cables and FP-type sync cables. Use only the X-type as plugging an X cable into an FP housing can cause damage. Again, this camera can only use a flash when the shutter speed is set to 1/30th of a second or slower.
[[File:Bronica-top2.jpg|thumb|356x356px|Bronica SQ-B]]

=== Bronica ETRS, ETRSI, & SQ-B ===

There are three different models of the Bronica available at Media Loan: SB-Q, ETRS, and ETRSi. They are very similar in operation except for a few minor things like button placement and the viewfinders and accessories that come with each camera. The aspect ratio that these cameras shoot at is also different.
* The ETRS and ETRSi have prism viewfinders and are in a 6x6 (square) format.

* The SB-Q (aka 645) has a wast-level view finder and is in a 6x4.5 (rectangle) format.

The Bronica begins to feel like a departure from the 35mm cameras. It is essentially a cube with a lens attached. One notices a very different feel when shooting with a Bronica than with the Pentax 6x7. Since a lot of the controls are not in conventional places, it may take some time to get acquainted with this camera. All of the Bronica cameras can only use 120 film.
[[File:Cartridge doors.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Film cartridge doors]]
[[File:Bronica cartridge release.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Cartridge release latches]]
[[File:Bronica cartridge.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|The film cartridge ]]

==== Loading Film ====
To load film, open the back of the camera by pinching the buttons that lie just under the viewfinder that are indicated by arrows. It is spring loaded and the film cartridge may fall out so be prepared. The outer shell will fold down and then the film cartridge can be removed.
In the Bronica, film moves from top to bottom. This means your new roll of film will be on top and your empty spool on bottom Now that you're holding the film cartridge, notice there are two door flaps on the left side. Using your finger, push them open from the inside out. You will now be able to remove or insert film spools into each slot. Make sure the empty spool is on bottom and the fresh film is on top. Now you will take the film leader and run it over the pressure plate on the opposite side, bringing it down and around to the empty take up spool. A proper loading will have the black side of the paper leader facing outwards over the pressure plate. [[File:Bronica-Loading.gif|150x150px|thumb|Film direction]]Now, using the manual film advance wheel located on the right side of the cartridge, advance the film until the arrow on the leader aligns with the red arrow on the inside left of the cartridge.

To close the camera, the cartridge must first be aligned properly on the camera body, not inserted into the door. Once the cartridge is in place, close the door. It can be a little tricky to get it perfectly aligned. '''Do not force anything.''' If the door won't shut, take the cartridge out and try again.

Now wind the film advance lever until it stops moving and the frame counter is at 0.
[[File:Bronica viewfinder.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Waist-level viewfinder]]

==== Waist-level Viewfinder ====
[[File:Bronica magnifier.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Magnifier latch]]
[[File:Bronica magnifier2.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Magnifier]]Many of Media Loan's Bronicas, like the Mamiyas, feature waist-level viewfinders. This is different than a prism viewfinder in which the viewfinder is held up to the eye. Alternatively, waist-level viewfinders are held at the waist and have a "screen" and magnifier for focusing. Most waist-level viewfinders open by simply folding up the top of the camera. Sometimes there is a small latch. There are metal walls that will snap into place once it is open.
To open the magnifier for critical focusing, there is another release latch on the inside of the focusing hood. To close the magnifier, simply move it back into place with your finger, trying not to touch the actual glass.

Some of the Bronicas come with prism viewfinders, which you can ask for. Some of the prism viewfinders are electronic and feature an internal light meter.
==== Exposing, Focusing, & Taking a Picture ====
[[File:Bronica shutter speed.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Shutter speed dial]]
[[File:Bronica shutter.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Shutter release button]]
To set the '''shutter speed''', there is a dial on the right side of the camera body. The Bronica has a range of shutter speeds from 1/500th of a second to 8 seconds.

The '''aperture''' is set by twisting the aperture ring on the lens and has a range of f/2.4 to f/22.

If you are using a Bronica with a built in light meter, set the '''ISO''' to match your film speed by twisting the dial on the left of the viewfinder. If it does not have an internal light meter, you do not have to worry about setting your ISO.

To focus, open the magnifier in the focusing hood as described in the previous section. The Bronica's lens functions conveniently like most other camera lenses. Twist the focus ring until your subject comes into focus.

Before '''taking a picture''', the film must be advanced. Do this by winding the crank on the right side of the camera. When there is no film loaded in the camera, the crank will spin indefinitely. Once film has been loaded, the crank will stop itself in the correct position.

The shutter release button is a black button located on the front of the camera in the bottom left corner. You can attach a cable release by screwing one into the cable release hole on the left side of the camera.

It is preferable to take a picture in the steps in order to ensure a focused picture:
# Advance the film
# Set your shutter speed and aperture according to your light meter
# Focus on your subject
# Depress the shutter release button
[[File:Bronca flash plug.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Flash plug]]

==== Using a Flash ====
A flash can be connected using an X-type sync cable. The port for this flash is located on the front side of the camera in the top right corner. When plugging and unplugging a sync cable, always pull gently and straight out. Never use a twisting motion to get it out.

The Bronica can conveniently sync with flash at any shutter speed, even at its fastest of 1/500th of a second.
[[File:Bronica handles.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Mirror lock-up & multiple exposure knobs]]

==== Multiple Exposure ====
The Bronica cameras can take multiple exposures, exposing a single frame an unlimited number of times.

To do this, first wind the crank to advance the film. There is a small lever next to the crank that needs to be rotated clockwise. A red warning indicator will appear in the viewfinder letting you know that the multiple exposure mode is engaged, however it is always wise to double check that this lever is in the left or counter-clockwise position (single exposure mode) prior to shooting. When the multiple exposure mode is set, the shutter can be cocked with the film advance crank an infinite number of times without actually advancing the film.

==== Mirror Lockup ====
The function of a camera's mirror lockup (also abbreviated MLU) is to reduce the potential for motion blur due to the movement of the mirror inside the camera. This movement will potentially effect photographs only when shooting at shutter speeds of 1/60th of a second or slower. Since the mirror that allows viewing and composing through the viewfinder before actually taking a picture is stuck in its upright position, you will no longer be able to use the viewfinder once the MLU function is engaged.

To engage this function on the Bronica, first advance the film with the crank. There is a lever located to the right of the multiple exposure lever. Move this lever counter-clockwise. You will know it is engaged when you can not see anything through the viewfinder.

There are three settings for the mirror lockup function. "N" for normal in which the mirror will not lock up, and "S" for single frame and "C" for continuous in which the mirror will be locked up.

If you are on your last exposure of the roll and the mirror lock up function is still engaged, the shutter will continue to release every 360 degree turn and will not advance the film as would usually happen after the last exposure.

[[File:Mamiya-top.jpg|thumb|Mamiya C330]]

=== Mamiya C330 & C220 ===
The Mamiya cameras at Media Loan are perhaps the least intuitive to use of the medium format cameras. Learning to use one properly, however, is well worth it for both high quality images and mad style points. Like large format cameras, the Mamiya uses bellows to focus. Instead of adjusting the elements of glass within the lens, like with lenses that can focus internally, bellows physically move the lens farther or closer to the plane of film in order to focus.

The Mamiya shoots square frames that are 2 1/4 inch long in each direction.
[[File:Mamiya pressure plate.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Pressure plate film type]]

==== Before Loading Film ====
[[File:Mamiya-Unlocking.gif|thumb|150x150px|Cover dial rotation]]
Like the Pentax 6x7, the Mamiya can shoot with either 120 or 220 film and the camera needs to be adjusted accordingly before loading film. First, adjust the orientation of the pressure plate on the inside of the camera to coincide with the kind of film you are using. To open the back of the camera rotate the silver locking disk at the top of the back side of the camera so that the red dot is pointing up and you can slide the disk in the direction of the arrow.
[[File:Mamiya film type.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Film type indicator]]
[[File:Mamiya dial.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Parallax dial]]
Because the Mamiya uses a twin lens system rather than being an SLR, you will also need to adjust the parallax adjustment to match whatever the focal length of the lens is you are using. This can be set by the outer ring on the main dial on the left side of the camera. Depending on the adjustment made and the distance of the camera from the subject, a bar will appear on the left side of the viewfinder. ''This is important to notice as it indicates the top of the frame and everything above the bar will be cut off on the actual film, even though it is present in the viewfinder.''

Additionally, because the farther the bellows take the lens away from the film, light is increasingly lost along the way from when it enters the lens to when it reaches the film. Inside the viewfinder, the number that the moving bar lands at indicates in number of stops how much to increase the exposure by in order to compensate for the reduced light.

==== Loading Film ====
With the neck strap around your neck, open the back of the camera as indicated in the previous section. There are two spool release knobs on the left side of the camera. These pull out and will allow you to remove the film spools. Twist these knobs while pulling to lock them in their disengaged position. On the Mamiya, the film moves from bottom to top, opposite of the Bronica cameras move film. Accordingly, place the empty take up spool in the top compartment. Lock it in place. Then place your fresh roll of film in the bottom compartment and lock it in place.
[[File:Mamiya film loading.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Loading film]]
Pull out the film leader from the fresh spool and bring it up to the empty spool and thread it into that spool. Once threaded, turn the film advance crank on the right side of the camera clockwise to advance the film leader until the printed arrow on the leader matches up with the start mark on the inside of the camera (located a little lower than half way down on the right side.)

Close the back of the camera by pushing firmly on either side of the silver locking dial. Once closed, turn the locking dial counter-clockwise to lock the back cover in place. Continue to turn the film advance crank clockwise until it won't turn anymore. Your shutter is now cocked and ready to take a picture.

==== Exposing, Focusing, & Taking a Picture ====
[[File:Mamiya exposure.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Shutter speed & aperture]]
[[File:Mamiya aperture knob.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Aperture adjustment knob]]
The Mamiya is slightly different than other cameras in that both the aperture and shutter speed are set on the bottom lens. There are individual rings for each of these settings. The '''aperture''' can be set by moving the little black handle on the left side of the lens and the '''shutter speed''' can be set by twisting the knob with fractions of a second on it. Do not change the shutter speed after the shutter has been cocked.

The aperture ranges from f/2.8 to f/22 and the shutter speed ranges from 1/500th of a second to 1 seconds.

Since the Mamiya does not have an internal light meter there is no need for an '''ISO''' setting. The camera does however allow you to set the ISO of the film you are using on the dial configuration on the right side of the camera. This does not effect the performance of the camera at all but simply serves as a reminder for the kind of film you are shooting. Be sure to also check out a light meter from Media Loan when checking out a medium format camera.

Like the Bronica, most of Media Loan's Mamiyas feature waist-level viewfinders although some of them come with prism viewfinders. You can request either when checking one out. Also like the Bronica, the Mamiya has a magnifier seated within the focusing hood that can be expanded for critical focusing. To '''focus''' the camera, the Mamiya uses bellows that bring the lens closer or farther from the film plane. The lens is a fixed piece of glass and does not focus internally. To adjust the bellows and focus your image, twist either of the large black knobs on the bottom front of the camera.
[[File:Mamiya shutters.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Two shutter releases]]
After your film has been advanced by turning the crank clockwise, the camera is ready to '''take a picture'''. There are two ways to release the shutter. The first is a silver button on the front of the camera in the bottom left corner. A cable release can also be screwed in here. The second way is with the slide mechanism on the right side of the camera. There is a small black lever for your thumb. Slide this downward to release the shutter. As the Mamiyas are quite old, not all of the cameras are able to be fired with either method. Some can only use one or the other and this will be indicated by a note on the camera. Advance the film after each exposure.
[[File:Mamiya exposure type.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Exposure type dial]]
[[File:Mamiya lock.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Shutter release lock]]
There is a shutter lock on the slide mechanism that can be pushed to the "L" position. This prevents both shutter releases from being able to move and is thus useful to use when transporting the camera or arranging your shot.

To take take a picture using '''multiple exposures''', there is a dial next to the film advance crank that has the option of either "SINGLE" or "MULTI". Turn this to "MULTI" to be able to exposure a frame multiple times without needing to advance the film.

==== Unloading Film ====
After twelve frames are exposed, continue to turn the winding crank until there is no more tension on the advance crank. At this point, the protective paper of the film should be rolled up around the take up spool. When unloading the film, keep the spool rolled and hold the film tightly to prevent light exposure. Lick or peel the tab on the film and wrap it firmly around the exposed film. Close the camera back.
[[File:Mamiya flash plug.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Flash plug]]

==== Using a Flash ====
To synchronize a flash with the Mamiya, switch the Synchro Selector MX Switch to “X”. You will need to check out a Vivitar flash and a flash sync cable. Because the Vivitar flash was not designed to be used with the Mamiya, it will not properly mount on the hot shoe. Therefore, you’ll need to hold it while taking your picture. The Seagull and the Kalimar should not require a sync cable as they can mount onto the hot shoe.
'''Caution: Avoid moving the self-timer while the flash sync is set at “M”. It may cause damage to the self-timer.'''

[[category:Media Loan]]

Medium Format Cameras Gear Guide

2020-04-20T23:27:28Z

Highberh: /* Loading Film */

[[File:MediumFormat-top-large.jpg|centre|800x800px]]
'''A proficiency test is required to check out these cameras.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[Medium Format Cameras Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. (You must already be proficient in the 35mm manual camera before obtaining this proficiency.) Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.

=== Introduction to Medium Format ===

==== Medium Format vs. 35mm ====
This is an instructional guide to the medium format film
cameras available at Media Loan. It will cover a brief introduction to medium
format photography and then go through the operating steps for each of our
models.

When talking about film photography, there are three main
types of film, or formats: 35mm, medium format, and large format. With medium
and large format, the frame size on the film is much larger than 35mm film and yields significantly more detail and the ability to be printed at very large sizes. In essence, it
is a question of quality. The size and shape of the actual frame is variable
depending on the camera (whether your picture is a square, rectangle, skinny
rectangle, etc.) The size of the frame is often indicated in the name of the
camera, like the Pentax 6x7 whose frame dimensions are 6cm by 7cm. With 35mm
photography the size of the frame is always 35mm across regardless of the
camera used.

Medium format film comes wrapped around a plastic spool with
light-safe black paper layered around the film itself. There is no metal
canister like with 35mm film. Additionally, when there are no more exposures
left on the roll, medium format film is not rewound back on to the spool but is
transferred to another take-up spool on the other side of the camera.

There are two types of medium format film, 120 and 220. The
film is exactly the same except that 220 film contains twice the amount of
exposures as 120. However, most medium format cameras can shoot only one or the
other. The Pentax 6x7 and the Mamiya cameras have the ability to shoot both but the camera needs to be adjusted
to the right setting prior to loading the film. 120 film is the most common and
allows for 10-12 exposures depending on the camera’s aspect ratio. Keep in mind that the Photo Store and many other stores do not process 220 film.

==== Tools Required ====
In order to shoot on a medium format camera, you will need some
accessories. Some are optional while others are not. The essentials include an
'''empty film spool''' that your exposed film will be transferred on to (there should
already be one in the camera from the previous user. If there isn’t, ask a Media
Loan staff member to give you one.) You will also need a '''light meter''' as most of our medium
format cameras do not have built in meters.

Refer
to [http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Light_Meters_Quick_Guide Media Loan’s operating guide for light meters] to find out how to use what
might be called your medium format camera’s best friend.

Other accessories include tripods, cable releases, and
flashes. If using a flash, remember to also pick up a flash sync cable.

==== Precautions ====
These cameras are old, expensive, and used by many students. Please give them the respect they deserve. Before handling a camera, be
aware of what can potentially damage it and what improper usage looks like.

Some general rules for these cameras are:

·
Do not expose them to water or moisture. They
are not weather proof.

·
Do not leave in excessive heat, like in a car.

·
Do not leave in excessive cold, like the
freezer.

·
Do not try to force any mechanism on the camera.
You’re probably doing it wrong if it feels like a lot of force.

·
Do not remove the prism viewfinder or the lens. This will
get dust inside the camera.

·
'''NEVER LEAVE ANYTHING FROM MEDIA LOAN IN YOUR'''
'''CAR'''!

·
As with all Media Loan equipment, you are 100% financially
responsibly for any damage and repairs done to the camera.
[[File:Pentax-top.jpg|thumb|Pentax 6x7]][[File:Pentax film type.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Film type dial]]
=== Pentax 6x7 ===
The Pentax 6x7 is perhaps the easiest to use of
all our medium format cameras, as it most resembles the shape and operation
of a 35mm camera. It is a single lens reflex (SLR) camera meaning that what you see
through the viewfinder is the actual image that will appear on the film. This
camera can shoot both 120 and 220 film. You will not be able to release the
shutter until there is film loaded
==== Before Loading Film ====
[[File:IMG 3315.JPG|thumb|150x150px|left|Handle screw]]
Firstly, be sure that the wooden handle grip is screwed on tight. All of the camera’s weight rests on this handle.

Then you need to set
the film type you are working with, either 120 or 220. There are two places
that need to be adjusted for this. If you’re holding the camera like you would
to shoot, the first is on the right side of the camera. [[File:Pentax Pressure Plate.jpg|thumb|150x150px|left|Pressure plate film type]]There is a dial that
[[File:Pentax locks.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Spool dial locks]]
[[File:Pentax wrong.jpg|150x150px|thumb|Incorrect film direction]]
lets your choose between the two. You will need a quarter or a strong finger
nail to move it. The second adjustment is found on the inside of the camera.
Open the camera by pulling down on the silver release on the bottom left side
of the camera. Notice the black speckled pressure plate on the door. Following
the direction of the arrows there, gently push the pressure plate down and to
the side that corresponds to your film type.

==== Loading Film ====
[[File:Pentax back cover.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Cover release latch]]
It is best to do this while sitting as these cameras do not come with neck straps.
# First, open the back of the camera if it is not already open from the previous step. On the bottom of the camera are two silver dials that hold the film spools in place.
# Fold out their handles and turn these counter-clockwise and pull them up until the stay put. Make sure your empty take-up spool is on the right side. If there is no spool in the camera, ask a Media Loan or Photoland staff to give you one. (It is common medium format etiquette to leave your old spool in the camera
when you’re done using it as it is not needed for developing.) [[File:Pentax correct.jpg|150x150px|thumb|Correct film direction]]Like with 35mm film, the Pentax 6x7 needs to be loaded in a “up and over” style and not “down and under.”

3. After you’ve aligned the cross in the top of the film spool with the notch in the camera, close the silver dials on the bottom of the
camera.

4. Pull the film across to the right side of the camera and thread the film into the take-up spool just as you would with 35mm film.

5. Use the crank lever to advance the film and stop when the arrows on the film paper line up with the arrow on the inside
of the camera.

6. Close the back of the camera and advance the film until “0” is line up with the red dot in the frame counter.

==== Exposing, Focusing, & Taking a Picture ====
The '''shutter speed''' is set by the dial on the top left side
of the camera. The current setting is indicated by whatever number is next to the
small red LED just to the right of the dial. Since there is no built in light
meter on this camera, there is no need to set the '''ISO''' for whatever film you are
using.

If using a flash, you must use a shutter speed on this
camera of 1/30th of slower.

If you wish to do a timed exposure longer than one second
and you don’t want to keep you finger on the shutter as the “Bulb”
setting would allow, rotate the shutter speed dial to anywhere between the red “X” and “1000.”
Now, releasing the shutter will keep it open until you rotate the shutter speed
dial back to “X”.

The '''aperture''' ring is located on the lens. This is the ring
closest to the body of the camera and ranges from f/2.4 to f/22. The aperture
ring will be your primary tool for exposing. Also located on the lens is an
aperture preview mechanism. This allows you get see your depth of field before
actually taking a picture. You can lock this switch in "AUTO" mode so
that you will always be previewing your aperture. To do this, slide the switch
to "AUTO" and push down. To release it back to manual, push down on the other side of
the switch.

To focus, simply look through the viewfinder and adjust the
focus ring until the split viewfinder is even and the image looks crisp.

To release the shutter and take a picture, first crank the film advance level with your right thumb and smoothly and firmly depress the silver button next to the crank.

A cable release can be attached by screwing one into the shutter release button just as with Media Loan's 35mm Pentax K-1000 cameras.

The Pentax 6x7 can not take multiple exposure pictures.

==== Unloading Film ====

Once all of the frames are exposed you’ll want to unload
your film. When you’re ready to do this, wind the crank a few more times until
there is no more tension in the crank lever. By now the protective light-safe
paper should be covering the film and totally wrapped around the spool.
Unfasten the silver dials just like when loading film. Keeping a firm grip on the film so that it doesn't unroll,
lick or peel off the sticky tape on the roll and make sure it is securely attached to the
spool. Close everything back up.

==== Using a Flash ====
To use a flash with the Pentax 6x7, first attach the flash to the hot shoe mount on the handle. This camera has options for both X-type sync cables and FP-type sync cables. Use only the X-type as plugging an X cable into an FP housing can cause damage. Again, this camera can only use a flash when the shutter speed is set to 1/30th of a second or slower.
[[File:Bronica-top2.jpg|thumb|356x356px|Bronica SQ-B]]

=== Bronica ETRS, ETRSI, & SQ-B ===

There are three different models of the Bronica available at Media Loan: SB-Q, ETRS, and ETRSi. They are very similar in operation except for a few minor things like button placement and the viewfinders and accessories that come with each camera. The aspect ratio that these cameras shoot at is also different.
* The ETRS and ETRSi have prism viewfinders and are in a 6x6 (square) format.

* The SB-Q (aka 645) has a wast-level view finder and is in a 6x4.5 (rectangle) format.

The Bronica begins to feel like a departure from the 35mm cameras. It is essentially a cube with a lens attached. One notices a very different feel when shooting with a Bronica than with the Pentax 6x7. Since a lot of the controls are not in conventional places, it may take some time to get acquainted with this camera. All of the Bronica cameras can only use 120 film.
[[File:Cartridge doors.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Film cartridge doors]]
[[File:Bronica cartridge release.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Cartridge release latches]]
[[File:Bronica cartridge.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|The film cartridge ]]

==== Loading Film ====
To load film, open the back of the camera by pinching the buttons that lie just under the viewfinder that are indicated by arrows. It is spring loaded and the film cartridge may fall out so be prepared. The outer shell will fold down and then the film cartridge can be removed.
In the Bronica, film moves from top to bottom. This means your new roll of film will be on top and your empty spool on bottom Now that you're holding the film cartridge, notice there are two door flaps on the left side. Using your finger, push them open from the inside out. You will now be able to remove or insert film spools into each slot. Make sure the empty spool is on bottom and the fresh film is on top. Now you will take the film leader and run it over the pressure plate on the opposite side, bringing it down and around to the empty take up spool. A proper loading will have the black side of the paper leader facing outwards over the pressure plate. [[File:Bronica-Loading.gif|150x150px|thumb|Film direction]]Now, using the manual film advance wheel located on the right side of the cartridge, advance the film until the arrow on the leader aligns with the red arrow on the inside left of the cartridge.

To close the camera, the cartridge must first be aligned properly on the camera body, not inserted into the door. Once the cartridge is in place, close the door. It can be a little tricky to get it perfectly aligned. Do not force anything. If the door won't shut, take the cartridge out and try again.

Now wind the film advance lever until it stops moving and the frame counter is at 0.
[[File:Bronica viewfinder.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Waist-level viewfinder]]

==== Waist-level Viewfinder ====
[[File:Bronica magnifier.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Magnifier latch]]
[[File:Bronica magnifier2.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Magnifier]]Many of Media Loan's Bronicas, like the Mamiyas, feature waist-level viewfinders. This is different than a prism viewfinder in which the viewfinder is held up to the eye. Alternatively, waist-level viewfinders are held at the waist and have a "screen" and magnifier for focusing. Most waist-level viewfinders open by simply folding up the top of the camera. Sometimes there is a small latch. There are metal walls that will snap into place once it is open.
To open the magnifier for critical focusing, there is another release latch on the inside of the focusing hood. To close the magnifier, simply move it back into place with your finger, trying not to touch the actual glass.

Some of the Bronicas come with prism viewfinders, which you can ask for. Some of the prism viewfinders are electronic and feature an internal light meter.
==== Exposing, Focusing, & Taking a Picture ====
[[File:Bronica shutter speed.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Shutter speed dial]]
[[File:Bronica shutter.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Shutter release button]]
To set the '''shutter speed''', there is a dial on the right side of the camera body. The Bronica has a range of shutter speeds from 1/500th of a second to 8 seconds.

The '''aperture''' is set by twisting the aperture ring on the lens and has a range of f/2.4 to f/22.

If you are using a Bronica with a built in light meter, set the '''ISO''' to match your film speed by twisting the dial on the left of the viewfinder. If it does not have an internal light meter, you do not have to worry about setting your ISO.

To focus, open the magnifier in the focusing hood as described in the previous section. The Bronica's lens functions conveniently like most other camera lenses. Twist the focus ring until your subject comes into focus.

Before '''taking a picture''', the film must be advanced. Do this by winding the crank on the right side of the camera. When there is no film loaded in the camera, the crank will spin indefinitely. Once film has been loaded, the crank will stop itself in the correct position.

The shutter release button is a black button located on the front of the camera in the bottom left corner. You can attach a cable release by screwing one into the cable release hole on the left side of the camera.

It is preferable to take a picture in the steps in order to ensure a focused picture:
# Advance the film
# Set your shutter speed and aperture according to your light meter
# Focus on your subject
# Depress the shutter release button
[[File:Bronca flash plug.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Flash plug]]

==== Using a Flash ====
A flash can be connected using an X-type sync cable. The port for this flash is located on the front side of the camera in the top right corner. When plugging and unplugging a sync cable, always pull gently and straight out. Never use a twisting motion to get it out.

The Bronica can conveniently sync with flash at any shutter speed, even at its fastest of 1/500th of a second.
[[File:Bronica handles.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Mirror lock-up & multiple exposure knobs]]

==== Multiple Exposure ====
The Bronica cameras can take multiple exposures, exposing a single frame an unlimited number of times.

To do this, first wind the crank to advance the film. There is a small lever next to the crank that needs to be rotated clockwise. A red warning indicator will appear in the viewfinder letting you know that the multiple exposure mode is engaged, however it is always wise to double check that this lever is in the left or counter-clockwise position (single exposure mode) prior to shooting. When the multiple exposure mode is set, the shutter can be cocked with the film advance crank an infinite number of times without actually advancing the film.

==== Mirror Lockup ====
The function of a camera's mirror lockup (also abbreviated MLU) is to reduce the potential for motion blur due to the movement of the mirror inside the camera. This movement will potentially effect photographs only when shooting at shutter speeds of 1/60th of a second or slower. Since the mirror that allows viewing and composing through the viewfinder before actually taking a picture is stuck in its upright position, you will no longer be able to use the viewfinder once the MLU function is engaged.

To engage this function on the Bronica, first advance the film with the crank. There is a lever located to the right of the multiple exposure lever. Move this lever counter-clockwise. You will know it is engaged when you can not see anything through the viewfinder.

There are three settings for the mirror lockup function. "N" for normal in which the mirror will not lock up, and "S" for single frame and "C" for continuous in which the mirror will be locked up.

If you are on your last exposure of the roll and the mirror lock up function is still engaged, the shutter will continue to release every 360 degree turn and will not advance the film as would usually happen after the last exposure.

[[File:Mamiya-top.jpg|thumb|Mamiya C330]]

=== Mamiya C330 & C220 ===
The Mamiya cameras at Media Loan are perhaps the least intuitive to use of the medium format cameras. Learning to use one properly, however, is well worth it for both high quality images and mad style points. Like large format cameras, the Mamiya uses bellows to focus. Instead of adjusting the elements of glass within the lens, like with lenses that can focus internally, bellows physically move the lens farther or closer to the plane of film in order to focus.

The Mamiya shoots square frames that are 2 1/4 inch long in each direction.
[[File:Mamiya pressure plate.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Pressure plate film type]]

==== Before Loading Film ====
[[File:Mamiya-Unlocking.gif|thumb|150x150px|Cover dial rotation]]
Like the Pentax 6x7, the Mamiya can shoot with either 120 or 220 film and the camera needs to be adjusted accordingly before loading film. First, adjust the orientation of the pressure plate on the inside of the camera to coincide with the kind of film you are using. To open the back of the camera rotate the silver locking disk at the top of the back side of the camera so that the red dot is pointing up and you can slide the disk in the direction of the arrow.
[[File:Mamiya film type.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Film type indicator]]
[[File:Mamiya dial.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Parallax dial]]
Because the Mamiya uses a twin lens system rather than being an SLR, you will also need to adjust the parallax adjustment to match whatever the focal length of the lens is you are using. This can be set by the outer ring on the main dial on the left side of the camera. Depending on the adjustment made and the distance of the camera from the subject, a bar will appear on the left side of the viewfinder. ''This is important to notice as it indicates the top of the frame and everything above the bar will be cut off on the actual film, even though it is present in the viewfinder.''

Additionally, because the farther the bellows take the lens away from the film, light is increasingly lost along the way from when it enters the lens to when it reaches the film. Inside the viewfinder, the number that the moving bar lands at indicates in number of stops how much to increase the exposure by in order to compensate for the reduced light.

==== Loading Film ====
With the neck strap around your neck, open the back of the camera as indicated in the previous section. There are two spool release knobs on the left side of the camera. These pull out and will allow you to remove the film spools. Twist these knobs while pulling to lock them in their disengaged position. On the Mamiya, the film moves from bottom to top, opposite of the Bronica cameras move film. Accordingly, place the empty take up spool in the top compartment. Lock it in place. Then place your fresh roll of film in the bottom compartment and lock it in place.
[[File:Mamiya film loading.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Loading film]]
Pull out the film leader from the fresh spool and bring it up to the empty spool and thread it into that spool. Once threaded, turn the film advance crank on the right side of the camera clockwise to advance the film leader until the printed arrow on the leader matches up with the start mark on the inside of the camera (located a little lower than half way down on the right side.)

Close the back of the camera by pushing firmly on either side of the silver locking dial. Once closed, turn the locking dial counter-clockwise to lock the back cover in place. Continue to turn the film advance crank clockwise until it won't turn anymore. Your shutter is now cocked and ready to take a picture.

==== Exposing, Focusing, & Taking a Picture ====
[[File:Mamiya exposure.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Shutter speed & aperture]]
[[File:Mamiya aperture knob.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Aperture adjustment knob]]
The Mamiya is slightly different than other cameras in that both the aperture and shutter speed are set on the bottom lens. There are individual rings for each of these settings. The '''aperture''' can be set by moving the little black handle on the left side of the lens and the '''shutter speed''' can be set by twisting the knob with fractions of a second on it. Do not change the shutter speed after the shutter has been cocked.

The aperture ranges from f/2.8 to f/22 and the shutter speed ranges from 1/500th of a second to 1 seconds.

Since the Mamiya does not have an internal light meter there is no need for an '''ISO''' setting. The camera does however allow you to set the ISO of the film you are using on the dial configuration on the right side of the camera. This does not effect the performance of the camera at all but simply serves as a reminder for the kind of film you are shooting. Be sure to also check out a light meter from Media Loan when checking out a medium format camera.

Like the Bronica, most of Media Loan's Mamiyas feature waist-level viewfinders although some of them come with prism viewfinders. You can request either when checking one out. Also like the Bronica, the Mamiya has a magnifier seated within the focusing hood that can be expanded for critical focusing. To '''focus''' the camera, the Mamiya uses bellows that bring the lens closer or farther from the film plane. The lens is a fixed piece of glass and does not focus internally. To adjust the bellows and focus your image, twist either of the large black knobs on the bottom front of the camera.
[[File:Mamiya shutters.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Two shutter releases]]
After your film has been advanced by turning the crank clockwise, the camera is ready to '''take a picture'''. There are two ways to release the shutter. The first is a silver button on the front of the camera in the bottom left corner. A cable release can also be screwed in here. The second way is with the slide mechanism on the right side of the camera. There is a small black lever for your thumb. Slide this downward to release the shutter. As the Mamiyas are quite old, not all of the cameras are able to be fired with either method. Some can only use one or the other and this will be indicated by a note on the camera. Advance the film after each exposure.
[[File:Mamiya exposure type.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Exposure type dial]]
[[File:Mamiya lock.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Shutter release lock]]
There is a shutter lock on the slide mechanism that can be pushed to the "L" position. This prevents both shutter releases from being able to move and is thus useful to use when transporting the camera or arranging your shot.

To take take a picture using '''multiple exposures''', there is a dial next to the film advance crank that has the option of either "SINGLE" or "MULTI". Turn this to "MULTI" to be able to exposure a frame multiple times without needing to advance the film.

==== Unloading Film ====
After twelve frames are exposed, continue to turn the winding crank until there is no more tension on the advance crank. At this point, the protective paper of the film should be rolled up around the take up spool. When unloading the film, keep the spool rolled and hold the film tightly to prevent light exposure. Lick or peel the tab on the film and wrap it firmly around the exposed film. Close the camera back.
[[File:Mamiya flash plug.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Flash plug]]

==== Using a Flash ====
To synchronize a flash with the Mamiya, switch the Synchro Selector MX Switch to “X”. You will need to check out a Vivitar flash and a flash sync cable. Because the Vivitar flash was not designed to be used with the Mamiya, it will not properly mount on the hot shoe. Therefore, you’ll need to hold it while taking your picture. The Seagull and the Kalimar should not require a sync cable as they can mount onto the hot shoe.
'''Caution: Avoid moving the self-timer while the flash sync is set at “M”. It may cause damage to the self-timer.'''

[[category:Media Loan]]

Medium Format Cameras Gear Guide

2020-04-20T23:26:48Z

Highberh: /* Loading Film */

[[File:MediumFormat-top-large.jpg|centre|800x800px]]
'''A proficiency test is required to check out these cameras.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[Medium Format Cameras Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. (You must already be proficient in the 35mm manual camera before obtaining this proficiency.) Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.

=== Introduction to Medium Format ===

==== Medium Format vs. 35mm ====
This is an instructional guide to the medium format film
cameras available at Media Loan. It will cover a brief introduction to medium
format photography and then go through the operating steps for each of our
models.

When talking about film photography, there are three main
types of film, or formats: 35mm, medium format, and large format. With medium
and large format, the frame size on the film is much larger than 35mm film and yields significantly more detail and the ability to be printed at very large sizes. In essence, it
is a question of quality. The size and shape of the actual frame is variable
depending on the camera (whether your picture is a square, rectangle, skinny
rectangle, etc.) The size of the frame is often indicated in the name of the
camera, like the Pentax 6x7 whose frame dimensions are 6cm by 7cm. With 35mm
photography the size of the frame is always 35mm across regardless of the
camera used.

Medium format film comes wrapped around a plastic spool with
light-safe black paper layered around the film itself. There is no metal
canister like with 35mm film. Additionally, when there are no more exposures
left on the roll, medium format film is not rewound back on to the spool but is
transferred to another take-up spool on the other side of the camera.

There are two types of medium format film, 120 and 220. The
film is exactly the same except that 220 film contains twice the amount of
exposures as 120. However, most medium format cameras can shoot only one or the
other. The Pentax 6x7 and the Mamiya cameras have the ability to shoot both but the camera needs to be adjusted
to the right setting prior to loading the film. 120 film is the most common and
allows for 10-12 exposures depending on the camera’s aspect ratio. Keep in mind that the Photo Store and many other stores do not process 220 film.

==== Tools Required ====
In order to shoot on a medium format camera, you will need some
accessories. Some are optional while others are not. The essentials include an
'''empty film spool''' that your exposed film will be transferred on to (there should
already be one in the camera from the previous user. If there isn’t, ask a Media
Loan staff member to give you one.) You will also need a '''light meter''' as most of our medium
format cameras do not have built in meters.

Refer
to [http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Light_Meters_Quick_Guide Media Loan’s operating guide for light meters] to find out how to use what
might be called your medium format camera’s best friend.

Other accessories include tripods, cable releases, and
flashes. If using a flash, remember to also pick up a flash sync cable.

==== Precautions ====
These cameras are old, expensive, and used by many students. Please give them the respect they deserve. Before handling a camera, be
aware of what can potentially damage it and what improper usage looks like.

Some general rules for these cameras are:

·
Do not expose them to water or moisture. They
are not weather proof.

·
Do not leave in excessive heat, like in a car.

·
Do not leave in excessive cold, like the
freezer.

·
Do not try to force any mechanism on the camera.
You’re probably doing it wrong if it feels like a lot of force.

·
Do not remove the prism viewfinder or the lens. This will
get dust inside the camera.

·
'''NEVER LEAVE ANYTHING FROM MEDIA LOAN IN YOUR'''
'''CAR'''!

·
As with all Media Loan equipment, you are 100% financially
responsibly for any damage and repairs done to the camera.
[[File:Pentax-top.jpg|thumb|Pentax 6x7]][[File:Pentax film type.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Film type dial]]
=== Pentax 6x7 ===
The Pentax 6x7 is perhaps the easiest to use of
all our medium format cameras, as it most resembles the shape and operation
of a 35mm camera. It is a single lens reflex (SLR) camera meaning that what you see
through the viewfinder is the actual image that will appear on the film. This
camera can shoot both 120 and 220 film. You will not be able to release the
shutter until there is film loaded
==== Before Loading Film ====
[[File:IMG 3315.JPG|thumb|150x150px|left|Handle screw]]
Firstly, be sure that the wooden handle grip is screwed on tight. All of the camera’s weight rests on this handle.

Then you need to set
the film type you are working with, either 120 or 220. There are two places
that need to be adjusted for this. If you’re holding the camera like you would
to shoot, the first is on the right side of the camera. [[File:Pentax Pressure Plate.jpg|thumb|150x150px|left|Pressure plate film type]]There is a dial that
[[File:Pentax locks.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Spool dial locks]]
[[File:Pentax wrong.jpg|150x150px|thumb|Incorrect film direction]]
lets your choose between the two. You will need a quarter or a strong finger
nail to move it. The second adjustment is found on the inside of the camera.
Open the camera by pulling down on the silver release on the bottom left side
of the camera. Notice the black speckled pressure plate on the door. Following
the direction of the arrows there, gently push the pressure plate down and to
the side that corresponds to your film type.

==== Loading Film ====
[[File:Pentax back cover.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Cover release latch]]
It is best to do this while sitting as these cameras do not come with neck straps.
# First, open the back of the camera if it is not already open from the previous step. On the bottom of the camera are two silver dials that hold the film spools in place.
# Fold out their handles and turn these counter-clockwise and pull them up until the stay put. Make sure your empty take-up spool is on the right side. If there is no spool in the camera, ask a Media Loan or Photoland staff to give you one. (It is common medium format etiquette to leave your old spool in the camera
when you’re done using it as it is not needed for developing.) [[File:Pentax correct.jpg|150x150px|thumb|Correct film direction]]Like with 35mm film, the Pentax 6x7 needs to be loaded
in a “up and over” style and not “down and under.”

3. After you’ve aligned the cross in the top of the film spool with the notch in the camera, close the silver dials on the bottom of the
camera.

4. Pull the film across to the right side of the camera and thread the

film into the take-up spool just as you would with 35mm film.

5. Use the crank lever to advance the film

and stop when the arrows on the film paper line up with the arrow on the inside
of the camera.

6. Close the back of the camera and advance the film until “0” is line up with the red dot in the frame counter.

==== Exposing, Focusing, & Taking a Picture ====
The '''shutter speed''' is set by the dial on the top left side
of the camera. The current setting is indicated by whatever number is next to the
small red LED just to the right of the dial. Since there is no built in light
meter on this camera, there is no need to set the '''ISO''' for whatever film you are
using.

If using a flash, you must use a shutter speed on this
camera of 1/30th of slower.

If you wish to do a timed exposure longer than one second
and you don’t want to keep you finger on the shutter as the “Bulb”
setting would allow, rotate the shutter speed dial to anywhere between the red “X” and “1000.”
Now, releasing the shutter will keep it open until you rotate the shutter speed
dial back to “X”.

The '''aperture''' ring is located on the lens. This is the ring
closest to the body of the camera and ranges from f/2.4 to f/22. The aperture
ring will be your primary tool for exposing. Also located on the lens is an
aperture preview mechanism. This allows you get see your depth of field before
actually taking a picture. You can lock this switch in "AUTO" mode so
that you will always be previewing your aperture. To do this, slide the switch
to "AUTO" and push down. To release it back to manual, push down on the other side of
the switch.

To focus, simply look through the viewfinder and adjust the
focus ring until the split viewfinder is even and the image looks crisp.

To release the shutter and take a picture, first crank the film advance level with your right thumb and smoothly and firmly depress the silver button next to the crank.

A cable release can be attached by screwing one into the shutter release button just as with Media Loan's 35mm Pentax K-1000 cameras.

The Pentax 6x7 can not take multiple exposure pictures.

==== Unloading Film ====

Once all of the frames are exposed you’ll want to unload
your film. When you’re ready to do this, wind the crank a few more times until
there is no more tension in the crank lever. By now the protective light-safe
paper should be covering the film and totally wrapped around the spool.
Unfasten the silver dials just like when loading film. Keeping a firm grip on the film so that it doesn't unroll,
lick or peel off the sticky tape on the roll and make sure it is securely attached to the
spool. Close everything back up.

==== Using a Flash ====
To use a flash with the Pentax 6x7, first attach the flash to the hot shoe mount on the handle. This camera has options for both X-type sync cables and FP-type sync cables. Use only the X-type as plugging an X cable into an FP housing can cause damage. Again, this camera can only use a flash when the shutter speed is set to 1/30th of a second or slower.
[[File:Bronica-top2.jpg|thumb|356x356px|Bronica SQ-B]]

=== Bronica ETRS, ETRSI, & SQ-B ===

There are three different models of the Bronica available at Media Loan: SB-Q, ETRS, and ETRSi. They are very similar in operation except for a few minor things like button placement and the viewfinders and accessories that come with each camera. The aspect ratio that these cameras shoot at is also different.
* The ETRS and ETRSi have prism viewfinders and are in a 6x6 (square) format.

* The SB-Q (aka 645) has a wast-level view finder and is in a 6x4.5 (rectangle) format.

The Bronica begins to feel like a departure from the 35mm cameras. It is essentially a cube with a lens attached. One notices a very different feel when shooting with a Bronica than with the Pentax 6x7. Since a lot of the controls are not in conventional places, it may take some time to get acquainted with this camera. All of the Bronica cameras can only use 120 film.
[[File:Cartridge doors.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Film cartridge doors]]
[[File:Bronica cartridge release.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Cartridge release latches]]
[[File:Bronica cartridge.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|The film cartridge ]]

==== Loading Film ====
To load film, open the back of the camera by pinching the buttons that lie just under the viewfinder that are indicated by arrows. It is spring loaded and the film cartridge may fall out so be prepared. The outer shell will fold down and then the film cartridge can be removed.
In the Bronica, film moves from top to bottom. This means your new roll of film will be on top and your empty spool on bottom Now that you're holding the film cartridge, notice there are two door flaps on the left side. Using your finger, push them open from the inside out. You will now be able to remove or insert film spools into each slot. Make sure the empty spool is on bottom and the fresh film is on top. Now you will take the film leader and run it over the pressure plate on the opposite side, bringing it down and around to the empty take up spool. A proper loading will have the black side of the paper leader facing outwards over the pressure plate. [[File:Bronica-Loading.gif|150x150px|thumb|Film direction]]Now, using the manual film advance wheel located on the right side of the cartridge, advance the film until the arrow on the leader aligns with the red arrow on the inside left of the cartridge.

To close the camera, the cartridge must first be aligned properly on the camera body, not inserted into the door. Once the cartridge is in place, close the door. It can be a little tricky to get it perfectly aligned. Do not force anything. If the door won't shut, take the cartridge out and try again.

Now wind the film advance lever until it stops moving and the frame counter is at 0.
[[File:Bronica viewfinder.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Waist-level viewfinder]]

==== Waist-level Viewfinder ====
[[File:Bronica magnifier.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Magnifier latch]]
[[File:Bronica magnifier2.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Magnifier]]Many of Media Loan's Bronicas, like the Mamiyas, feature waist-level viewfinders. This is different than a prism viewfinder in which the viewfinder is held up to the eye. Alternatively, waist-level viewfinders are held at the waist and have a "screen" and magnifier for focusing. Most waist-level viewfinders open by simply folding up the top of the camera. Sometimes there is a small latch. There are metal walls that will snap into place once it is open.
To open the magnifier for critical focusing, there is another release latch on the inside of the focusing hood. To close the magnifier, simply move it back into place with your finger, trying not to touch the actual glass.

Some of the Bronicas come with prism viewfinders, which you can ask for. Some of the prism viewfinders are electronic and feature an internal light meter.
==== Exposing, Focusing, & Taking a Picture ====
[[File:Bronica shutter speed.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Shutter speed dial]]
[[File:Bronica shutter.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Shutter release button]]
To set the '''shutter speed''', there is a dial on the right side of the camera body. The Bronica has a range of shutter speeds from 1/500th of a second to 8 seconds.

The '''aperture''' is set by twisting the aperture ring on the lens and has a range of f/2.4 to f/22.

If you are using a Bronica with a built in light meter, set the '''ISO''' to match your film speed by twisting the dial on the left of the viewfinder. If it does not have an internal light meter, you do not have to worry about setting your ISO.

To focus, open the magnifier in the focusing hood as described in the previous section. The Bronica's lens functions conveniently like most other camera lenses. Twist the focus ring until your subject comes into focus.

Before '''taking a picture''', the film must be advanced. Do this by winding the crank on the right side of the camera. When there is no film loaded in the camera, the crank will spin indefinitely. Once film has been loaded, the crank will stop itself in the correct position.

The shutter release button is a black button located on the front of the camera in the bottom left corner. You can attach a cable release by screwing one into the cable release hole on the left side of the camera.

It is preferable to take a picture in the steps in order to ensure a focused picture:
# Advance the film
# Set your shutter speed and aperture according to your light meter
# Focus on your subject
# Depress the shutter release button
[[File:Bronca flash plug.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Flash plug]]

==== Using a Flash ====
A flash can be connected using an X-type sync cable. The port for this flash is located on the front side of the camera in the top right corner. When plugging and unplugging a sync cable, always pull gently and straight out. Never use a twisting motion to get it out.

The Bronica can conveniently sync with flash at any shutter speed, even at its fastest of 1/500th of a second.
[[File:Bronica handles.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Mirror lock-up & multiple exposure knobs]]

==== Multiple Exposure ====
The Bronica cameras can take multiple exposures, exposing a single frame an unlimited number of times.

To do this, first wind the crank to advance the film. There is a small lever next to the crank that needs to be rotated clockwise. A red warning indicator will appear in the viewfinder letting you know that the multiple exposure mode is engaged, however it is always wise to double check that this lever is in the left or counter-clockwise position (single exposure mode) prior to shooting. When the multiple exposure mode is set, the shutter can be cocked with the film advance crank an infinite number of times without actually advancing the film.

==== Mirror Lockup ====
The function of a camera's mirror lockup (also abbreviated MLU) is to reduce the potential for motion blur due to the movement of the mirror inside the camera. This movement will potentially effect photographs only when shooting at shutter speeds of 1/60th of a second or slower. Since the mirror that allows viewing and composing through the viewfinder before actually taking a picture is stuck in its upright position, you will no longer be able to use the viewfinder once the MLU function is engaged.

To engage this function on the Bronica, first advance the film with the crank. There is a lever located to the right of the multiple exposure lever. Move this lever counter-clockwise. You will know it is engaged when you can not see anything through the viewfinder.

There are three settings for the mirror lockup function. "N" for normal in which the mirror will not lock up, and "S" for single frame and "C" for continuous in which the mirror will be locked up.

If you are on your last exposure of the roll and the mirror lock up function is still engaged, the shutter will continue to release every 360 degree turn and will not advance the film as would usually happen after the last exposure.

[[File:Mamiya-top.jpg|thumb|Mamiya C330]]

=== Mamiya C330 & C220 ===
The Mamiya cameras at Media Loan are perhaps the least intuitive to use of the medium format cameras. Learning to use one properly, however, is well worth it for both high quality images and mad style points. Like large format cameras, the Mamiya uses bellows to focus. Instead of adjusting the elements of glass within the lens, like with lenses that can focus internally, bellows physically move the lens farther or closer to the plane of film in order to focus.

The Mamiya shoots square frames that are 2 1/4 inch long in each direction.
[[File:Mamiya pressure plate.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Pressure plate film type]]

==== Before Loading Film ====
[[File:Mamiya-Unlocking.gif|thumb|150x150px|Cover dial rotation]]
Like the Pentax 6x7, the Mamiya can shoot with either 120 or 220 film and the camera needs to be adjusted accordingly before loading film. First, adjust the orientation of the pressure plate on the inside of the camera to coincide with the kind of film you are using. To open the back of the camera rotate the silver locking disk at the top of the back side of the camera so that the red dot is pointing up and you can slide the disk in the direction of the arrow.
[[File:Mamiya film type.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Film type indicator]]
[[File:Mamiya dial.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Parallax dial]]
Because the Mamiya uses a twin lens system rather than being an SLR, you will also need to adjust the parallax adjustment to match whatever the focal length of the lens is you are using. This can be set by the outer ring on the main dial on the left side of the camera. Depending on the adjustment made and the distance of the camera from the subject, a bar will appear on the left side of the viewfinder. ''This is important to notice as it indicates the top of the frame and everything above the bar will be cut off on the actual film, even though it is present in the viewfinder.''

Additionally, because the farther the bellows take the lens away from the film, light is increasingly lost along the way from when it enters the lens to when it reaches the film. Inside the viewfinder, the number that the moving bar lands at indicates in number of stops how much to increase the exposure by in order to compensate for the reduced light.

==== Loading Film ====
With the neck strap around your neck, open the back of the camera as indicated in the previous section. There are two spool release knobs on the left side of the camera. These pull out and will allow you to remove the film spools. Twist these knobs while pulling to lock them in their disengaged position. On the Mamiya, the film moves from bottom to top, opposite of the Bronica cameras move film. Accordingly, place the empty take up spool in the top compartment. Lock it in place. Then place your fresh roll of film in the bottom compartment and lock it in place.
[[File:Mamiya film loading.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Loading film]]
Pull out the film leader from the fresh spool and bring it up to the empty spool and thread it into that spool. Once threaded, turn the film advance crank on the right side of the camera clockwise to advance the film leader until the printed arrow on the leader matches up with the start mark on the inside of the camera (located a little lower than half way down on the right side.)

Close the back of the camera by pushing firmly on either side of the silver locking dial. Once closed, turn the locking dial counter-clockwise to lock the back cover in place. Continue to turn the film advance crank clockwise until it won't turn anymore. Your shutter is now cocked and ready to take a picture.

==== Exposing, Focusing, & Taking a Picture ====
[[File:Mamiya exposure.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Shutter speed & aperture]]
[[File:Mamiya aperture knob.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Aperture adjustment knob]]
The Mamiya is slightly different than other cameras in that both the aperture and shutter speed are set on the bottom lens. There are individual rings for each of these settings. The '''aperture''' can be set by moving the little black handle on the left side of the lens and the '''shutter speed''' can be set by twisting the knob with fractions of a second on it. Do not change the shutter speed after the shutter has been cocked.

The aperture ranges from f/2.8 to f/22 and the shutter speed ranges from 1/500th of a second to 1 seconds.

Since the Mamiya does not have an internal light meter there is no need for an '''ISO''' setting. The camera does however allow you to set the ISO of the film you are using on the dial configuration on the right side of the camera. This does not effect the performance of the camera at all but simply serves as a reminder for the kind of film you are shooting. Be sure to also check out a light meter from Media Loan when checking out a medium format camera.

Like the Bronica, most of Media Loan's Mamiyas feature waist-level viewfinders although some of them come with prism viewfinders. You can request either when checking one out. Also like the Bronica, the Mamiya has a magnifier seated within the focusing hood that can be expanded for critical focusing. To '''focus''' the camera, the Mamiya uses bellows that bring the lens closer or farther from the film plane. The lens is a fixed piece of glass and does not focus internally. To adjust the bellows and focus your image, twist either of the large black knobs on the bottom front of the camera.
[[File:Mamiya shutters.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Two shutter releases]]
After your film has been advanced by turning the crank clockwise, the camera is ready to '''take a picture'''. There are two ways to release the shutter. The first is a silver button on the front of the camera in the bottom left corner. A cable release can also be screwed in here. The second way is with the slide mechanism on the right side of the camera. There is a small black lever for your thumb. Slide this downward to release the shutter. As the Mamiyas are quite old, not all of the cameras are able to be fired with either method. Some can only use one or the other and this will be indicated by a note on the camera. Advance the film after each exposure.
[[File:Mamiya exposure type.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Exposure type dial]]
[[File:Mamiya lock.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Shutter release lock]]
There is a shutter lock on the slide mechanism that can be pushed to the "L" position. This prevents both shutter releases from being able to move and is thus useful to use when transporting the camera or arranging your shot.

To take take a picture using '''multiple exposures''', there is a dial next to the film advance crank that has the option of either "SINGLE" or "MULTI". Turn this to "MULTI" to be able to exposure a frame multiple times without needing to advance the film.

==== Unloading Film ====
After twelve frames are exposed, continue to turn the winding crank until there is no more tension on the advance crank. At this point, the protective paper of the film should be rolled up around the take up spool. When unloading the film, keep the spool rolled and hold the film tightly to prevent light exposure. Lick or peel the tab on the film and wrap it firmly around the exposed film. Close the camera back.
[[File:Mamiya flash plug.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Flash plug]]

==== Using a Flash ====
To synchronize a flash with the Mamiya, switch the Synchro Selector MX Switch to “X”. You will need to check out a Vivitar flash and a flash sync cable. Because the Vivitar flash was not designed to be used with the Mamiya, it will not properly mount on the hot shoe. Therefore, you’ll need to hold it while taking your picture. The Seagull and the Kalimar should not require a sync cable as they can mount onto the hot shoe.
'''Caution: Avoid moving the self-timer while the flash sync is set at “M”. It may cause damage to the self-timer.'''

[[category:Media Loan]]

Medium Format Cameras Gear Guide

2020-04-20T23:25:58Z

Highberh: /* Loading Film */

[[File:MediumFormat-top-large.jpg|centre|800x800px]]
'''A proficiency test is required to check out these cameras.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[Medium Format Cameras Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. (You must already be proficient in the 35mm manual camera before obtaining this proficiency.) Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.

=== Introduction to Medium Format ===

==== Medium Format vs. 35mm ====
This is an instructional guide to the medium format film
cameras available at Media Loan. It will cover a brief introduction to medium
format photography and then go through the operating steps for each of our
models.

When talking about film photography, there are three main
types of film, or formats: 35mm, medium format, and large format. With medium
and large format, the frame size on the film is much larger than 35mm film and yields significantly more detail and the ability to be printed at very large sizes. In essence, it
is a question of quality. The size and shape of the actual frame is variable
depending on the camera (whether your picture is a square, rectangle, skinny
rectangle, etc.) The size of the frame is often indicated in the name of the
camera, like the Pentax 6x7 whose frame dimensions are 6cm by 7cm. With 35mm
photography the size of the frame is always 35mm across regardless of the
camera used.

Medium format film comes wrapped around a plastic spool with
light-safe black paper layered around the film itself. There is no metal
canister like with 35mm film. Additionally, when there are no more exposures
left on the roll, medium format film is not rewound back on to the spool but is
transferred to another take-up spool on the other side of the camera.

There are two types of medium format film, 120 and 220. The
film is exactly the same except that 220 film contains twice the amount of
exposures as 120. However, most medium format cameras can shoot only one or the
other. The Pentax 6x7 and the Mamiya cameras have the ability to shoot both but the camera needs to be adjusted
to the right setting prior to loading the film. 120 film is the most common and
allows for 10-12 exposures depending on the camera’s aspect ratio. Keep in mind that the Photo Store and many other stores do not process 220 film.

==== Tools Required ====
In order to shoot on a medium format camera, you will need some
accessories. Some are optional while others are not. The essentials include an
'''empty film spool''' that your exposed film will be transferred on to (there should
already be one in the camera from the previous user. If there isn’t, ask a Media
Loan staff member to give you one.) You will also need a '''light meter''' as most of our medium
format cameras do not have built in meters.

Refer
to [http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Light_Meters_Quick_Guide Media Loan’s operating guide for light meters] to find out how to use what
might be called your medium format camera’s best friend.

Other accessories include tripods, cable releases, and
flashes. If using a flash, remember to also pick up a flash sync cable.

==== Precautions ====
These cameras are old, expensive, and used by many students. Please give them the respect they deserve. Before handling a camera, be
aware of what can potentially damage it and what improper usage looks like.

Some general rules for these cameras are:

·
Do not expose them to water or moisture. They
are not weather proof.

·
Do not leave in excessive heat, like in a car.

·
Do not leave in excessive cold, like the
freezer.

·
Do not try to force any mechanism on the camera.
You’re probably doing it wrong if it feels like a lot of force.

·
Do not remove the prism viewfinder or the lens. This will
get dust inside the camera.

·
'''NEVER LEAVE ANYTHING FROM MEDIA LOAN IN YOUR'''
'''CAR'''!

·
As with all Media Loan equipment, you are 100% financially
responsibly for any damage and repairs done to the camera.
[[File:Pentax-top.jpg|thumb|Pentax 6x7]][[File:Pentax film type.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Film type dial]]
=== Pentax 6x7 ===
The Pentax 6x7 is perhaps the easiest to use of
all our medium format cameras, as it most resembles the shape and operation
of a 35mm camera. It is a single lens reflex (SLR) camera meaning that what you see
through the viewfinder is the actual image that will appear on the film. This
camera can shoot both 120 and 220 film. You will not be able to release the
shutter until there is film loaded
==== Before Loading Film ====
[[File:IMG 3315.JPG|thumb|150x150px|left|Handle screw]]
Firstly, be sure that the wooden handle grip is screwed on tight. All of the camera’s weight rests on this handle.

Then you need to set
the film type you are working with, either 120 or 220. There are two places
that need to be adjusted for this. If you’re holding the camera like you would
to shoot, the first is on the right side of the camera. [[File:Pentax Pressure Plate.jpg|thumb|150x150px|left|Pressure plate film type]]There is a dial that
[[File:Pentax locks.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Spool dial locks]]
[[File:Pentax wrong.jpg|150x150px|thumb|Incorrect film direction]]
lets your choose between the two. You will need a quarter or a strong finger
nail to move it. The second adjustment is found on the inside of the camera.
Open the camera by pulling down on the silver release on the bottom left side
of the camera. Notice the black speckled pressure plate on the door. Following
the direction of the arrows there, gently push the pressure plate down and to
the side that corresponds to your film type.

==== Loading Film ====
[[File:Pentax back cover.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Cover release latch]]
It is best to do this while sitting as these cameras do not come with neck straps.
# First, open the back of the camera if it is not already open from the previous step. On the bottom of the camera are two silver dials that hold the film spools in place.
# Fold out their handles and turn these counter-clockwise and pull them up until the stay put. Make sure your empty take-up spool is on the right side. If there is no spool in the camera, ask a Media Loan or Photoland staff to give you one. (It is common medium format etiquette to leave your old spool in the camera
when you’re done using it as it is not needed for developing.) [[File:Pentax correct.jpg|150x150px|thumb|Correct film direction]]Like with 35mm film, the Pentax 6x7 needs to be loaded
in a “up and over” style and not “down and under.”
# After you’ve aligned the cross in the top of the film spool
with the notch in the camera, close the silver dials on the bottom of the
camera. Now p
# Pull the film across to the right side of the camera and thread the
film into the take-up spool just as you would with 35mm film.
# Use the crank lever to advance the film
and stop when the arrows on the film paper line up with the arrow on the inside
of the camera.

# Close the back of the camera and advance the
film until “0” is line up with the red dot in the frame counter.

==== Exposing, Focusing, & Taking a Picture ====
The '''shutter speed''' is set by the dial on the top left side
of the camera. The current setting is indicated by whatever number is next to the
small red LED just to the right of the dial. Since there is no built in light
meter on this camera, there is no need to set the '''ISO''' for whatever film you are
using.

If using a flash, you must use a shutter speed on this
camera of 1/30th of slower.

If you wish to do a timed exposure longer than one second
and you don’t want to keep you finger on the shutter as the “Bulb”
setting would allow, rotate the shutter speed dial to anywhere between the red “X” and “1000.”
Now, releasing the shutter will keep it open until you rotate the shutter speed
dial back to “X”.

The '''aperture''' ring is located on the lens. This is the ring
closest to the body of the camera and ranges from f/2.4 to f/22. The aperture
ring will be your primary tool for exposing. Also located on the lens is an
aperture preview mechanism. This allows you get see your depth of field before
actually taking a picture. You can lock this switch in "AUTO" mode so
that you will always be previewing your aperture. To do this, slide the switch
to "AUTO" and push down. To release it back to manual, push down on the other side of
the switch.

To focus, simply look through the viewfinder and adjust the
focus ring until the split viewfinder is even and the image looks crisp.

To release the shutter and take a picture, first crank the film advance level with your right thumb and smoothly and firmly depress the silver button next to the crank.

A cable release can be attached by screwing one into the shutter release button just as with Media Loan's 35mm Pentax K-1000 cameras.

The Pentax 6x7 can not take multiple exposure pictures.

==== Unloading Film ====

Once all of the frames are exposed you’ll want to unload
your film. When you’re ready to do this, wind the crank a few more times until
there is no more tension in the crank lever. By now the protective light-safe
paper should be covering the film and totally wrapped around the spool.
Unfasten the silver dials just like when loading film. Keeping a firm grip on the film so that it doesn't unroll,
lick or peel off the sticky tape on the roll and make sure it is securely attached to the
spool. Close everything back up.

==== Using a Flash ====
To use a flash with the Pentax 6x7, first attach the flash to the hot shoe mount on the handle. This camera has options for both X-type sync cables and FP-type sync cables. Use only the X-type as plugging an X cable into an FP housing can cause damage. Again, this camera can only use a flash when the shutter speed is set to 1/30th of a second or slower.
[[File:Bronica-top2.jpg|thumb|356x356px|Bronica SQ-B]]

=== Bronica ETRS, ETRSI, & SQ-B ===

There are three different models of the Bronica available at Media Loan: SB-Q, ETRS, and ETRSi. They are very similar in operation except for a few minor things like button placement and the viewfinders and accessories that come with each camera. The aspect ratio that these cameras shoot at is also different.
* The ETRS and ETRSi have prism viewfinders and are in a 6x6 (square) format.

* The SB-Q (aka 645) has a wast-level view finder and is in a 6x4.5 (rectangle) format.

The Bronica begins to feel like a departure from the 35mm cameras. It is essentially a cube with a lens attached. One notices a very different feel when shooting with a Bronica than with the Pentax 6x7. Since a lot of the controls are not in conventional places, it may take some time to get acquainted with this camera. All of the Bronica cameras can only use 120 film.
[[File:Cartridge doors.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Film cartridge doors]]
[[File:Bronica cartridge release.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Cartridge release latches]]
[[File:Bronica cartridge.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|The film cartridge ]]

==== Loading Film ====
To load film, open the back of the camera by pinching the buttons that lie just under the viewfinder that are indicated by arrows. It is spring loaded and the film cartridge may fall out so be prepared. The outer shell will fold down and then the film cartridge can be removed.
In the Bronica, film moves from top to bottom. This means your new roll of film will be on top and your empty spool on bottom Now that you're holding the film cartridge, notice there are two door flaps on the left side. Using your finger, push them open from the inside out. You will now be able to remove or insert film spools into each slot. Make sure the empty spool is on bottom and the fresh film is on top. Now you will take the film leader and run it over the pressure plate on the opposite side, bringing it down and around to the empty take up spool. A proper loading will have the black side of the paper leader facing outwards over the pressure plate. [[File:Bronica-Loading.gif|150x150px|thumb|Film direction]]Now, using the manual film advance wheel located on the right side of the cartridge, advance the film until the arrow on the leader aligns with the red arrow on the inside left of the cartridge.

To close the camera, the cartridge must first be aligned properly on the camera body, not inserted into the door. Once the cartridge is in place, close the door. It can be a little tricky to get it perfectly aligned. Do not force anything. If the door won't shut, take the cartridge out and try again.

Now wind the film advance lever until it stops moving and the frame counter is at 0.
[[File:Bronica viewfinder.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Waist-level viewfinder]]

==== Waist-level Viewfinder ====
[[File:Bronica magnifier.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Magnifier latch]]
[[File:Bronica magnifier2.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Magnifier]]Many of Media Loan's Bronicas, like the Mamiyas, feature waist-level viewfinders. This is different than a prism viewfinder in which the viewfinder is held up to the eye. Alternatively, waist-level viewfinders are held at the waist and have a "screen" and magnifier for focusing. Most waist-level viewfinders open by simply folding up the top of the camera. Sometimes there is a small latch. There are metal walls that will snap into place once it is open.
To open the magnifier for critical focusing, there is another release latch on the inside of the focusing hood. To close the magnifier, simply move it back into place with your finger, trying not to touch the actual glass.

Some of the Bronicas come with prism viewfinders, which you can ask for. Some of the prism viewfinders are electronic and feature an internal light meter.
==== Exposing, Focusing, & Taking a Picture ====
[[File:Bronica shutter speed.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Shutter speed dial]]
[[File:Bronica shutter.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Shutter release button]]
To set the '''shutter speed''', there is a dial on the right side of the camera body. The Bronica has a range of shutter speeds from 1/500th of a second to 8 seconds.

The '''aperture''' is set by twisting the aperture ring on the lens and has a range of f/2.4 to f/22.

If you are using a Bronica with a built in light meter, set the '''ISO''' to match your film speed by twisting the dial on the left of the viewfinder. If it does not have an internal light meter, you do not have to worry about setting your ISO.

To focus, open the magnifier in the focusing hood as described in the previous section. The Bronica's lens functions conveniently like most other camera lenses. Twist the focus ring until your subject comes into focus.

Before '''taking a picture''', the film must be advanced. Do this by winding the crank on the right side of the camera. When there is no film loaded in the camera, the crank will spin indefinitely. Once film has been loaded, the crank will stop itself in the correct position.

The shutter release button is a black button located on the front of the camera in the bottom left corner. You can attach a cable release by screwing one into the cable release hole on the left side of the camera.

It is preferable to take a picture in the steps in order to ensure a focused picture:
# Advance the film
# Set your shutter speed and aperture according to your light meter
# Focus on your subject
# Depress the shutter release button
[[File:Bronca flash plug.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Flash plug]]

==== Using a Flash ====
A flash can be connected using an X-type sync cable. The port for this flash is located on the front side of the camera in the top right corner. When plugging and unplugging a sync cable, always pull gently and straight out. Never use a twisting motion to get it out.

The Bronica can conveniently sync with flash at any shutter speed, even at its fastest of 1/500th of a second.
[[File:Bronica handles.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Mirror lock-up & multiple exposure knobs]]

==== Multiple Exposure ====
The Bronica cameras can take multiple exposures, exposing a single frame an unlimited number of times.

To do this, first wind the crank to advance the film. There is a small lever next to the crank that needs to be rotated clockwise. A red warning indicator will appear in the viewfinder letting you know that the multiple exposure mode is engaged, however it is always wise to double check that this lever is in the left or counter-clockwise position (single exposure mode) prior to shooting. When the multiple exposure mode is set, the shutter can be cocked with the film advance crank an infinite number of times without actually advancing the film.

==== Mirror Lockup ====
The function of a camera's mirror lockup (also abbreviated MLU) is to reduce the potential for motion blur due to the movement of the mirror inside the camera. This movement will potentially effect photographs only when shooting at shutter speeds of 1/60th of a second or slower. Since the mirror that allows viewing and composing through the viewfinder before actually taking a picture is stuck in its upright position, you will no longer be able to use the viewfinder once the MLU function is engaged.

To engage this function on the Bronica, first advance the film with the crank. There is a lever located to the right of the multiple exposure lever. Move this lever counter-clockwise. You will know it is engaged when you can not see anything through the viewfinder.

There are three settings for the mirror lockup function. "N" for normal in which the mirror will not lock up, and "S" for single frame and "C" for continuous in which the mirror will be locked up.

If you are on your last exposure of the roll and the mirror lock up function is still engaged, the shutter will continue to release every 360 degree turn and will not advance the film as would usually happen after the last exposure.

[[File:Mamiya-top.jpg|thumb|Mamiya C330]]

=== Mamiya C330 & C220 ===
The Mamiya cameras at Media Loan are perhaps the least intuitive to use of the medium format cameras. Learning to use one properly, however, is well worth it for both high quality images and mad style points. Like large format cameras, the Mamiya uses bellows to focus. Instead of adjusting the elements of glass within the lens, like with lenses that can focus internally, bellows physically move the lens farther or closer to the plane of film in order to focus.

The Mamiya shoots square frames that are 2 1/4 inch long in each direction.
[[File:Mamiya pressure plate.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Pressure plate film type]]

==== Before Loading Film ====
[[File:Mamiya-Unlocking.gif|thumb|150x150px|Cover dial rotation]]
Like the Pentax 6x7, the Mamiya can shoot with either 120 or 220 film and the camera needs to be adjusted accordingly before loading film. First, adjust the orientation of the pressure plate on the inside of the camera to coincide with the kind of film you are using. To open the back of the camera rotate the silver locking disk at the top of the back side of the camera so that the red dot is pointing up and you can slide the disk in the direction of the arrow.
[[File:Mamiya film type.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Film type indicator]]
[[File:Mamiya dial.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Parallax dial]]
Because the Mamiya uses a twin lens system rather than being an SLR, you will also need to adjust the parallax adjustment to match whatever the focal length of the lens is you are using. This can be set by the outer ring on the main dial on the left side of the camera. Depending on the adjustment made and the distance of the camera from the subject, a bar will appear on the left side of the viewfinder. ''This is important to notice as it indicates the top of the frame and everything above the bar will be cut off on the actual film, even though it is present in the viewfinder.''

Additionally, because the farther the bellows take the lens away from the film, light is increasingly lost along the way from when it enters the lens to when it reaches the film. Inside the viewfinder, the number that the moving bar lands at indicates in number of stops how much to increase the exposure by in order to compensate for the reduced light.

==== Loading Film ====
With the neck strap around your neck, open the back of the camera as indicated in the previous section. There are two spool release knobs on the left side of the camera. These pull out and will allow you to remove the film spools. Twist these knobs while pulling to lock them in their disengaged position. On the Mamiya, the film moves from bottom to top, opposite of the Bronica cameras move film. Accordingly, place the empty take up spool in the top compartment. Lock it in place. Then place your fresh roll of film in the bottom compartment and lock it in place.
[[File:Mamiya film loading.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Loading film]]
Pull out the film leader from the fresh spool and bring it up to the empty spool and thread it into that spool. Once threaded, turn the film advance crank on the right side of the camera clockwise to advance the film leader until the printed arrow on the leader matches up with the start mark on the inside of the camera (located a little lower than half way down on the right side.)

Close the back of the camera by pushing firmly on either side of the silver locking dial. Once closed, turn the locking dial counter-clockwise to lock the back cover in place. Continue to turn the film advance crank clockwise until it won't turn anymore. Your shutter is now cocked and ready to take a picture.

==== Exposing, Focusing, & Taking a Picture ====
[[File:Mamiya exposure.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Shutter speed & aperture]]
[[File:Mamiya aperture knob.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Aperture adjustment knob]]
The Mamiya is slightly different than other cameras in that both the aperture and shutter speed are set on the bottom lens. There are individual rings for each of these settings. The '''aperture''' can be set by moving the little black handle on the left side of the lens and the '''shutter speed''' can be set by twisting the knob with fractions of a second on it. Do not change the shutter speed after the shutter has been cocked.

The aperture ranges from f/2.8 to f/22 and the shutter speed ranges from 1/500th of a second to 1 seconds.

Since the Mamiya does not have an internal light meter there is no need for an '''ISO''' setting. The camera does however allow you to set the ISO of the film you are using on the dial configuration on the right side of the camera. This does not effect the performance of the camera at all but simply serves as a reminder for the kind of film you are shooting. Be sure to also check out a light meter from Media Loan when checking out a medium format camera.

Like the Bronica, most of Media Loan's Mamiyas feature waist-level viewfinders although some of them come with prism viewfinders. You can request either when checking one out. Also like the Bronica, the Mamiya has a magnifier seated within the focusing hood that can be expanded for critical focusing. To '''focus''' the camera, the Mamiya uses bellows that bring the lens closer or farther from the film plane. The lens is a fixed piece of glass and does not focus internally. To adjust the bellows and focus your image, twist either of the large black knobs on the bottom front of the camera.
[[File:Mamiya shutters.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Two shutter releases]]
After your film has been advanced by turning the crank clockwise, the camera is ready to '''take a picture'''. There are two ways to release the shutter. The first is a silver button on the front of the camera in the bottom left corner. A cable release can also be screwed in here. The second way is with the slide mechanism on the right side of the camera. There is a small black lever for your thumb. Slide this downward to release the shutter. As the Mamiyas are quite old, not all of the cameras are able to be fired with either method. Some can only use one or the other and this will be indicated by a note on the camera. Advance the film after each exposure.
[[File:Mamiya exposure type.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Exposure type dial]]
[[File:Mamiya lock.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Shutter release lock]]
There is a shutter lock on the slide mechanism that can be pushed to the "L" position. This prevents both shutter releases from being able to move and is thus useful to use when transporting the camera or arranging your shot.

To take take a picture using '''multiple exposures''', there is a dial next to the film advance crank that has the option of either "SINGLE" or "MULTI". Turn this to "MULTI" to be able to exposure a frame multiple times without needing to advance the film.

==== Unloading Film ====
After twelve frames are exposed, continue to turn the winding crank until there is no more tension on the advance crank. At this point, the protective paper of the film should be rolled up around the take up spool. When unloading the film, keep the spool rolled and hold the film tightly to prevent light exposure. Lick or peel the tab on the film and wrap it firmly around the exposed film. Close the camera back.
[[File:Mamiya flash plug.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Flash plug]]

==== Using a Flash ====
To synchronize a flash with the Mamiya, switch the Synchro Selector MX Switch to “X”. You will need to check out a Vivitar flash and a flash sync cable. Because the Vivitar flash was not designed to be used with the Mamiya, it will not properly mount on the hot shoe. Therefore, you’ll need to hold it while taking your picture. The Seagull and the Kalimar should not require a sync cable as they can mount onto the hot shoe.
'''Caution: Avoid moving the self-timer while the flash sync is set at “M”. It may cause damage to the self-timer.'''

[[category:Media Loan]]

Medium Format Cameras Gear Guide

2020-04-20T23:24:54Z

Highberh: /* Loading Film */

[[File:MediumFormat-top-large.jpg|centre|800x800px]]
'''A proficiency test is required to check out these cameras.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[Medium Format Cameras Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. (You must already be proficient in the 35mm manual camera before obtaining this proficiency.) Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.

=== Introduction to Medium Format ===

==== Medium Format vs. 35mm ====
This is an instructional guide to the medium format film
cameras available at Media Loan. It will cover a brief introduction to medium
format photography and then go through the operating steps for each of our
models.

When talking about film photography, there are three main
types of film, or formats: 35mm, medium format, and large format. With medium
and large format, the frame size on the film is much larger than 35mm film and yields significantly more detail and the ability to be printed at very large sizes. In essence, it
is a question of quality. The size and shape of the actual frame is variable
depending on the camera (whether your picture is a square, rectangle, skinny
rectangle, etc.) The size of the frame is often indicated in the name of the
camera, like the Pentax 6x7 whose frame dimensions are 6cm by 7cm. With 35mm
photography the size of the frame is always 35mm across regardless of the
camera used.

Medium format film comes wrapped around a plastic spool with
light-safe black paper layered around the film itself. There is no metal
canister like with 35mm film. Additionally, when there are no more exposures
left on the roll, medium format film is not rewound back on to the spool but is
transferred to another take-up spool on the other side of the camera.

There are two types of medium format film, 120 and 220. The
film is exactly the same except that 220 film contains twice the amount of
exposures as 120. However, most medium format cameras can shoot only one or the
other. The Pentax 6x7 and the Mamiya cameras have the ability to shoot both but the camera needs to be adjusted
to the right setting prior to loading the film. 120 film is the most common and
allows for 10-12 exposures depending on the camera’s aspect ratio. Keep in mind that the Photo Store and many other stores do not process 220 film.

==== Tools Required ====
In order to shoot on a medium format camera, you will need some
accessories. Some are optional while others are not. The essentials include an
'''empty film spool''' that your exposed film will be transferred on to (there should
already be one in the camera from the previous user. If there isn’t, ask a Media
Loan staff member to give you one.) You will also need a '''light meter''' as most of our medium
format cameras do not have built in meters.

Refer
to [http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Light_Meters_Quick_Guide Media Loan’s operating guide for light meters] to find out how to use what
might be called your medium format camera’s best friend.

Other accessories include tripods, cable releases, and
flashes. If using a flash, remember to also pick up a flash sync cable.

==== Precautions ====
These cameras are old, expensive, and used by many students. Please give them the respect they deserve. Before handling a camera, be
aware of what can potentially damage it and what improper usage looks like.

Some general rules for these cameras are:

·
Do not expose them to water or moisture. They
are not weather proof.

·
Do not leave in excessive heat, like in a car.

·
Do not leave in excessive cold, like the
freezer.

·
Do not try to force any mechanism on the camera.
You’re probably doing it wrong if it feels like a lot of force.

·
Do not remove the prism viewfinder or the lens. This will
get dust inside the camera.

·
'''NEVER LEAVE ANYTHING FROM MEDIA LOAN IN YOUR'''
'''CAR'''!

·
As with all Media Loan equipment, you are 100% financially
responsibly for any damage and repairs done to the camera.
[[File:Pentax-top.jpg|thumb|Pentax 6x7]][[File:Pentax film type.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Film type dial]]
=== Pentax 6x7 ===
The Pentax 6x7 is perhaps the easiest to use of
all our medium format cameras, as it most resembles the shape and operation
of a 35mm camera. It is a single lens reflex (SLR) camera meaning that what you see
through the viewfinder is the actual image that will appear on the film. This
camera can shoot both 120 and 220 film. You will not be able to release the
shutter until there is film loaded
==== Before Loading Film ====
[[File:IMG 3315.JPG|thumb|150x150px|left|Handle screw]]
Firstly, be sure that the wooden handle grip is screwed on tight. All of the camera’s weight rests on this handle.

Then you need to set
the film type you are working with, either 120 or 220. There are two places
that need to be adjusted for this. If you’re holding the camera like you would
to shoot, the first is on the right side of the camera. [[File:Pentax Pressure Plate.jpg|thumb|150x150px|left|Pressure plate film type]]There is a dial that
[[File:Pentax locks.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Spool dial locks]]
[[File:Pentax wrong.jpg|150x150px|thumb|Incorrect film direction]]
lets your choose between the two. You will need a quarter or a strong finger
nail to move it. The second adjustment is found on the inside of the camera.
Open the camera by pulling down on the silver release on the bottom left side
of the camera. Notice the black speckled pressure plate on the door. Following
the direction of the arrows there, gently push the pressure plate down and to
the side that corresponds to your film type.

==== Loading Film ====
[[File:Pentax back cover.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Cover release latch]]
It is best to do this while sitting as these cameras do not come with neck straps.
# First, open the back of the camera if it is not already open from the previous step. On the bottom of the camera are two silver dials that hold the film spools in place.
# Fold out their handles and turn these counter-clockwise and pull them up until the stay put. Make sure your empty take-up spool is on the right side. If there is no spool in the camera, ask a Media Loan or Photoland staff to give you one. (It is common medium format etiquette to leave your old spool in the camera
when you’re done using it as it is not needed for developing.) [[File:Pentax correct.jpg|150x150px|thumb|Correct film direction]]Like with 35mm film, the Pentax 6x7 needs to be loaded
in a “up and over” style and not “down and under.”
After you’ve aligned the cross in the top of the film spool
with the notch in the camera, close the silver dials on the bottom of the
camera. Now pull the film across to the right side of the camera and thread the
film into the take-up spool just as you would with 35mm film. Use the crank lever to advance the film
and stop when the arrows on the film paper line up with the arrow on the inside
of the camera.

Close the back of the camera and advance the
film until “0” is line up with the red dot in the frame counter.

==== Exposing, Focusing, & Taking a Picture ====
The '''shutter speed''' is set by the dial on the top left side
of the camera. The current setting is indicated by whatever number is next to the
small red LED just to the right of the dial. Since there is no built in light
meter on this camera, there is no need to set the '''ISO''' for whatever film you are
using.

If using a flash, you must use a shutter speed on this
camera of 1/30th of slower.

If you wish to do a timed exposure longer than one second
and you don’t want to keep you finger on the shutter as the “Bulb”
setting would allow, rotate the shutter speed dial to anywhere between the red “X” and “1000.”
Now, releasing the shutter will keep it open until you rotate the shutter speed
dial back to “X”.

The '''aperture''' ring is located on the lens. This is the ring
closest to the body of the camera and ranges from f/2.4 to f/22. The aperture
ring will be your primary tool for exposing. Also located on the lens is an
aperture preview mechanism. This allows you get see your depth of field before
actually taking a picture. You can lock this switch in "AUTO" mode so
that you will always be previewing your aperture. To do this, slide the switch
to "AUTO" and push down. To release it back to manual, push down on the other side of
the switch.

To focus, simply look through the viewfinder and adjust the
focus ring until the split viewfinder is even and the image looks crisp.

To release the shutter and take a picture, first crank the film advance level with your right thumb and smoothly and firmly depress the silver button next to the crank.

A cable release can be attached by screwing one into the shutter release button just as with Media Loan's 35mm Pentax K-1000 cameras.

The Pentax 6x7 can not take multiple exposure pictures.

==== Unloading Film ====

Once all of the frames are exposed you’ll want to unload
your film. When you’re ready to do this, wind the crank a few more times until
there is no more tension in the crank lever. By now the protective light-safe
paper should be covering the film and totally wrapped around the spool.
Unfasten the silver dials just like when loading film. Keeping a firm grip on the film so that it doesn't unroll,
lick or peel off the sticky tape on the roll and make sure it is securely attached to the
spool. Close everything back up.

==== Using a Flash ====
To use a flash with the Pentax 6x7, first attach the flash to the hot shoe mount on the handle. This camera has options for both X-type sync cables and FP-type sync cables. Use only the X-type as plugging an X cable into an FP housing can cause damage. Again, this camera can only use a flash when the shutter speed is set to 1/30th of a second or slower.
[[File:Bronica-top2.jpg|thumb|356x356px|Bronica SQ-B]]

=== Bronica ETRS, ETRSI, & SQ-B ===

There are three different models of the Bronica available at Media Loan: SB-Q, ETRS, and ETRSi. They are very similar in operation except for a few minor things like button placement and the viewfinders and accessories that come with each camera. The aspect ratio that these cameras shoot at is also different.
* The ETRS and ETRSi have prism viewfinders and are in a 6x6 (square) format.

* The SB-Q (aka 645) has a wast-level view finder and is in a 6x4.5 (rectangle) format.

The Bronica begins to feel like a departure from the 35mm cameras. It is essentially a cube with a lens attached. One notices a very different feel when shooting with a Bronica than with the Pentax 6x7. Since a lot of the controls are not in conventional places, it may take some time to get acquainted with this camera. All of the Bronica cameras can only use 120 film.
[[File:Cartridge doors.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Film cartridge doors]]
[[File:Bronica cartridge release.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Cartridge release latches]]
[[File:Bronica cartridge.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|The film cartridge ]]

==== Loading Film ====
To load film, open the back of the camera by pinching the buttons that lie just under the viewfinder that are indicated by arrows. It is spring loaded and the film cartridge may fall out so be prepared. The outer shell will fold down and then the film cartridge can be removed.
In the Bronica, film moves from top to bottom. This means your new roll of film will be on top and your empty spool on bottom Now that you're holding the film cartridge, notice there are two door flaps on the left side. Using your finger, push them open from the inside out. You will now be able to remove or insert film spools into each slot. Make sure the empty spool is on bottom and the fresh film is on top. Now you will take the film leader and run it over the pressure plate on the opposite side, bringing it down and around to the empty take up spool. A proper loading will have the black side of the paper leader facing outwards over the pressure plate. [[File:Bronica-Loading.gif|150x150px|thumb|Film direction]]Now, using the manual film advance wheel located on the right side of the cartridge, advance the film until the arrow on the leader aligns with the red arrow on the inside left of the cartridge.

To close the camera, the cartridge must first be aligned properly on the camera body, not inserted into the door. Once the cartridge is in place, close the door. It can be a little tricky to get it perfectly aligned. Do not force anything. If the door won't shut, take the cartridge out and try again.

Now wind the film advance lever until it stops moving and the frame counter is at 0.
[[File:Bronica viewfinder.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Waist-level viewfinder]]

==== Waist-level Viewfinder ====
[[File:Bronica magnifier.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Magnifier latch]]
[[File:Bronica magnifier2.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Magnifier]]Many of Media Loan's Bronicas, like the Mamiyas, feature waist-level viewfinders. This is different than a prism viewfinder in which the viewfinder is held up to the eye. Alternatively, waist-level viewfinders are held at the waist and have a "screen" and magnifier for focusing. Most waist-level viewfinders open by simply folding up the top of the camera. Sometimes there is a small latch. There are metal walls that will snap into place once it is open.
To open the magnifier for critical focusing, there is another release latch on the inside of the focusing hood. To close the magnifier, simply move it back into place with your finger, trying not to touch the actual glass.

Some of the Bronicas come with prism viewfinders, which you can ask for. Some of the prism viewfinders are electronic and feature an internal light meter.
==== Exposing, Focusing, & Taking a Picture ====
[[File:Bronica shutter speed.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Shutter speed dial]]
[[File:Bronica shutter.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Shutter release button]]
To set the '''shutter speed''', there is a dial on the right side of the camera body. The Bronica has a range of shutter speeds from 1/500th of a second to 8 seconds.

The '''aperture''' is set by twisting the aperture ring on the lens and has a range of f/2.4 to f/22.

If you are using a Bronica with a built in light meter, set the '''ISO''' to match your film speed by twisting the dial on the left of the viewfinder. If it does not have an internal light meter, you do not have to worry about setting your ISO.

To focus, open the magnifier in the focusing hood as described in the previous section. The Bronica's lens functions conveniently like most other camera lenses. Twist the focus ring until your subject comes into focus.

Before '''taking a picture''', the film must be advanced. Do this by winding the crank on the right side of the camera. When there is no film loaded in the camera, the crank will spin indefinitely. Once film has been loaded, the crank will stop itself in the correct position.

The shutter release button is a black button located on the front of the camera in the bottom left corner. You can attach a cable release by screwing one into the cable release hole on the left side of the camera.

It is preferable to take a picture in the steps in order to ensure a focused picture:
# Advance the film
# Set your shutter speed and aperture according to your light meter
# Focus on your subject
# Depress the shutter release button
[[File:Bronca flash plug.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Flash plug]]

==== Using a Flash ====
A flash can be connected using an X-type sync cable. The port for this flash is located on the front side of the camera in the top right corner. When plugging and unplugging a sync cable, always pull gently and straight out. Never use a twisting motion to get it out.

The Bronica can conveniently sync with flash at any shutter speed, even at its fastest of 1/500th of a second.
[[File:Bronica handles.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Mirror lock-up & multiple exposure knobs]]

==== Multiple Exposure ====
The Bronica cameras can take multiple exposures, exposing a single frame an unlimited number of times.

To do this, first wind the crank to advance the film. There is a small lever next to the crank that needs to be rotated clockwise. A red warning indicator will appear in the viewfinder letting you know that the multiple exposure mode is engaged, however it is always wise to double check that this lever is in the left or counter-clockwise position (single exposure mode) prior to shooting. When the multiple exposure mode is set, the shutter can be cocked with the film advance crank an infinite number of times without actually advancing the film.

==== Mirror Lockup ====
The function of a camera's mirror lockup (also abbreviated MLU) is to reduce the potential for motion blur due to the movement of the mirror inside the camera. This movement will potentially effect photographs only when shooting at shutter speeds of 1/60th of a second or slower. Since the mirror that allows viewing and composing through the viewfinder before actually taking a picture is stuck in its upright position, you will no longer be able to use the viewfinder once the MLU function is engaged.

To engage this function on the Bronica, first advance the film with the crank. There is a lever located to the right of the multiple exposure lever. Move this lever counter-clockwise. You will know it is engaged when you can not see anything through the viewfinder.

There are three settings for the mirror lockup function. "N" for normal in which the mirror will not lock up, and "S" for single frame and "C" for continuous in which the mirror will be locked up.

If you are on your last exposure of the roll and the mirror lock up function is still engaged, the shutter will continue to release every 360 degree turn and will not advance the film as would usually happen after the last exposure.

[[File:Mamiya-top.jpg|thumb|Mamiya C330]]

=== Mamiya C330 & C220 ===
The Mamiya cameras at Media Loan are perhaps the least intuitive to use of the medium format cameras. Learning to use one properly, however, is well worth it for both high quality images and mad style points. Like large format cameras, the Mamiya uses bellows to focus. Instead of adjusting the elements of glass within the lens, like with lenses that can focus internally, bellows physically move the lens farther or closer to the plane of film in order to focus.

The Mamiya shoots square frames that are 2 1/4 inch long in each direction.
[[File:Mamiya pressure plate.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Pressure plate film type]]

==== Before Loading Film ====
[[File:Mamiya-Unlocking.gif|thumb|150x150px|Cover dial rotation]]
Like the Pentax 6x7, the Mamiya can shoot with either 120 or 220 film and the camera needs to be adjusted accordingly before loading film. First, adjust the orientation of the pressure plate on the inside of the camera to coincide with the kind of film you are using. To open the back of the camera rotate the silver locking disk at the top of the back side of the camera so that the red dot is pointing up and you can slide the disk in the direction of the arrow.
[[File:Mamiya film type.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Film type indicator]]
[[File:Mamiya dial.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Parallax dial]]
Because the Mamiya uses a twin lens system rather than being an SLR, you will also need to adjust the parallax adjustment to match whatever the focal length of the lens is you are using. This can be set by the outer ring on the main dial on the left side of the camera. Depending on the adjustment made and the distance of the camera from the subject, a bar will appear on the left side of the viewfinder. ''This is important to notice as it indicates the top of the frame and everything above the bar will be cut off on the actual film, even though it is present in the viewfinder.''

Additionally, because the farther the bellows take the lens away from the film, light is increasingly lost along the way from when it enters the lens to when it reaches the film. Inside the viewfinder, the number that the moving bar lands at indicates in number of stops how much to increase the exposure by in order to compensate for the reduced light.

==== Loading Film ====
With the neck strap around your neck, open the back of the camera as indicated in the previous section. There are two spool release knobs on the left side of the camera. These pull out and will allow you to remove the film spools. Twist these knobs while pulling to lock them in their disengaged position. On the Mamiya, the film moves from bottom to top, opposite of the Bronica cameras move film. Accordingly, place the empty take up spool in the top compartment. Lock it in place. Then place your fresh roll of film in the bottom compartment and lock it in place.
[[File:Mamiya film loading.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Loading film]]
Pull out the film leader from the fresh spool and bring it up to the empty spool and thread it into that spool. Once threaded, turn the film advance crank on the right side of the camera clockwise to advance the film leader until the printed arrow on the leader matches up with the start mark on the inside of the camera (located a little lower than half way down on the right side.)

Close the back of the camera by pushing firmly on either side of the silver locking dial. Once closed, turn the locking dial counter-clockwise to lock the back cover in place. Continue to turn the film advance crank clockwise until it won't turn anymore. Your shutter is now cocked and ready to take a picture.

==== Exposing, Focusing, & Taking a Picture ====
[[File:Mamiya exposure.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Shutter speed & aperture]]
[[File:Mamiya aperture knob.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Aperture adjustment knob]]
The Mamiya is slightly different than other cameras in that both the aperture and shutter speed are set on the bottom lens. There are individual rings for each of these settings. The '''aperture''' can be set by moving the little black handle on the left side of the lens and the '''shutter speed''' can be set by twisting the knob with fractions of a second on it. Do not change the shutter speed after the shutter has been cocked.

The aperture ranges from f/2.8 to f/22 and the shutter speed ranges from 1/500th of a second to 1 seconds.

Since the Mamiya does not have an internal light meter there is no need for an '''ISO''' setting. The camera does however allow you to set the ISO of the film you are using on the dial configuration on the right side of the camera. This does not effect the performance of the camera at all but simply serves as a reminder for the kind of film you are shooting. Be sure to also check out a light meter from Media Loan when checking out a medium format camera.

Like the Bronica, most of Media Loan's Mamiyas feature waist-level viewfinders although some of them come with prism viewfinders. You can request either when checking one out. Also like the Bronica, the Mamiya has a magnifier seated within the focusing hood that can be expanded for critical focusing. To '''focus''' the camera, the Mamiya uses bellows that bring the lens closer or farther from the film plane. The lens is a fixed piece of glass and does not focus internally. To adjust the bellows and focus your image, twist either of the large black knobs on the bottom front of the camera.
[[File:Mamiya shutters.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Two shutter releases]]
After your film has been advanced by turning the crank clockwise, the camera is ready to '''take a picture'''. There are two ways to release the shutter. The first is a silver button on the front of the camera in the bottom left corner. A cable release can also be screwed in here. The second way is with the slide mechanism on the right side of the camera. There is a small black lever for your thumb. Slide this downward to release the shutter. As the Mamiyas are quite old, not all of the cameras are able to be fired with either method. Some can only use one or the other and this will be indicated by a note on the camera. Advance the film after each exposure.
[[File:Mamiya exposure type.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Exposure type dial]]
[[File:Mamiya lock.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Shutter release lock]]
There is a shutter lock on the slide mechanism that can be pushed to the "L" position. This prevents both shutter releases from being able to move and is thus useful to use when transporting the camera or arranging your shot.

To take take a picture using '''multiple exposures''', there is a dial next to the film advance crank that has the option of either "SINGLE" or "MULTI". Turn this to "MULTI" to be able to exposure a frame multiple times without needing to advance the film.

==== Unloading Film ====
After twelve frames are exposed, continue to turn the winding crank until there is no more tension on the advance crank. At this point, the protective paper of the film should be rolled up around the take up spool. When unloading the film, keep the spool rolled and hold the film tightly to prevent light exposure. Lick or peel the tab on the film and wrap it firmly around the exposed film. Close the camera back.
[[File:Mamiya flash plug.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Flash plug]]

==== Using a Flash ====
To synchronize a flash with the Mamiya, switch the Synchro Selector MX Switch to “X”. You will need to check out a Vivitar flash and a flash sync cable. Because the Vivitar flash was not designed to be used with the Mamiya, it will not properly mount on the hot shoe. Therefore, you’ll need to hold it while taking your picture. The Seagull and the Kalimar should not require a sync cable as they can mount onto the hot shoe.
'''Caution: Avoid moving the self-timer while the flash sync is set at “M”. It may cause damage to the self-timer.'''

[[category:Media Loan]]

Medium Format Cameras Proficiency Test

2020-04-20T23:21:55Z

Highberh: /* WRITTEN TEST */

===Proficiency Test===
====WRITTEN TEST====
:'''Answers can be found in [[Medium Format Cameras Operating Guide]].'''

Complete this written portion on a separate sheet of paper before arriving for your operational proficiency.

# What size film do the Mamiya cameras use? What size are the pictures taken with these cameras? How many exposures to a roll?
# What is the significance of the two red dots or triangles inside the back of the camera, and how do they effect the loading of the camera?
# When would you use the magnifier? How do you set it up?
# Identify the differences between the film advance and shutter cocking mechanisms on the different cameras.
# Where does the empty spool at the bottom of the camera go in order to load a new roll of film?
# Explain the difference between a 35mm camera and a medium format camera.
# What is the function of the MX sync selector? Why should you not set the self-timer with it in the "M" position?
# How do you rewind the film?
# What is the extent of your financial responsibility when you check out equipment from Media Loan?

====OPERATIONAL PROFICIENCY====
:('''To be done during your scheduled appointment''')

* Identify all parts and controls on the camera, and identify differences between cameras.
* Remove the camera from its case and load it, taking note of how easily the case can be damaged.
* The back cover latch ring is marked with a "C" and an "O". Describe what do they stand for and how to use them.
* Set the shutter speed to 1/125th sec. and f-stop to f4.
* Demonstrate focusing and framing using the viewing screen, critical focus magnifier, and sports finder.
* Cock the shutter and take a picture, advance the film.
* Use the self-timer properly, explain flash sync function and precautions
* Wind film through camera and demonstrate proper film handling when unloading camera.
* Demonstrate proper lens cleaning techniques and finally close up the camera and prepare it for storage.

[[category:Media Loan]]

Medium Format Cameras Proficiency Test

2020-04-20T23:19:55Z

Highberh: /* WRITTEN TEST */

===Proficiency Test===
====WRITTEN TEST====
:'''Answers can be found in [[Medium Format Cameras Operating Guide]].'''

Complete this written portion on a separate sheet of paper before arriving for your operational proficiency.

# What size film do the Mamiya cameras use? What size are the pictures taken with these cameras? How many exposures to a roll?
# What is the significance of the two red dots or triangles inside the back of the camera, and how do they effect the loading of the camera?
# When would you use the magnifier? How do you set it up?
# Identify the differences between the film advance and shutter cocking mechanisms on the different cameras.
# Where does the empty spool at the bottom of the camera go in order to load a new roll of film?
# Explain the difference between a 35mm camera and a medium format camera.
# What is the function of the MX sync selector? Why should you not set the self-timer with it in the "M" position?
# How do you rewind the film?
# What is the extent of your financial responsibility each and every time you check out this or any other equipment from Media Loan?

====OPERATIONAL PROFICIENCY====
:('''To be done during your scheduled appointment''')

* Identify all parts and controls on the camera, and identify differences between cameras.
* Remove the camera from its case and load it, taking note of how easily the case can be damaged.
* The back cover latch ring is marked with a "C" and an "O". Describe what do they stand for and how to use them.
* Set the shutter speed to 1/125th sec. and f-stop to f4.
* Demonstrate focusing and framing using the viewing screen, critical focus magnifier, and sports finder.
* Cock the shutter and take a picture, advance the film.
* Use the self-timer properly, explain flash sync function and precautions
* Wind film through camera and demonstrate proper film handling when unloading camera.
* Demonstrate proper lens cleaning techniques and finally close up the camera and prepare it for storage.

[[category:Media Loan]]

Medium Format Cameras Proficiency Test

2020-04-20T23:18:19Z

Highberh: /* WRITTEN TEST */

===Proficiency Test===
====WRITTEN TEST====
:'''Answers can be found in [[Medium Format Cameras Operating Guide]].'''

Complete this written portion on a separate sheet of paper before arriving for your operational proficiency.

# What size film do the Mamiya cameras use? What size are the pictures taken with these cameras? How many exposures to a roll?
# What is the significance of the two red dots or triangles inside the back of the camera, and how do they effect the loading of the camera?
# When would you use the magnifier? How do you set it up?
# Identify the differences between the film advance and shutter cocking mechanisms on the different cameras.
# Where does the empty spool at the bottom of the camera go in order to load a new roll of film?
# Explain the difference between a 35mm camera and a medium format camera.
# What is the function of the M-X sync selector? Why should you not set the self-timer with it in the "M" position?
# How do you rewind the film?
# What is the extent of your financial responsibility each and every time you check out this or any other equipment from Media Loan?

====OPERATIONAL PROFICIENCY====
:('''To be done during your scheduled appointment''')

* Identify all parts and controls on the camera, and identify differences between cameras.
* Remove the camera from its case and load it, taking note of how easily the case can be damaged.
* The back cover latch ring is marked with a "C" and an "O". Describe what do they stand for and how to use them.
* Set the shutter speed to 1/125th sec. and f-stop to f4.
* Demonstrate focusing and framing using the viewing screen, critical focus magnifier, and sports finder.
* Cock the shutter and take a picture, advance the film.
* Use the self-timer properly, explain flash sync function and precautions
* Wind film through camera and demonstrate proper film handling when unloading camera.
* Demonstrate proper lens cleaning techniques and finally close up the camera and prepare it for storage.

[[category:Media Loan]]

Medium Format Cameras Proficiency Test

2020-04-20T23:12:08Z

Highberh: /* WRITTEN TEST */

===Proficiency Test===
====WRITTEN TEST====
:'''Answers can be found in [[Medium Format Cameras Operating Guide]].'''

Complete this written portion on a separate sheet of paper before arriving for your operational proficiency.

# What size film do the Mamiya cameras use? What size are the pictures taken with these cameras? How many exposures to a roll?
# What is the significance of the two red dots or triangles inside the back of the camera, and how do they effect the loading of the camera?
# When would you use the magnifier? How do you set it up?
# Identify the differences between the film advance and shutter cocking mechanisms on the different cameras.
# Where does the empty spool at the bottom of the camera go in order to load a new roll of film?
# The back cover latch ring is marked with a "C" and an "O" what do they stand for?
# What is the function of the M-X sync selector? Why should you not set the self-timer with it in the "M" position?
# How do you rewind the film?
# What is the extent of your financial responsibility each and every time you check out this or any other equipment from Media Loan?

====OPERATIONAL PROFICIENCY====
:('''To be done during your scheduled appointment''')

* Identify all parts and controls on the camera, and identify differences between cameras.
* Remove the camera from its case and load it, taking note of how easily the case can be damaged.
* The back cover latch ring is marked with a "C" and an "O". Describe what do they stand for and how to use them.
* Set the shutter speed to 1/125th sec. and f-stop to f4.
* Demonstrate focusing and framing using the viewing screen, critical focus magnifier, and sports finder.
* Cock the shutter and take a picture, advance the film.
* Use the self-timer properly, explain flash sync function and precautions
* Wind film through camera and demonstrate proper film handling when unloading camera.
* Demonstrate proper lens cleaning techniques and finally close up the camera and prepare it for storage.

[[category:Media Loan]]

Medium Format Cameras Proficiency Test

2020-04-20T23:08:50Z

Highberh: /* WRITTEN TEST */

===Proficiency Test===
====WRITTEN TEST====
:'''Answers can be found in [[Medium Format Cameras Operating Guide]].'''

Complete this written portion on a separate sheet of paper before arriving for your operational proficiency.

# What size film do the 2 1/4" cameras use? What size are the pictures taken with these cameras? How many exposures to a roll?
# What is the significance of the two red dots or triangles inside the back of the camera, and how do they effect the loading of the camera?
# When would you use the magnifier? How do you set it up?
# Identify the differences between the film advance and shutter cocking mechanisms on the different cameras.
# Where does the empty spool at the bottom of the camera go in order to load a new roll of film?
# The back cover latch ring is marked with a "C" and an "O" what do they stand for?
# What is the function of the M-X sync selector? Why should you not set the self-timer with it in the "M" position?
# How do you rewind the film?
# What is the extent of your financial responsibility each and every time you check out this or any other equipment from Media Loan?

====OPERATIONAL PROFICIENCY====
:('''To be done during your scheduled appointment''')

* Identify all parts and controls on the camera, and identify differences between cameras.
* Remove the camera from its case and load it, taking note of how easily the case can be damaged.
* The back cover latch ring is marked with a "C" and an "O". Describe what do they stand for and how to use them.
* Set the shutter speed to 1/125th sec. and f-stop to f4.
* Demonstrate focusing and framing using the viewing screen, critical focus magnifier, and sports finder.
* Cock the shutter and take a picture, advance the film.
* Use the self-timer properly, explain flash sync function and precautions
* Wind film through camera and demonstrate proper film handling when unloading camera.
* Demonstrate proper lens cleaning techniques and finally close up the camera and prepare it for storage.

[[category:Media Loan]]

Medium Format Cameras Gear Guide

2020-04-20T22:52:27Z

Highberh: /* Tools Required */

[[File:MediumFormat-top-large.jpg|centre|800x800px]]
'''A proficiency test is required to check out these cameras.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[Medium Format Cameras Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. (You must already be proficient in the 35mm manual camera before obtaining this proficiency.) Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.

=== Introduction to Medium Format ===

==== Medium Format vs. 35mm ====
This is an instructional guide to the medium format film
cameras available at Media Loan. It will cover a brief introduction to medium
format photography and then go through the operating steps for each of our
models.

When talking about film photography, there are three main
types of film, or formats: 35mm, medium format, and large format. With medium
and large format, the frame size on the film is much larger than 35mm film and yields significantly more detail and the ability to be printed at very large sizes. In essence, it
is a question of quality. The size and shape of the actual frame is variable
depending on the camera (whether your picture is a square, rectangle, skinny
rectangle, etc.) The size of the frame is often indicated in the name of the
camera, like the Pentax 6x7 whose frame dimensions are 6cm by 7cm. With 35mm
photography the size of the frame is always 35mm across regardless of the
camera used.

Medium format film comes wrapped around a plastic spool with
light-safe black paper layered around the film itself. There is no metal
canister like with 35mm film. Additionally, when there are no more exposures
left on the roll, medium format film is not rewound back on to the spool but is
transferred to another take-up spool on the other side of the camera.

There are two types of medium format film, 120 and 220. The
film is exactly the same except that 220 film contains twice the amount of
exposures as 120. However, most medium format cameras can shoot only one or the
other. The Pentax 6x7 and the Mamiya cameras have the ability to shoot both but the camera needs to be adjusted
to the right setting prior to loading the film. 120 film is the most common and
allows for 10-12 exposures depending on the camera’s aspect ratio. Keep in mind that the Photo Store and many other stores do not process 220 film.

==== Tools Required ====
In order to shoot on a medium format camera, you will need some
accessories. Some are optional while others are not. The essentials include an
'''empty film spool''' that your exposed film will be transferred on to (there should
already be one in the camera from the previous user. If there isn’t, ask a Media
Loan staff member to give you one.) You will also need a '''light meter''' as most of our medium
format cameras do not have built in meters.

Refer
to [http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Light_Meters_Quick_Guide Media Loan’s operating guide for light meters] to find out how to use what
might be called your medium format camera’s best friend.

Other accessories include tripods, cable releases, and
flashes. If using a flash, remember to also pick up a flash sync cable.

==== Precautions ====
These cameras are old, expensive, and used by many students. Please give them the respect they deserve. Before handling a camera, be
aware of what can potentially damage it and what improper usage looks like.

Some general rules for these cameras are:

·
Do not expose them to water or moisture. They
are not weather proof.

·
Do not leave in excessive heat, like in a car.

·
Do not leave in excessive cold, like the
freezer.

·
Do not try to force any mechanism on the camera.
You’re probably doing it wrong if it feels like a lot of force.

·
Do not remove the prism viewfinder or the lens. This will
get dust inside the camera.

·
'''NEVER LEAVE ANYTHING FROM MEDIA LOAN IN YOUR'''
'''CAR'''!

·
As with all Media Loan equipment, you are 100% financially
responsibly for any damage and repairs done to the camera.
[[File:Pentax-top.jpg|thumb|Pentax 6x7]][[File:Pentax film type.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Film type dial]]
=== Pentax 6x7 ===
The Pentax 6x7 is perhaps the easiest to use of
all our medium format cameras, as it most resembles the shape and operation
of a 35mm camera. It is a single lens reflex (SLR) camera meaning that what you see
through the viewfinder is the actual image that will appear on the film. This
camera can shoot both 120 and 220 film. You will not be able to release the
shutter until there is film loaded
==== Before Loading Film ====
[[File:IMG 3315.JPG|thumb|150x150px|left|Handle screw]]
Firstly, be sure that the wooden handle grip is screwed on tight. All of the camera’s weight rests on this handle.

Then you need to set
the film type you are working with, either 120 or 220. There are two places
that need to be adjusted for this. If you’re holding the camera like you would
to shoot, the first is on the right side of the camera. [[File:Pentax Pressure Plate.jpg|thumb|150x150px|left|Pressure plate film type]]There is a dial that
[[File:Pentax locks.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Spool dial locks]]
[[File:Pentax wrong.jpg|150x150px|thumb|Incorrect film direction]]
lets your choose between the two. You will need a quarter or a strong finger
nail to move it. The second adjustment is found on the inside of the camera.
Open the camera by pulling down on the silver release on the bottom left side
of the camera. Notice the black speckled pressure plate on the door. Following
the direction of the arrows there, gently push the pressure plate down and to
the side that corresponds to your film type.

==== Loading Film ====
[[File:Pentax back cover.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Cover release latch]]
It is best to do this while sitting as these cameras do not come with neck straps. First, open the back of
the camera if it is not already open from the previous step. On the bottom of
the camera are two silver dials that hold the film spools in place. Fold out their handles and turn these
counter-clockwise and pull them up until the stay put.
Make sure your empty take-up spool is on the right side. If there is
no spool in the camera, ask a Media Loan or Photoland staff to give you one.
(It is common medium format etiquette to leave your old spool in the camera
when you’re done using it as it is not needed for developing.) [[File:Pentax correct.jpg|150x150px|thumb|Correct film direction]]Like with 35mm film, the Pentax 6x7 needs to be loaded
in a “up and over” style and not “down and under.”
After you’ve aligned the cross in the top of the film spool
with the notch in the camera, close the silver dials on the bottom of the
camera. Now pull the film across to the right side of the camera and thread the
film into the take-up spool just as you would with 35mm film. Use the crank lever to advance the film
and stop when the arrows on the film paper line up with the arrow on the inside
of the camera.

Close the back of the camera and advance the
film until “0” is line up with the red dot in the frame counter.

==== Exposing, Focusing, & Taking a Picture ====
The '''shutter speed''' is set by the dial on the top left side
of the camera. The current setting is indicated by whatever number is next to the
small red LED just to the right of the dial. Since there is no built in light
meter on this camera, there is no need to set the '''ISO''' for whatever film you are
using.

If using a flash, you must use a shutter speed on this
camera of 1/30th of slower.

If you wish to do a timed exposure longer than one second
and you don’t want to keep you finger on the shutter as the “Bulb”
setting would allow, rotate the shutter speed dial to anywhere between the red “X” and “1000.”
Now, releasing the shutter will keep it open until you rotate the shutter speed
dial back to “X”.

The '''aperture''' ring is located on the lens. This is the ring
closest to the body of the camera and ranges from f/2.4 to f/22. The aperture
ring will be your primary tool for exposing. Also located on the lens is an
aperture preview mechanism. This allows you get see your depth of field before
actually taking a picture. You can lock this switch in "AUTO" mode so
that you will always be previewing your aperture. To do this, slide the switch
to "AUTO" and push down. To release it back to manual, push down on the other side of
the switch.

To focus, simply look through the viewfinder and adjust the
focus ring until the split viewfinder is even and the image looks crisp.

To release the shutter and take a picture, first crank the film advance level with your right thumb and smoothly and firmly depress the silver button next to the crank.

A cable release can be attached by screwing one into the shutter release button just as with Media Loan's 35mm Pentax K-1000 cameras.

The Pentax 6x7 can not take multiple exposure pictures.

==== Unloading Film ====

Once all of the frames are exposed you’ll want to unload
your film. When you’re ready to do this, wind the crank a few more times until
there is no more tension in the crank lever. By now the protective light-safe
paper should be covering the film and totally wrapped around the spool.
Unfasten the silver dials just like when loading film. Keeping a firm grip on the film so that it doesn't unroll,
lick or peel off the sticky tape on the roll and make sure it is securely attached to the
spool. Close everything back up.

==== Using a Flash ====
To use a flash with the Pentax 6x7, first attach the flash to the hot shoe mount on the handle. This camera has options for both X-type sync cables and FP-type sync cables. Use only the X-type as plugging an X cable into an FP housing can cause damage. Again, this camera can only use a flash when the shutter speed is set to 1/30th of a second or slower.
[[File:Bronica-top2.jpg|thumb|356x356px|Bronica SQ-B]]

=== Bronica ETRS, ETRSI, & SQ-B ===

There are three different models of the Bronica available at Media Loan: SB-Q, ETRS, and ETRSi. They are very similar in operation except for a few minor things like button placement and the viewfinders and accessories that come with each camera. The aspect ratio that these cameras shoot at is also different.
* The ETRS and ETRSi have prism viewfinders and are in a 6x6 (square) format.

* The SB-Q (aka 645) has a wast-level view finder and is in a 6x4.5 (rectangle) format.

The Bronica begins to feel like a departure from the 35mm cameras. It is essentially a cube with a lens attached. One notices a very different feel when shooting with a Bronica than with the Pentax 6x7. Since a lot of the controls are not in conventional places, it may take some time to get acquainted with this camera. All of the Bronica cameras can only use 120 film.
[[File:Cartridge doors.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Film cartridge doors]]
[[File:Bronica cartridge release.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Cartridge release latches]]
[[File:Bronica cartridge.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|The film cartridge ]]

==== Loading Film ====
To load film, open the back of the camera by pinching the buttons that lie just under the viewfinder that are indicated by arrows. It is spring loaded and the film cartridge may fall out so be prepared. The outer shell will fold down and then the film cartridge can be removed.
In the Bronica, film moves from top to bottom. This means your new roll of film will be on top and your empty spool on bottom Now that you're holding the film cartridge, notice there are two door flaps on the left side. Using your finger, push them open from the inside out. You will now be able to remove or insert film spools into each slot. Make sure the empty spool is on bottom and the fresh film is on top. Now you will take the film leader and run it over the pressure plate on the opposite side, bringing it down and around to the empty take up spool. A proper loading will have the black side of the paper leader facing outwards over the pressure plate. [[File:Bronica-Loading.gif|150x150px|thumb|Film direction]]Now, using the manual film advance wheel located on the right side of the cartridge, advance the film until the arrow on the leader aligns with the red arrow on the inside left of the cartridge.

To close the camera, the cartridge must first be aligned properly on the camera body, not inserted into the door. Once the cartridge is in place, close the door. It can be a little tricky to get it perfectly aligned. Do not force anything. If the door won't shut, take the cartridge out and try again.

Now wind the film advance lever until it stops moving and the frame counter is at 0.
[[File:Bronica viewfinder.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Waist-level viewfinder]]

==== Waist-level Viewfinder ====
[[File:Bronica magnifier.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Magnifier latch]]
[[File:Bronica magnifier2.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Magnifier]]Many of Media Loan's Bronicas, like the Mamiyas, feature waist-level viewfinders. This is different than a prism viewfinder in which the viewfinder is held up to the eye. Alternatively, waist-level viewfinders are held at the waist and have a "screen" and magnifier for focusing. Most waist-level viewfinders open by simply folding up the top of the camera. Sometimes there is a small latch. There are metal walls that will snap into place once it is open.
To open the magnifier for critical focusing, there is another release latch on the inside of the focusing hood. To close the magnifier, simply move it back into place with your finger, trying not to touch the actual glass.

Some of the Bronicas come with prism viewfinders, which you can ask for. Some of the prism viewfinders are electronic and feature an internal light meter.
==== Exposing, Focusing, & Taking a Picture ====
[[File:Bronica shutter speed.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Shutter speed dial]]
[[File:Bronica shutter.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Shutter release button]]
To set the '''shutter speed''', there is a dial on the right side of the camera body. The Bronica has a range of shutter speeds from 1/500th of a second to 8 seconds.

The '''aperture''' is set by twisting the aperture ring on the lens and has a range of f/2.4 to f/22.

If you are using a Bronica with a built in light meter, set the '''ISO''' to match your film speed by twisting the dial on the left of the viewfinder. If it does not have an internal light meter, you do not have to worry about setting your ISO.

To focus, open the magnifier in the focusing hood as described in the previous section. The Bronica's lens functions conveniently like most other camera lenses. Twist the focus ring until your subject comes into focus.

Before '''taking a picture''', the film must be advanced. Do this by winding the crank on the right side of the camera. When there is no film loaded in the camera, the crank will spin indefinitely. Once film has been loaded, the crank will stop itself in the correct position.

The shutter release button is a black button located on the front of the camera in the bottom left corner. You can attach a cable release by screwing one into the cable release hole on the left side of the camera.

It is preferable to take a picture in the steps in order to ensure a focused picture:
# Advance the film
# Set your shutter speed and aperture according to your light meter
# Focus on your subject
# Depress the shutter release button
[[File:Bronca flash plug.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Flash plug]]

==== Using a Flash ====
A flash can be connected using an X-type sync cable. The port for this flash is located on the front side of the camera in the top right corner. When plugging and unplugging a sync cable, always pull gently and straight out. Never use a twisting motion to get it out.

The Bronica can conveniently sync with flash at any shutter speed, even at its fastest of 1/500th of a second.
[[File:Bronica handles.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Mirror lock-up & multiple exposure knobs]]

==== Multiple Exposure ====
The Bronica cameras can take multiple exposures, exposing a single frame an unlimited number of times.

To do this, first wind the crank to advance the film. There is a small lever next to the crank that needs to be rotated clockwise. A red warning indicator will appear in the viewfinder letting you know that the multiple exposure mode is engaged, however it is always wise to double check that this lever is in the left or counter-clockwise position (single exposure mode) prior to shooting. When the multiple exposure mode is set, the shutter can be cocked with the film advance crank an infinite number of times without actually advancing the film.

==== Mirror Lockup ====
The function of a camera's mirror lockup (also abbreviated MLU) is to reduce the potential for motion blur due to the movement of the mirror inside the camera. This movement will potentially effect photographs only when shooting at shutter speeds of 1/60th of a second or slower. Since the mirror that allows viewing and composing through the viewfinder before actually taking a picture is stuck in its upright position, you will no longer be able to use the viewfinder once the MLU function is engaged.

To engage this function on the Bronica, first advance the film with the crank. There is a lever located to the right of the multiple exposure lever. Move this lever counter-clockwise. You will know it is engaged when you can not see anything through the viewfinder.

There are three settings for the mirror lockup function. "N" for normal in which the mirror will not lock up, and "S" for single frame and "C" for continuous in which the mirror will be locked up.

If you are on your last exposure of the roll and the mirror lock up function is still engaged, the shutter will continue to release every 360 degree turn and will not advance the film as would usually happen after the last exposure.

[[File:Mamiya-top.jpg|thumb|Mamiya C330]]

=== Mamiya C330 & C220 ===
The Mamiya cameras at Media Loan are perhaps the least intuitive to use of the medium format cameras. Learning to use one properly, however, is well worth it for both high quality images and mad style points. Like large format cameras, the Mamiya uses bellows to focus. Instead of adjusting the elements of glass within the lens, like with lenses that can focus internally, bellows physically move the lens farther or closer to the plane of film in order to focus.

The Mamiya shoots square frames that are 2 1/4 inch long in each direction.
[[File:Mamiya pressure plate.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Pressure plate film type]]

==== Before Loading Film ====
[[File:Mamiya-Unlocking.gif|thumb|150x150px|Cover dial rotation]]
Like the Pentax 6x7, the Mamiya can shoot with either 120 or 220 film and the camera needs to be adjusted accordingly before loading film. First, adjust the orientation of the pressure plate on the inside of the camera to coincide with the kind of film you are using. To open the back of the camera rotate the silver locking disk at the top of the back side of the camera so that the red dot is pointing up and you can slide the disk in the direction of the arrow.
[[File:Mamiya film type.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Film type indicator]]
[[File:Mamiya dial.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Parallax dial]]
Because the Mamiya uses a twin lens system rather than being an SLR, you will also need to adjust the parallax adjustment to match whatever the focal length of the lens is you are using. This can be set by the outer ring on the main dial on the left side of the camera. Depending on the adjustment made and the distance of the camera from the subject, a bar will appear on the left side of the viewfinder. ''This is important to notice as it indicates the top of the frame and everything above the bar will be cut off on the actual film, even though it is present in the viewfinder.''

Additionally, because the farther the bellows take the lens away from the film, light is increasingly lost along the way from when it enters the lens to when it reaches the film. Inside the viewfinder, the number that the moving bar lands at indicates in number of stops how much to increase the exposure by in order to compensate for the reduced light.

==== Loading Film ====
With the neck strap around your neck, open the back of the camera as indicated in the previous section. There are two spool release knobs on the left side of the camera. These pull out and will allow you to remove the film spools. Twist these knobs while pulling to lock them in their disengaged position. On the Mamiya, the film moves from bottom to top, opposite of the Bronica cameras move film. Accordingly, place the empty take up spool in the top compartment. Lock it in place. Then place your fresh roll of film in the bottom compartment and lock it in place.
[[File:Mamiya film loading.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Loading film]]
Pull out the film leader from the fresh spool and bring it up to the empty spool and thread it into that spool. Once threaded, turn the film advance crank on the right side of the camera clockwise to advance the film leader until the printed arrow on the leader matches up with the start mark on the inside of the camera (located a little lower than half way down on the right side.)

Close the back of the camera by pushing firmly on either side of the silver locking dial. Once closed, turn the locking dial counter-clockwise to lock the back cover in place. Continue to turn the film advance crank clockwise until it won't turn anymore. Your shutter is now cocked and ready to take a picture.

==== Exposing, Focusing, & Taking a Picture ====
[[File:Mamiya exposure.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Shutter speed & aperture]]
[[File:Mamiya aperture knob.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Aperture adjustment knob]]
The Mamiya is slightly different than other cameras in that both the aperture and shutter speed are set on the bottom lens. There are individual rings for each of these settings. The '''aperture''' can be set by moving the little black handle on the left side of the lens and the '''shutter speed''' can be set by twisting the knob with fractions of a second on it. Do not change the shutter speed after the shutter has been cocked.

The aperture ranges from f/2.8 to f/22 and the shutter speed ranges from 1/500th of a second to 1 seconds.

Since the Mamiya does not have an internal light meter there is no need for an '''ISO''' setting. The camera does however allow you to set the ISO of the film you are using on the dial configuration on the right side of the camera. This does not effect the performance of the camera at all but simply serves as a reminder for the kind of film you are shooting. Be sure to also check out a light meter from Media Loan when checking out a medium format camera.

Like the Bronica, most of Media Loan's Mamiyas feature waist-level viewfinders although some of them come with prism viewfinders. You can request either when checking one out. Also like the Bronica, the Mamiya has a magnifier seated within the focusing hood that can be expanded for critical focusing. To '''focus''' the camera, the Mamiya uses bellows that bring the lens closer or farther from the film plane. The lens is a fixed piece of glass and does not focus internally. To adjust the bellows and focus your image, twist either of the large black knobs on the bottom front of the camera.
[[File:Mamiya shutters.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Two shutter releases]]
After your film has been advanced by turning the crank clockwise, the camera is ready to '''take a picture'''. There are two ways to release the shutter. The first is a silver button on the front of the camera in the bottom left corner. A cable release can also be screwed in here. The second way is with the slide mechanism on the right side of the camera. There is a small black lever for your thumb. Slide this downward to release the shutter. As the Mamiyas are quite old, not all of the cameras are able to be fired with either method. Some can only use one or the other and this will be indicated by a note on the camera. Advance the film after each exposure.
[[File:Mamiya exposure type.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Exposure type dial]]
[[File:Mamiya lock.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Shutter release lock]]
There is a shutter lock on the slide mechanism that can be pushed to the "L" position. This prevents both shutter releases from being able to move and is thus useful to use when transporting the camera or arranging your shot.

To take take a picture using '''multiple exposures''', there is a dial next to the film advance crank that has the option of either "SINGLE" or "MULTI". Turn this to "MULTI" to be able to exposure a frame multiple times without needing to advance the film.

==== Unloading Film ====
After twelve frames are exposed, continue to turn the winding crank until there is no more tension on the advance crank. At this point, the protective paper of the film should be rolled up around the take up spool. When unloading the film, keep the spool rolled and hold the film tightly to prevent light exposure. Lick or peel the tab on the film and wrap it firmly around the exposed film. Close the camera back.
[[File:Mamiya flash plug.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Flash plug]]

==== Using a Flash ====
To synchronize a flash with the Mamiya, switch the Synchro Selector MX Switch to “X”. You will need to check out a Vivitar flash and a flash sync cable. Because the Vivitar flash was not designed to be used with the Mamiya, it will not properly mount on the hot shoe. Therefore, you’ll need to hold it while taking your picture. The Seagull and the Kalimar should not require a sync cable as they can mount onto the hot shoe.
'''Caution: Avoid moving the self-timer while the flash sync is set at “M”. It may cause damage to the self-timer.'''

[[category:Media Loan]]

Medium Format Cameras Gear Guide

2020-04-20T22:49:09Z

Highberh: /* Tools Required */

[[File:MediumFormat-top-large.jpg|centre|800x800px]]
'''A proficiency test is required to check out these cameras.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[Medium Format Cameras Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. (You must already be proficient in the 35mm manual camera before obtaining this proficiency.) Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.

=== Introduction to Medium Format ===

==== Medium Format vs. 35mm ====
This is an instructional guide to the medium format film
cameras available at Media Loan. It will cover a brief introduction to medium
format photography and then go through the operating steps for each of our
models.

When talking about film photography, there are three main
types of film, or formats: 35mm, medium format, and large format. With medium
and large format, the frame size on the film is much larger than 35mm film and yields significantly more detail and the ability to be printed at very large sizes. In essence, it
is a question of quality. The size and shape of the actual frame is variable
depending on the camera (whether your picture is a square, rectangle, skinny
rectangle, etc.) The size of the frame is often indicated in the name of the
camera, like the Pentax 6x7 whose frame dimensions are 6cm by 7cm. With 35mm
photography the size of the frame is always 35mm across regardless of the
camera used.

Medium format film comes wrapped around a plastic spool with
light-safe black paper layered around the film itself. There is no metal
canister like with 35mm film. Additionally, when there are no more exposures
left on the roll, medium format film is not rewound back on to the spool but is
transferred to another take-up spool on the other side of the camera.

There are two types of medium format film, 120 and 220. The
film is exactly the same except that 220 film contains twice the amount of
exposures as 120. However, most medium format cameras can shoot only one or the
other. The Pentax 6x7 and the Mamiya cameras have the ability to shoot both but the camera needs to be adjusted
to the right setting prior to loading the film. 120 film is the most common and
allows for 10-12 exposures depending on the camera’s aspect ratio. Keep in mind that the Photo Store and many other stores do not process 220 film.

==== Tools Required ====
In order to shoot on a medium format camera, you will need some
accessories. Some are optional while others are not. The essentials include an
'''empty film spool''' that your exposed film will be transferred on to (there should
already be one in the camera from the previous user. If there isn’t, ask a Media
Loan staff member to give you one.) You will also need a '''light meter''' as most of our medium
format cameras do not have built in meters.

Refer
to [http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Light_Meters_Quick_Guide Media Loan’s operating guide for light meters] to find out how to use what
might be called your medium format camera’s best friend.

Other accessories include tripods, cable releases, and
flashes. If using a flash, remember to also pick up a flash sync cable.

==== Precautions ====
These cameras are old, expensive, and used by many students. Please give them the respect they deserve. Before handling a camera, be
aware of what can potentially damage it and what improper usage looks like.

Some general rules for these cameras are:

·
Do not expose them to water or moisture. They
are not weather proof.

·
Do not leave in excessive heat, like in a car.

·
Do not leave in excessive cold, like the
freezer.

·
Do not try to force any mechanism on the camera.
You’re probably doing it wrong if it feels like a lot of force.

·
Do not remove the prism viewfinder or the lens. This will
get dust inside the camera.

·
'''NEVER LEAVE ANYTHING FROM MEDIA LOAN IN YOUR'''
CAR!

·
As with all Media Loan equipment, you are 100% financially
responsibly for any damage and repairs done to the camera.
[[File:Pentax-top.jpg|thumb|Pentax 6x7]][[File:Pentax film type.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Film type dial]]
=== Pentax 6X7 ===
The Pentax 6x7 is perhaps the easiest to use of
all our medium format cameras as it most resembles the shape and operation
of a 35mm camera. It is a single lens reflex (SLR) camera meaning that what you see
through the viewfinder is the actual image that will appear on the film. This
camera can shoot both 120 and 220 film. You will not be able to release the
shutter until there is film loaded
==== Before Loading Film ====
[[File:IMG 3315.JPG|thumb|150x150px|left|Handle screw]]
Firstly, be sure that the wooden handle grip is screwed on tight. All of the camera’s weight rests on this handle.

Then you need to set
the film type you are working with, either 120 or 220. There are two places
that need to be adjusted for this. If you’re holding the camera like you would
to shoot, the first is on the right side of the camera. [[File:Pentax Pressure Plate.jpg|thumb|150x150px|left|Pressure plate film type]]There is a dial that
[[File:Pentax locks.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Spool dial locks]]
[[File:Pentax wrong.jpg|150x150px|thumb|Incorrect film direction]]
lets your choose between the two. You will need a quarter or a strong finger
nail to move it. The second adjustment is found on the inside of the camera.
Open the camera by pulling down on the silver release on the bottom left side
of the camera. Notice the black speckled pressure plate on the door. Following
the direction of the arrows there, gently push the pressure plate down and to
the side that corresponds to your film type.

==== Loading Film ====
[[File:Pentax back cover.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Cover release latch]]
It is best to do this while sitting as these cameras do not come with neck straps. First, open the back of
the camera if it is not already open from the previous step. On the bottom of
the camera are two silver dials that hold the film spools in place. Fold out their handles and turn these
counter-clockwise and pull them up until the stay put.
Make sure your empty take-up spool is on the right side. If there is
no spool in the camera, ask a Media Loan or Photoland staff to give you one.
(It is common medium format etiquette to leave your old spool in the camera
when you’re done using it as it is not needed for developing.) [[File:Pentax correct.jpg|150x150px|thumb|Correct film direction]]Like with 35mm film, the Pentax 6x7 needs to be loaded
in a “up and over” style and not “down and under.”
After you’ve aligned the cross in the top of the film spool
with the notch in the camera, close the silver dials on the bottom of the
camera. Now pull the film across to the right side of the camera and thread the
film into the take-up spool just as you would with 35mm film. Use the crank lever to advance the film
and stop when the arrows on the film paper line up with the arrow on the inside
of the camera.

Close the back of the camera and advance the
film until “0” is line up with the red dot in the frame counter.

==== Exposing, Focusing, & Taking a Picture ====
The '''shutter speed''' is set by the dial on the top left side
of the camera. The current setting is indicated by whatever number is next to the
small red LED just to the right of the dial. Since there is no built in light
meter on this camera, there is no need to set the '''ISO''' for whatever film you are
using.

If using a flash, you must use a shutter speed on this
camera of 1/30th of slower.

If you wish to do a timed exposure longer than one second
and you don’t want to keep you finger on the shutter as the “Bulb”
setting would allow, rotate the shutter speed dial to anywhere between the red “X” and “1000.”
Now, releasing the shutter will keep it open until you rotate the shutter speed
dial back to “X”.

The '''aperture''' ring is located on the lens. This is the ring
closest to the body of the camera and ranges from f/2.4 to f/22. The aperture
ring will be your primary tool for exposing. Also located on the lens is an
aperture preview mechanism. This allows you get see your depth of field before
actually taking a picture. You can lock this switch in "AUTO" mode so
that you will always be previewing your aperture. To do this, slide the switch
to "AUTO" and push down. To release it back to manual, push down on the other side of
the switch.

To focus, simply look through the viewfinder and adjust the
focus ring until the split viewfinder is even and the image looks crisp.

To release the shutter and take a picture, first crank the film advance level with your right thumb and smoothly and firmly depress the silver button next to the crank.

A cable release can be attached by screwing one into the shutter release button just as with Media Loan's 35mm Pentax K-1000 cameras.

The Pentax 6x7 can not take multiple exposure pictures.

==== Unloading Film ====

Once all of the frames are exposed you’ll want to unload
your film. When you’re ready to do this, wind the crank a few more times until
there is no more tension in the crank lever. By now the protective light-safe
paper should be covering the film and totally wrapped around the spool.
Unfasten the silver dials just like when loading film. Keeping a firm grip on the film so that it doesn't unroll,
lick or peel off the sticky tape on the roll and make sure it is securely attached to the
spool. Close everything back up.

==== Using a Flash ====
To use a flash with the Pentax 6x7, first attach the flash to the hot shoe mount on the handle. This camera has options for both X-type sync cables and FP-type sync cables. Use only the X-type as plugging an X cable into an FP housing can cause damage. Again, this camera can only use a flash when the shutter speed is set to 1/30th of a second or slower.
[[File:Bronica-top2.jpg|thumb|356x356px|Bronica SQ-B]]

=== Bronica ETRS, ETRSI, & SQ-B ===

There are three different models of the Bronica available at Media Loan: SB-Q, ETRS, and ETRSi. They are very similar in operation except for a few minor things like button placement and the viewfinders and accessories that come with each camera. The aspect ratio that these cameras shoot at is also different.
* The ETRS and ETRSi have prism viewfinders and are in a 6x6 (square) format.

* The SB-Q (aka 645) has a wast-level view finder and is in a 6x4.5 (rectangle) format.

The Bronica begins to feel like a departure from the 35mm cameras. It is essentially a cube with a lens attached. One notices a very different feel when shooting with a Bronica than with the Pentax 6x7. Since a lot of the controls are not in conventional places, it may take some time to get acquainted with this camera. All of the Bronica cameras can only use 120 film.
[[File:Cartridge doors.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Film cartridge doors]]
[[File:Bronica cartridge release.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Cartridge release latches]]
[[File:Bronica cartridge.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|The film cartridge ]]

==== Loading Film ====
To load film, open the back of the camera by pinching the buttons that lie just under the viewfinder that are indicated by arrows. It is spring loaded and the film cartridge may fall out so be prepared. The outer shell will fold down and then the film cartridge can be removed.
In the Bronica, film moves from top to bottom. This means your new roll of film will be on top and your empty spool on bottom Now that you're holding the film cartridge, notice there are two door flaps on the left side. Using your finger, push them open from the inside out. You will now be able to remove or insert film spools into each slot. Make sure the empty spool is on bottom and the fresh film is on top. Now you will take the film leader and run it over the pressure plate on the opposite side, bringing it down and around to the empty take up spool. A proper loading will have the black side of the paper leader facing outwards over the pressure plate. [[File:Bronica-Loading.gif|150x150px|thumb|Film direction]]Now, using the manual film advance wheel located on the right side of the cartridge, advance the film until the arrow on the leader aligns with the red arrow on the inside left of the cartridge.

To close the camera, the cartridge must first be aligned properly on the camera body, not inserted into the door. Once the cartridge is in place, close the door. It can be a little tricky to get it perfectly aligned. Do not force anything. If the door won't shut, take the cartridge out and try again.

Now wind the film advance lever until it stops moving and the frame counter is at 0.
[[File:Bronica viewfinder.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Waist-level viewfinder]]

==== Waist-level Viewfinder ====
[[File:Bronica magnifier.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Magnifier latch]]
[[File:Bronica magnifier2.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Magnifier]]Many of Media Loan's Bronicas, like the Mamiyas, feature waist-level viewfinders. This is different than a prism viewfinder in which the viewfinder is held up to the eye. Alternatively, waist-level viewfinders are held at the waist and have a "screen" and magnifier for focusing. Most waist-level viewfinders open by simply folding up the top of the camera. Sometimes there is a small latch. There are metal walls that will snap into place once it is open.
To open the magnifier for critical focusing, there is another release latch on the inside of the focusing hood. To close the magnifier, simply move it back into place with your finger, trying not to touch the actual glass.

Some of the Bronicas come with prism viewfinders, which you can ask for. Some of the prism viewfinders are electronic and feature an internal light meter.
==== Exposing, Focusing, & Taking a Picture ====
[[File:Bronica shutter speed.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Shutter speed dial]]
[[File:Bronica shutter.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Shutter release button]]
To set the '''shutter speed''', there is a dial on the right side of the camera body. The Bronica has a range of shutter speeds from 1/500th of a second to 8 seconds.

The '''aperture''' is set by twisting the aperture ring on the lens and has a range of f/2.4 to f/22.

If you are using a Bronica with a built in light meter, set the '''ISO''' to match your film speed by twisting the dial on the left of the viewfinder. If it does not have an internal light meter, you do not have to worry about setting your ISO.

To focus, open the magnifier in the focusing hood as described in the previous section. The Bronica's lens functions conveniently like most other camera lenses. Twist the focus ring until your subject comes into focus.

Before '''taking a picture''', the film must be advanced. Do this by winding the crank on the right side of the camera. When there is no film loaded in the camera, the crank will spin indefinitely. Once film has been loaded, the crank will stop itself in the correct position.

The shutter release button is a black button located on the front of the camera in the bottom left corner. You can attach a cable release by screwing one into the cable release hole on the left side of the camera.

It is preferable to take a picture in the steps in order to ensure a focused picture:
# Advance the film
# Set your shutter speed and aperture according to your light meter
# Focus on your subject
# Depress the shutter release button
[[File:Bronca flash plug.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Flash plug]]

==== Using a Flash ====
A flash can be connected using an X-type sync cable. The port for this flash is located on the front side of the camera in the top right corner. When plugging and unplugging a sync cable, always pull gently and straight out. Never use a twisting motion to get it out.

The Bronica can conveniently sync with flash at any shutter speed, even at its fastest of 1/500th of a second.
[[File:Bronica handles.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Mirror lock-up & multiple exposure knobs]]

==== Multiple Exposure ====
The Bronica cameras can take multiple exposures, exposing a single frame an unlimited number of times.

To do this, first wind the crank to advance the film. There is a small lever next to the crank that needs to be rotated clockwise. A red warning indicator will appear in the viewfinder letting you know that the multiple exposure mode is engaged, however it is always wise to double check that this lever is in the left or counter-clockwise position (single exposure mode) prior to shooting. When the multiple exposure mode is set, the shutter can be cocked with the film advance crank an infinite number of times without actually advancing the film.

==== Mirror Lockup ====
The function of a camera's mirror lockup (also abbreviated MLU) is to reduce the potential for motion blur due to the movement of the mirror inside the camera. This movement will potentially effect photographs only when shooting at shutter speeds of 1/60th of a second or slower. Since the mirror that allows viewing and composing through the viewfinder before actually taking a picture is stuck in its upright position, you will no longer be able to use the viewfinder once the MLU function is engaged.

To engage this function on the Bronica, first advance the film with the crank. There is a lever located to the right of the multiple exposure lever. Move this lever counter-clockwise. You will know it is engaged when you can not see anything through the viewfinder.

There are three settings for the mirror lockup function. "N" for normal in which the mirror will not lock up, and "S" for single frame and "C" for continuous in which the mirror will be locked up.

If you are on your last exposure of the roll and the mirror lock up function is still engaged, the shutter will continue to release every 360 degree turn and will not advance the film as would usually happen after the last exposure.

[[File:Mamiya-top.jpg|thumb|Mamiya C330]]

=== Mamiya C330 & C220 ===
The Mamiya cameras at Media Loan are perhaps the least intuitive to use of the medium format cameras. Learning to use one properly, however, is well worth it for both high quality images and mad style points. Like large format cameras, the Mamiya uses bellows to focus. Instead of adjusting the elements of glass within the lens, like with lenses that can focus internally, bellows physically move the lens farther or closer to the plane of film in order to focus.

The Mamiya shoots square frames that are 2 1/4 inch long in each direction.
[[File:Mamiya pressure plate.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Pressure plate film type]]

==== Before Loading Film ====
[[File:Mamiya-Unlocking.gif|thumb|150x150px|Cover dial rotation]]
Like the Pentax 6x7, the Mamiya can shoot with either 120 or 220 film and the camera needs to be adjusted accordingly before loading film. First, adjust the orientation of the pressure plate on the inside of the camera to coincide with the kind of film you are using. To open the back of the camera rotate the silver locking disk at the top of the back side of the camera so that the red dot is pointing up and you can slide the disk in the direction of the arrow.
[[File:Mamiya film type.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Film type indicator]]
[[File:Mamiya dial.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Parallax dial]]
Because the Mamiya uses a twin lens system rather than being an SLR, you will also need to adjust the parallax adjustment to match whatever the focal length of the lens is you are using. This can be set by the outer ring on the main dial on the left side of the camera. Depending on the adjustment made and the distance of the camera from the subject, a bar will appear on the left side of the viewfinder. ''This is important to notice as it indicates the top of the frame and everything above the bar will be cut off on the actual film, even though it is present in the viewfinder.''

Additionally, because the farther the bellows take the lens away from the film, light is increasingly lost along the way from when it enters the lens to when it reaches the film. Inside the viewfinder, the number that the moving bar lands at indicates in number of stops how much to increase the exposure by in order to compensate for the reduced light.

==== Loading Film ====
With the neck strap around your neck, open the back of the camera as indicated in the previous section. There are two spool release knobs on the left side of the camera. These pull out and will allow you to remove the film spools. Twist these knobs while pulling to lock them in their disengaged position. On the Mamiya, the film moves from bottom to top, opposite of the Bronica cameras move film. Accordingly, place the empty take up spool in the top compartment. Lock it in place. Then place your fresh roll of film in the bottom compartment and lock it in place.
[[File:Mamiya film loading.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Loading film]]
Pull out the film leader from the fresh spool and bring it up to the empty spool and thread it into that spool. Once threaded, turn the film advance crank on the right side of the camera clockwise to advance the film leader until the printed arrow on the leader matches up with the start mark on the inside of the camera (located a little lower than half way down on the right side.)

Close the back of the camera by pushing firmly on either side of the silver locking dial. Once closed, turn the locking dial counter-clockwise to lock the back cover in place. Continue to turn the film advance crank clockwise until it won't turn anymore. Your shutter is now cocked and ready to take a picture.

==== Exposing, Focusing, & Taking a Picture ====
[[File:Mamiya exposure.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Shutter speed & aperture]]
[[File:Mamiya aperture knob.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Aperture adjustment knob]]
The Mamiya is slightly different than other cameras in that both the aperture and shutter speed are set on the bottom lens. There are individual rings for each of these settings. The '''aperture''' can be set by moving the little black handle on the left side of the lens and the '''shutter speed''' can be set by twisting the knob with fractions of a second on it. Do not change the shutter speed after the shutter has been cocked.

The aperture ranges from f/2.8 to f/22 and the shutter speed ranges from 1/500th of a second to 1 seconds.

Since the Mamiya does not have an internal light meter there is no need for an '''ISO''' setting. The camera does however allow you to set the ISO of the film you are using on the dial configuration on the right side of the camera. This does not effect the performance of the camera at all but simply serves as a reminder for the kind of film you are shooting. Be sure to also check out a light meter from Media Loan when checking out a medium format camera.

Like the Bronica, most of Media Loan's Mamiyas feature waist-level viewfinders although some of them come with prism viewfinders. You can request either when checking one out. Also like the Bronica, the Mamiya has a magnifier seated within the focusing hood that can be expanded for critical focusing. To '''focus''' the camera, the Mamiya uses bellows that bring the lens closer or farther from the film plane. The lens is a fixed piece of glass and does not focus internally. To adjust the bellows and focus your image, twist either of the large black knobs on the bottom front of the camera.
[[File:Mamiya shutters.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Two shutter releases]]
After your film has been advanced by turning the crank clockwise, the camera is ready to '''take a picture'''. There are two ways to release the shutter. The first is a silver button on the front of the camera in the bottom left corner. A cable release can also be screwed in here. The second way is with the slide mechanism on the right side of the camera. There is a small black lever for your thumb. Slide this downward to release the shutter. As the Mamiyas are quite old, not all of the cameras are able to be fired with either method. Some can only use one or the other and this will be indicated by a note on the camera. Advance the film after each exposure.
[[File:Mamiya exposure type.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Exposure type dial]]
[[File:Mamiya lock.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Shutter release lock]]
There is a shutter lock on the slide mechanism that can be pushed to the "L" position. This prevents both shutter releases from being able to move and is thus useful to use when transporting the camera or arranging your shot.

To take take a picture using '''multiple exposures''', there is a dial next to the film advance crank that has the option of either "SINGLE" or "MULTI". Turn this to "MULTI" to be able to exposure a frame multiple times without needing to advance the film.

==== Unloading Film ====
After twelve frames are exposed, continue to turn the winding crank until there is no more tension on the advance crank. At this point, the protective paper of the film should be rolled up around the take up spool. When unloading the film, keep the spool rolled and hold the film tightly to prevent light exposure. Lick or peel the tab on the film and wrap it firmly around the exposed film. Close the camera back.
[[File:Mamiya flash plug.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Flash plug]]

==== Using a Flash ====
To synchronize a flash with the Mamiya, switch the Synchro Selector MX Switch to “X”. You will need to check out a Vivitar flash and a flash sync cable. Because the Vivitar flash was not designed to be used with the Mamiya, it will not properly mount on the hot shoe. Therefore, you’ll need to hold it while taking your picture. The Seagull and the Kalimar should not require a sync cable as they can mount onto the hot shoe.
'''Caution: Avoid moving the self-timer while the flash sync is set at “M”. It may cause damage to the self-timer.'''

[[category:Media Loan]]

16mm Film Projector Operating Guide

2020-04-17T18:56:26Z

Highberh:

<div class="container-fluid">
<div class="row">
<div class="col-md-8">
<div class="lead"></div>

[[File:Eiki-top.jpg|thumb||100px|left]]
'''A proficiency test is required to check out 16mm film projectors'''. Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[16mm Film Projector Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.

===Eiki 16mm Projector===
<gallery>
File:Parts_of_the_eiki_projector.jpg|16mm Projector Parts
File:16mm-2.png|16mm Function Lever Panel
</gallery>

{{#ev:vimeo|113955789|600|center|Eiki 16mm Projector - Setting up & Threading}}

===Setting Up===
'''please refer to above video for visual set up instructions'''

'''NOTE -''' at least one lens and one pickup / take-up reel will be needed to run a projection. These will need to be checked out in addition to the projector.

1. Open the latch on the front of the projector to remove the side cover.

2. Raise both Reel Arms until they click.

3. Make sure the Function Lever is in the STOP position, then connect the AC power cord into a standard wall outlet. A small lamp located beneath the lens will light up.

4. Before you thread the film, you can pre-focus and adjust the size of your picture by turning the function lever to the first forward lamp position. Move the projector back from the screen to enlarge the picture and closer to the screen to make the picture smaller.

5. Raise and lower the picture by using the black Elevating Knob on the front of the projector. When the picture is correctly sized and positioned, adjust the Focus knob until the edge of the light is sharp. Turn the Function Lever to stop.

6. Place the film to be shown on the Supply Reel Arm. It should feed off in a clockwise direction; the leader of the film will usually be green.
7. Place a take up reel on the other reel arm making sure its the same size or larger than the supply wheel
8. Lock down both reels by pushing down the small Arm Lock Buttons on the reel arms.

===Threading===
1. Insert the leader of the film into the Film Trimmer.

2. Press down firmly on the raised end to cut the film leader to the proper shape.

3. Push the Self Threading Control into the self-thread position, then turn the Function Lever clockwise to the first forward position.

4. Insert the lead end of the film into the film insert guide where the projector should pull the film in and thread it automatically.

5. When enough film has come off the last roller to attach it to the take up reel, turn the Function Lever off.

6. Gently tug the end of the film against the last roller to restore the self-threading mechanism to its normal operating position.

===Showing Film===
When you've finished loading the film, turn the Function Lever clockwise to the first lamp position (the second lamp position is used only if you need a brighter image). Focus and frame using the controls near the lens as detailed under 'Setting Up.' Turn on the volume and adjust the treble and bass for tone. An external speaker may also be plugged into the front of the projector. If you want to adjust the height of the projector, or size of your projection, you can move it closer or further away from the wall.

===Still Frame and Reverse Projection===
* To still frame the picture, depress the Still Picture Clutch lever. The image will be very dark in still frame. The lever must be fully depressed or film frames may get burned. If the shutter is blocking the picture, turn the Function Lever in either direction until the image is no longer blocked.
* For reverse projection, simply turn the Function Lever counterclockwise to the lamp position.

===Rewinding===
To rewind, wait until the film has run all the way through the projector and attach the loose end to the supply reel.

1. Leaving the Function Lever in STOP, move the Rewind Lever down to the REWIND position. If this lever is pressed down when film is threaded through the projector, the film will tear. (To rewind when the film is threaded, turn the Function Lever to REVERSE as explained under 'Reverse Projection.')

2. After the film is rewound, put the Rewind Lever back up to its normal position to stop the motor.

3. After removing both reels from the arms, push the Arm Lock Buttons and lower the arms.

4. Turn off the volume control switch.

5. Replace the front cover and the plastic cover.

6. The plastic cover should be used to carry the take-up reel and the spare lamps.

=== CHANGING LAMPS ===
The Eiki projector has two lamps: a PROJECTION LAMP and an EXCITER LAMP, which picks up the optical audio track on the film. To change either lamp:
* First disconnect the projector from the power source and pull out on the top edge of the LAMP HOUSING to remove it.
* To change the PROJECTION LAMP, first pull the black HEAT SHIELD away from the projector.
** Then pull the wire release lever located above the lamp toward you. The lamp may pop out, so be prepared to catch it.
** Make sure the replacement lamp snaps into place; proper seating is essential.
* To change the EXCITER LAMP, pull out on the black EXCITER LAMP COVER.
** Push in on release lever the lamp and turn it.
<gallery>
File:Lamp_cover_eiki.jpg|16mm Projector Lamps
</gallery>

=== TROUBLESHOOTING ===
* '''No Power'''
** Check power cord connection in wall outlet
** Check outlet for power
* '''Motor Runs but No Projection Light'''
** Replace projection lamp
* '''Motor and Lamp Operate, but Film Does Not Run'''
** Raise Still Picture Clutch
* '''No Sound'''
** Turn volume switch on and increase volume
** Check speaker connection if external speaker is being used
** Replace exciter lamp if it does not light
* '''Poor Sound'''
** Check the lower film loop - rethread if necessary
** Film may be defective, use new film if possible
* '''Poor Picture'''
** Check loops, rethread if necessary
** Clean projector lens with lens tissue
** Refocus lens
** Film may be defective
If these simple adjustments do not correct the problem, return the projector to Media Loan.
'''Please note:''' Media Loan is not responsible for film damage. If your projector is not running properly and the above adjustments do not help, remove your film manually and ask someone in Media Loan for help.

=== MANUAL UNTHREADING OF FILM ===
# Unplug projector
# Pull lens out
#Don't push operate/rewind switch
# Push controls in direction of arrows
# Manually thread the film from the supply reel side to the take up reel as pictured below
<gallery>
File:Manually_Threading_Eiki.jpeg|Manual Unthreading of Film
</gallery>


</div>
<div class="col-md-1"></div>
<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">
{{GetHelp}}


</div>

</div>

</div>

__NOTOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__
[[category:Media Loan]]

16mm Film Projector Proficiency Test

2020-04-17T18:51:44Z

Highberh: added area code

<div class="container-fluid">
<div class="row">
<div class="col-md-8">
<div class="lead">
Proficiency Test for 16mm Film Projector[[File:Eiki-top.jpg|thumb]]
</div>

=== WRITTEN TEST ===
Answers may be found in the [[16mm Film Projector Operating Guide]].
Complete this written portion and bring it with you to your scheduled operational proficiency. Call (360) 867-6253 if you have any questions.

# What are the extra supplies you need to check out when checking out a projector?
# Where is the power cable located and how do you put away the cable?
# List the steps involved in setting up and auto-threading the projector, from loading the film to adjusting the sound.
# Which way should the film come off the supply reel, clockwise or counterclockwise? What are sprockets and should they be facing towards you or away from you when loading film?
# What is the function of the still picture clutch?
# Describe the different functions of the motor control knob. How do you run the projected forward? How do you run it backward?
# How do you rewind film? Can this be done before the film has run all the way through?
# How do you adjust the height of the projector?
# How do you insert and focus the lens?
# The projector lenses come separate from the projector (Don't forget to ask for one.) Media Loan carries lenses with focal lengths of 16 (wide angle), 25, 38, 50, and 76mm (telephoto). Explain how the differences between these effect the projection and what scenario you would use either a wide angle or telephoto lens.
# Who is 100% financially responsible for checked out Media Loan equipment?

=== OPERATIONAL PROFICIENCY ===
To be done during your scheduled appointment at Media Loan.

* Identify all the parts and controls on the projector.
* Use the film cutter and auto-thread a film through the projector.
* Manually thread a film through the projector.
* Adjust the sound volume and tone controls.
* Demonstrate how to run the projector in reverse.
* Operate the frame hold control and framing lever
* Rewind the film onto the supply reel.


</div>
<div class="col-md-1"></div>
<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">
{{GetHelp}}


</div>

</div>

</div>

__NOTOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

[[category:Media Loan]]

16mm Film Projector Operating Guide

2020-04-17T18:29:05Z

Highberh:

<div class="container-fluid">
<div class="row">
<div class="col-md-8">
<div class="lead"></div>

[[File:Eiki-top.jpg|thumb||100px|left]]
'''A proficiency test is required to check out 16mm film projectors'''. Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[16mm Film Projector Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.

===Eiki 16mm Projector===
<gallery>
File:Parts_of_the_eiki_projector.jpg|16mm Projector Parts
File:16mm-2.png|16mm Function Lever Panel
</gallery>

{{#ev:vimeo|113955789|600|center|Eiki 16mm Projector - Setting up & Threading}}

===Setting Up===
'''please refer to above video for visual set up instructions'''

'''NOTE -''' at least one lens and one pickup / take-up reel will be needed to run a projection. These will need to be checked out in addition to the projector.

1. Open the latch on the front of the projector to remove the side cover.

2. Raise both Reel Arms until they click.

3. Make sure the Function Lever is in the STOP position, then connect the AC power cord into a standard wall outlet. A small lamp located beneath the lens will light up.

4. Before you thread the film, you can pre-focus and adjust the size of your picture by turning the function lever to the first forward lamp position. Move the projector back from the screen to enlarge the picture and closer to the screen to make the picture smaller.

5. Raise and lower the picture by using the black Elevating Knob on the front of the projector. When the picture is correctly sized and positioned, adjust the Focus knob until the edge of the light is sharp. Turn the Function Lever to stop.

6. Place the film to be shown on the Supply Reel Arm. It should feed off in a clockwise direction; the leader of the film will usually be green.
7. Place a take up reel on the other reel arm making sure its the same size or larger than the supply wheel
8. Lock down both reels by pushing down the small Arm Lock Buttons on the reel arms.

===Threading===
1. Insert the leader of the film into the Film Trimmer.

2. Press down firmly on the raised end to cut the film leader to the proper shape.

3. Push the Self Threading Control into the self-thread position, then turn the Function Lever clockwise to the first forward position.

4. Insert the lead end of the film into the film insert guide where the projector should pull the film in and thread it automatically.

5. When enough film has come off the last roller to attach it to the take up reel, turn the Function Lever off.

6. Gently tug the end of the film against the last roller to restore the self-threading mechanism to its normal operating position.

===Showing Film===
When you've finished loading the film, turn the Function Lever clockwise to the first lamp position (the second lamp position is used only if you need a brighter image). Focus and frame using the controls near the lens as detailed under 'Setting Up.' Turn on the volume and adjust the treble and bass for tone. An external speaker may also be plugged into the front of the projector.

===Still Frame and Reverse Projection===
* To still frame the picture, depress the Still Picture Clutch lever. The image will be very dark in still frame. The lever must be fully depressed or film frames may get burned. If the shutter is blocking the picture, turn the Function Lever in either direction until the image is no longer blocked.
* For reverse projection, simply turn the Function Lever counterclockwise to the lamp position.

===Rewinding===
To rewind, wait until the film has run all the way through the projector and attach the loose end to the supply reel.

1. Leaving the Function Lever in STOP, move the Rewind Lever down to the REWIND position. If this lever is pressed down when film is threaded through the projector, the film will tear. (To rewind when the film is threaded, turn the Function Lever to REVERSE as explained under 'Reverse Projection.')

2. After the film is rewound, put the Rewind Lever back up to its normal position to stop the motor.

3. After removing both reels from the arms, push the Arm Lock Buttons and lower the arms.

4. Turn off the volume control switch.

5. Replace the front cover and the plastic cover.

6. The plastic cover should be used to carry the take-up reel and the spare lamps.

=== CHANGING LAMPS ===
The Eiki projector has two lamps: a PROJECTION LAMP and an EXCITER LAMP, which picks up the optical audio track on the film. To change either lamp:
* First disconnect the projector from the power source and pull out on the top edge of the LAMP HOUSING to remove it.
* To change the PROJECTION LAMP, first pull the black HEAT SHIELD away from the projector.
** Then pull the wire release lever located above the lamp toward you. The lamp may pop out, so be prepared to catch it.
** Make sure the replacement lamp snaps into place; proper seating is essential.
* To change the EXCITER LAMP, pull out on the black EXCITER LAMP COVER.
** Push in on release lever the lamp and turn it.
<gallery>
File:Lamp_cover_eiki.jpg|16mm Projector Lamps
</gallery>

=== TROUBLESHOOTING ===
* '''No Power'''
** Check power cord connection in wall outlet
** Check outlet for power
* '''Motor Runs but No Projection Light'''
** Replace projection lamp
* '''Motor and Lamp Operate, but Film Does Not Run'''
** Raise Still Picture Clutch
* '''No Sound'''
** Turn volume switch on and increase volume
** Check speaker connection if external speaker is being used
** Replace exciter lamp if it does not light
* '''Poor Sound'''
** Check the lower film loop - rethread if necessary
** Film may be defective, use new film if possible
* '''Poor Picture'''
** Check loops, rethread if necessary
** Clean projector lens with lens tissue
** Refocus lens
** Film may be defective
If these simple adjustments do not correct the problem, return the projector to Media Loan.
'''Please note:''' Media Loan is not responsible for film damage. If your projector is not running properly and the above adjustments do not help, remove your film manually and ask someone in Media Loan for help.

=== MANUAL UNTHREADING OF FILM ===
# Unplug projector
# Pull lens out
#Don't push operate/rewind switch
# Push controls in direction of arrows
# Manually thread the film from the supply reel side to the take up reel as pictured below
<gallery>
File:Manually_Threading_Eiki.jpeg|Manual Unthreading of Film
</gallery>


</div>
<div class="col-md-1"></div>
<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">
{{GetHelp}}


</div>

</div>

</div>

__NOTOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__
[[category:Media Loan]]

16mm Film Projector Operating Guide

2020-04-17T18:22:17Z

Highberh: deleted

<div class="container-fluid">
<div class="row">
<div class="col-md-8">
<div class="lead"></div>

[[File:Eiki-top.jpg|thumb||100px|left]]
'''A proficiency test is required to check out 16mm film projectors'''. Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[16mm Film Projector Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.

===Eiki 16mm Projector===
<gallery>
File:Parts_of_the_eiki_projector.jpg|16mm Projector Parts
File:16mm-2.png|16mm Function Lever Panel
</gallery>

{{#ev:vimeo|113955789|600|center|Eiki 16mm Projector - Setting up & Threading}}

===Setting Up===
'''please refer to above video for visual set up instructions'''

1. Open the latch on the front of the projector to remove the side cover.

2. Raise both Reel Arms until they click.

3. Make sure the Function Lever is in the STOP position, then connect the AC power cord into a standard wall outlet. A small lamp located beneath the lens will light up.

4. Before you thread the film, you can pre-focus and adjust the size of your picture by turning the function lever to the first forward lamp position. Move the projector back from the screen to enlarge the picture and closer to the screen to make the picture smaller.

5. Raise and lower the picture by using the black Elevating Knob on the front of the projector. When the picture is correctly sized and positioned, adjust the Focus knob until the edge of the light is sharp. Turn the Function Lever to stop.

6. Place the film to be shown on the Supply Reel Arm. It should feed off in a clockwise direction; the leader of the film will usually be green.
7. Place a take up reel on the other reel arm making sure its the same size or larger than the supply wheel
8. Lock down both reels by pushing down the small Arm Lock Buttons on the reel arms.

===Threading===
1. Insert the leader of the film into the Film Trimmer.

2. Press down firmly on the raised end to cut the film leader to the proper shape.

3. Push the Self Threading Control into the self-thread position, then turn the Function Lever clockwise to the first forward position.

4. Insert the lead end of the film into the film insert guide where the projector should pull the film in and thread it automatically.

5. When enough film has come off the last roller to attach it to the take up reel, turn the Function Lever off.

6. Gently tug the end of the film against the last roller to restore the self-threading mechanism to its normal operating position.

===Showing Film===
When you've finished loading the film, turn the Function Lever clockwise to the first lamp position (the second lamp position is used only if you need a brighter image). Focus and frame using the controls near the lens as detailed under 'Setting Up.' Turn on the volume and adjust the treble and bass for tone. An external speaker may also be plugged into the front of the projector.

===Still Frame and Reverse Projection===
* To still frame the picture, depress the Still Picture Clutch lever. The image will be very dark in still frame. The lever must be fully depressed or film frames may get burned. If the shutter is blocking the picture, turn the Function Lever in either direction until the image is no longer blocked.
* For reverse projection, simply turn the Function Lever counterclockwise to the lamp position.

===Rewinding===
To rewind, wait until the film has run all the way through the projector and attach the loose end to the supply reel.

1. Leaving the Function Lever in STOP, move the Rewind Lever down to the REWIND position. If this lever is pressed down when film is threaded through the projector, the film will tear. (To rewind when the film is threaded, turn the Function Lever to REVERSE as explained under 'Reverse Projection.')

2. After the film is rewound, put the Rewind Lever back up to its normal position to stop the motor.

3. After removing both reels from the arms, push the Arm Lock Buttons and lower the arms.

4. Turn off the volume control switch.

5. Replace the front cover and the plastic cover.

6. The plastic cover should be used to carry the take-up reel and the spare lamps.

=== CHANGING LAMPS ===
The Eiki projector has two lamps: a PROJECTION LAMP and an EXCITER LAMP, which picks up the optical audio track on the film. To change either lamp:
* First disconnect the projector from the power source and pull out on the top edge of the LAMP HOUSING to remove it.
* To change the PROJECTION LAMP, first pull the black HEAT SHIELD away from the projector.
** Then pull the wire release lever located above the lamp toward you. The lamp may pop out, so be prepared to catch it.
** Make sure the replacement lamp snaps into place; proper seating is essential.
* To change the EXCITER LAMP, pull out on the black EXCITER LAMP COVER.
** Push in on release lever the lamp and turn it.
<gallery>
File:Lamp_cover_eiki.jpg|16mm Projector Lamps
</gallery>

=== TROUBLESHOOTING ===
* '''No Power'''
** Check power cord connection in wall outlet
** Check outlet for power
* '''Motor Runs but No Projection Light'''
** Replace projection lamp
* '''Motor and Lamp Operate, but Film Does Not Run'''
** Raise Still Picture Clutch
* '''No Sound'''
** Turn volume switch on and increase volume
** Check speaker connection if external speaker is being used
** Replace exciter lamp if it does not light
* '''Poor Sound'''
** Check the lower film loop - rethread if necessary
** Film may be defective, use new film if possible
* '''Poor Picture'''
** Check loops, rethread if necessary
** Clean projector lens with lens tissue
** Refocus lens
** Film may be defective
If these simple adjustments do not correct the problem, return the projector to Media Loan.
'''Please note:''' Media Loan is not responsible for film damage. If your projector is not running properly and the above adjustments do not help, remove your film manually and ask someone in Media Loan for help.

=== MANUAL UNTHREADING OF FILM ===
# Unplug projector
# Pull lens out
#Don't push operate/rewind switch
# Push controls in direction of arrows
# Manually thread the film from the supply reel side to the take up reel as pictured below
<gallery>
File:Manually_Threading_Eiki.jpeg|Manual Unthreading of Film
</gallery>


</div>
<div class="col-md-1"></div>
<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">
{{GetHelp}}


</div>

</div>

</div>

__NOTOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__
[[category:Media Loan]]

16mm Film Projector Operating Guide

2020-04-17T18:19:19Z

Highberh:

<div class="container-fluid">
<div class="row">
<div class="col-md-8">
<div class="lead"></div>

[[File:Eiki-top.jpg|thumb||100px|left]]
'''A proficiency test is required to check out 16mm film projectors'''. Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[16mm Film Projector Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.

===Eiki 16mm Projector===
<gallery>
File:Parts_of_the_eiki_projector.jpg|16mm Projector Parts
File:16mm-2.png|16mm Function Lever Panel
</gallery>

{{#ev:vimeo|113955789|600|center|Eiki 16mm Projector - Setting up & Threading}}

===Setting Up===
'''please refer to above video for visual set up instructions'''

1. Open the latch on the front of the projector to remove the side cover.

2. Raise both Reel Arms until they click.

3. Make sure the Function Lever is in the STOP position, then connect the AC power cord into a standard wall outlet. A small lamp located beneath the lens will light up.

4. Before you thread the film, you can pre-focus and adjust the size of your picture by turning the function lever to the first forward lamp position. Move the projector back from the screen to enlarge the picture and closer to the screen to make the picture smaller.

5. Raise and lower the picture by using the black Elevating Knob on the front of the projector. When the picture is correctly sized and positioned, adjust the Focus knob until the edge of the light is sharp. Turn the Function Lever to stop.

6. Place the film to be shown on the Supply Reel Arm. It should feed off in a clockwise direction; the leader of the film will usually be green.
7. Place a take up reel on the other reel arm making sure its the same size or larger than the supply wheel
8. Lock down both reels by pushing down the small Arm Lock Buttons on the reel arms.

===Threading===
1. Insert the leader of the film into the Film Trimmer.

2. Press down firmly on the raised end to cut the film leader to the proper shape.

3. Push the Self Threading Control into the self-thread position, then turn the Function Lever clockwise to the first forward position.

4. Insert the lead end of the film into the film insert guide where the projector should pull the film in and thread it automatically.

5. When enough film has come off the last roller to attach it to the take up reel, turn the Function Lever off.

6. Gently tug the end of the film against the last roller to restore the self-threading mechanism to its normal operating position.
7. You can also thread the film manually using the diagram on the reverse side of this operating guide.

===Showing Film===
When you've finished loading the film, turn the Function Lever clockwise to the first lamp position (the second lamp position is used only if you need a brighter image). Focus and frame using the controls near the lens as detailed under 'Setting Up.' Turn on the volume and adjust the treble and bass for tone. An external speaker may also be plugged into the front of the projector.

===Still Frame and Reverse Projection===
* To still frame the picture, depress the Still Picture Clutch lever. The image will be very dark in still frame. The lever must be fully depressed or film frames may get burned. If the shutter is blocking the picture, turn the Function Lever in either direction until the image is no longer blocked.
* For reverse projection, simply turn the Function Lever counterclockwise to the lamp position.

===Rewinding===
To rewind, wait until the film has run all the way through the projector and attach the loose end to the supply reel.

1. Leaving the Function Lever in STOP, move the Rewind Lever down to the REWIND position. If this lever is pressed down when film is threaded through the projector, the film will tear. (To rewind when the film is threaded, turn the Function Lever to REVERSE as explained under 'Reverse Projection.')

2. After the film is rewound, put the Rewind Lever back up to its normal position to stop the motor.

3. After removing both reels from the arms, push the Arm Lock Buttons and lower the arms.

4. Turn off the volume control switch.

5. Replace the front cover and the plastic cover.

6. The plastic cover should be used to carry the take-up reel and the spare lamps.

=== CHANGING LAMPS ===
The Eiki projector has two lamps: a PROJECTION LAMP and an EXCITER LAMP, which picks up the optical audio track on the film. To change either lamp:
* First disconnect the projector from the power source and pull out on the top edge of the LAMP HOUSING to remove it.
* To change the PROJECTION LAMP, first pull the black HEAT SHIELD away from the projector.
** Then pull the wire release lever located above the lamp toward you. The lamp may pop out, so be prepared to catch it.
** Make sure the replacement lamp snaps into place; proper seating is essential.
* To change the EXCITER LAMP, pull out on the black EXCITER LAMP COVER.
** Push in on release lever the lamp and turn it.
<gallery>
File:Lamp_cover_eiki.jpg|16mm Projector Lamps
</gallery>

=== TROUBLESHOOTING ===
* '''No Power'''
** Check power cord connection in wall outlet
** Check outlet for power
* '''Motor Runs but No Projection Light'''
** Replace projection lamp
* '''Motor and Lamp Operate, but Film Does Not Run'''
** Raise Still Picture Clutch
* '''No Sound'''
** Turn volume switch on and increase volume
** Check speaker connection if external speaker is being used
** Replace exciter lamp if it does not light
* '''Poor Sound'''
** Check the lower film loop - rethread if necessary
** Film may be defective, use new film if possible
* '''Poor Picture'''
** Check loops, rethread if necessary
** Clean projector lens with lens tissue
** Refocus lens
** Film may be defective
If these simple adjustments do not correct the problem, return the projector to Media Loan.
'''Please note:''' Media Loan is not responsible for film damage. If your projector is not running properly and the above adjustments do not help, remove your film manually and ask someone in Media Loan for help.

=== MANUAL UNTHREADING OF FILM ===
# Unplug projector
# Pull lens out
#Don't push operate/rewind switch
# Push controls in direction of arrows
# Manually thread the film from the supply reel side to the take up reel as pictured below
<gallery>
File:Manually_Threading_Eiki.jpeg|Manual Unthreading of Film
</gallery>


</div>
<div class="col-md-1"></div>
<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">
{{GetHelp}}


</div>

</div>

</div>

__NOTOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__
[[category:Media Loan]]

16mm Film Projector Operating Guide

2020-04-17T18:18:21Z

Highberh:

<div class="container-fluid">
<div class="row">
<div class="col-md-8">
<div class="lead"></div>

[[File:Eiki-top.jpg|thumb||100px|left]]
'''A proficiency test is required to check out 16mm film projectors'''. Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[16mm Film Projector Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.

===Eiki 16mm Projector===
<gallery>
File:Parts_of_the_eiki_projector.jpg|16mm Projector Parts
File:16mm-2.png|16mm Function Lever Panel
</gallery>

{{#ev:vimeo|113955789|600|center|Eiki 16mm Projector - Setting up & Threading}}

===Setting Up===
'''please refer to above video for visual set up instructions'''

1. Open the latch on the front of the projector to remove the side cover.

2. Raise both Reel Arms until they click.

3. Make sure the Function Lever is in the STOP position, then connect the AC power cord into a standard wall outlet. A small lamp located beneath the lens will light up.

4. Before you thread the film, you can pre-focus and adjust the size of your picture by turning the function lever to the first forward lamp position. Move the projector back from the screen to enlarge the picture and closer to the screen to make the picture smaller.

5. Raise and lower the picture by using the black Elevating Knob on the front of the projector. When the picture is correctly sized and positioned, adjust the Focus knob until the edge of the light is sharp. Turn the Function Lever to stop.

6. Place the film to be shown on the Supply Reel Arm. It should feed off in a clockwise direction; the leader of the film will usually be green.
7. Place a take up reel on the other reel arm making sure its the same size or larger than the supply wheel
8. Lock down both reels by pushing down the small Arm Lock Buttons on the reel arms.

===Threading===
1. Insert the leader of the film into the Film Trimmer.
2. Press down firmly on the raised end to cut the film leader to the proper shape.
3. Push the Self Threading Control into the self-thread position, then turn the Function Lever clockwise to the first forward position.
4. Insert the lead end of the film into the film insert guide where the projector should pull the film in and thread it automatically.
5. When enough film has come off the last roller to attach it to the take up reel, turn the Function Lever off.
6. Gently tug the end of the film against the last roller to restore the self-threading mechanism to its normal operating position.
7. You can also thread the film manually using the diagram on the reverse side of this operating guide.

===Showing Film===
When you've finished loading the film, turn the Function Lever clockwise to the first lamp position (the second lamp position is used only if you need a brighter image). Focus and frame using the controls near the lens as detailed under 'Setting Up.' Turn on the volume and adjust the treble and bass for tone. An external speaker may also be plugged into the front of the projector.

===Still Frame and Reverse Projection===
* To still frame the picture, depress the Still Picture Clutch lever. The image will be very dark in still frame. The lever must be fully depressed or film frames may get burned. If the shutter is blocking the picture, turn the Function Lever in either direction until the image is no longer blocked.
* For reverse projection, simply turn the Function Lever counterclockwise to the lamp position.

===Rewinding===
To rewind, wait until the film has run all the way through the projector and attach the loose end to the supply reel.
1. Leaving the Function Lever in STOP, move the Rewind Lever down to the REWIND position. If this lever is pressed down when film is threaded through the projector, the film will tear. (To rewind when the film is threaded, turn the Function Lever to REVERSE as explained under 'Reverse Projection.')
2. After the film is rewound, put the Rewind Lever back up to its normal position to stop the motor.
3. After removing both reels from the arms, push the Arm Lock Buttons and lower the arms.
4. Turn off the volume control switch.
5. Replace the front cover and the plastic cover.
6. The plastic cover should be used to carry the take-up reel and the spare lamps.

=== CHANGING LAMPS ===
The Eiki projector has two lamps: a PROJECTION LAMP and an EXCITER LAMP, which picks up the optical audio track on the film. To change either lamp:
* First disconnect the projector from the power source and pull out on the top edge of the LAMP HOUSING to remove it.
* To change the PROJECTION LAMP, first pull the black HEAT SHIELD away from the projector.
** Then pull the wire release lever located above the lamp toward you. The lamp may pop out, so be prepared to catch it.
** Make sure the replacement lamp snaps into place; proper seating is essential.
* To change the EXCITER LAMP, pull out on the black EXCITER LAMP COVER.
** Push in on release lever the lamp and turn it.
<gallery>
File:Lamp_cover_eiki.jpg|16mm Projector Lamps
</gallery>

=== TROUBLESHOOTING ===
* '''No Power'''
** Check power cord connection in wall outlet
** Check outlet for power
* '''Motor Runs but No Projection Light'''
** Replace projection lamp
* '''Motor and Lamp Operate, but Film Does Not Run'''
** Raise Still Picture Clutch
* '''No Sound'''
** Turn volume switch on and increase volume
** Check speaker connection if external speaker is being used
** Replace exciter lamp if it does not light
* '''Poor Sound'''
** Check the lower film loop - rethread if necessary
** Film may be defective, use new film if possible
* '''Poor Picture'''
** Check loops, rethread if necessary
** Clean projector lens with lens tissue
** Refocus lens
** Film may be defective
If these simple adjustments do not correct the problem, return the projector to Media Loan.
'''Please note:''' Media Loan is not responsible for film damage. If your projector is not running properly and the above adjustments do not help, remove your film manually and ask someone in Media Loan for help.

=== MANUAL UNTHREADING OF FILM ===
# Unplug projector
# Pull lens out
#Don't push operate/rewind switch
# Push controls in direction of arrows
# Manually thread the film from the supply reel side to the take up reel as pictured below
<gallery>
File:Manually_Threading_Eiki.jpeg|Manual Unthreading of Film
</gallery>


</div>
<div class="col-md-1"></div>
<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">
{{GetHelp}}


</div>

</div>

</div>

__NOTOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__
[[category:Media Loan]]

16mm Film Projector Operating Guide

2020-04-17T18:15:59Z

Highberh:

<div class="container-fluid">
<div class="row">
<div class="col-md-8">
<div class="lead"></div>

[[File:Eiki-top.jpg|thumb||100px|left]]
'''A proficiency test is required to check out 16mm film projectors'''. Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[16mm Film Projector Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.

===Eiki 16mm Projector===
<gallery>
File:Parts_of_the_eiki_projector.jpg|16mm Projector Parts
File:16mm-2.png|16mm Function Lever Panel
</gallery>

{{#ev:vimeo|113955789|600|center|Eiki 16mm Projector - Setting up & Threading}}

===Setting Up===
'''please refer to above video for visual set up instructions'''

1. Open the latch on the front of the projector to remove the side cover.

2. Raise both Reel Arms until they click.

3. Make sure the Function Lever is in the STOP position, then connect the AC power cord into a standard wall outlet. A small lamp located beneath the lens will light up.

4. Before you thread the film, you can pre-focus and adjust the size of your picture by turning the function lever to the first forward lamp position. Move the projector back from the screen to enlarge the picture and closer to the screen to make the picture smaller.

5. Raise and lower the picture by using the black Elevating Knob on the front of the projector. When the picture is correctly sized and positioned, adjust the Focus knob until the edge of the light is sharp. Turn the Function Lever to stop.

6. Place the film to be shown on the Supply Reel Arm. It should feed off in a clockwise direction; the leader of the film will usually be green.
7. Place a take up reel on the other reel arm making sure its the same size or larger than the supply wheel
8. Lock down both reels by pushing down the small Arm Lock Buttons on the reel arms.

===Threading===
* Insert the leader of the film into the Film Trimmer.
* Press down firmly on the raised end to cut the film leader to the proper shape.
* Push the Self Threading Control into the self-thread position, then turn the Function Lever clockwise to the first forward position.
* Insert the lead end of the film into the film insert guide where the projector should pull the film in and thread it automatically.
* When enough film has come off the last roller to attach it to the take up reel, turn the Function Lever off.
* Gently tug the end of the film against the last roller to restore the self-threading mechanism to its normal operating position.
* You can also thread the film manually using the diagram on the reverse side of this operating guide.

===Showing Film===
When you've finished loading the film, turn the Function Lever clockwise to the first lamp position (the second lamp position is used only if you need a brighter image). Focus and frame using the controls near the lens as detailed under 'Setting Up.' Turn on the volume and adjust the treble and bass for tone. An external speaker may also be plugged into the front of the projector.

===Still Frame and Reverse Projection===
* To still frame the picture, depress the Still Picture Clutch lever. The image will be very dark in still frame. The lever must be fully depressed or film frames may get burned. If the shutter is blocking the picture, turn the Function Lever in either direction until the image is no longer blocked.
* For reverse projection, simply turn the Function Lever counterclockwise to the lamp position.

===Rewinding===
To rewind, wait until the film has run all the way through the projector and attach the loose end to the supply reel.
* Leaving the Function Lever in STOP, move the Rewind Lever down to the REWIND position. If this lever is pressed down when film is threaded through the projector, the film will tear. (To rewind when the film is threaded, turn the Function Lever to REVERSE as explained under 'Reverse Projection.')
* After the film is rewound, put the Rewind Lever back up to its normal position to stop the motor.
* After removing both reels from the arms, push the Arm Lock Buttons and lower the arms.
* Turn off the volume control switch.
* Replace the front cover and the plastic cover.
* The plastic cover should be used to carry the take-up reel and the spare lamps.

=== CHANGING LAMPS ===
The Eiki projector has two lamps: a PROJECTION LAMP and an EXCITER LAMP, which picks up the optical audio track on the film. To change either lamp:
* First disconnect the projector from the power source and pull out on the top edge of the LAMP HOUSING to remove it.
* To change the PROJECTION LAMP, first pull the black HEAT SHIELD away from the projector.
** Then pull the wire release lever located above the lamp toward you. The lamp may pop out, so be prepared to catch it.
** Make sure the replacement lamp snaps into place; proper seating is essential.
* To change the EXCITER LAMP, pull out on the black EXCITER LAMP COVER.
** Push in on release lever the lamp and turn it.
<gallery>
File:Lamp_cover_eiki.jpg|16mm Projector Lamps
</gallery>

=== TROUBLESHOOTING ===
* '''No Power'''
** Check power cord connection in wall outlet
** Check outlet for power
* '''Motor Runs but No Projection Light'''
** Replace projection lamp
* '''Motor and Lamp Operate, but Film Does Not Run'''
** Raise Still Picture Clutch
* '''No Sound'''
** Turn volume switch on and increase volume
** Check speaker connection if external speaker is being used
** Replace exciter lamp if it does not light
* '''Poor Sound'''
** Check the lower film loop - rethread if necessary
** Film may be defective, use new film if possible
* '''Poor Picture'''
** Check loops, rethread if necessary
** Clean projector lens with lens tissue
** Refocus lens
** Film may be defective
If these simple adjustments do not correct the problem, return the projector to Media Loan.
'''Please note:''' Media Loan is not responsible for film damage. If your projector is not running properly and the above adjustments do not help, remove your film manually and ask someone in Media Loan for help.

=== MANUAL UNTHREADING OF FILM ===
# Unplug projector
# Pull lens out
#Don't push operate/rewind switch
# Push controls in direction of arrows
# Manually thread the film from the supply reel side to the take up reel as pictured below
<gallery>
File:Manually_Threading_Eiki.jpeg|Manual Unthreading of Film
</gallery>


</div>
<div class="col-md-1"></div>
<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">
{{GetHelp}}


</div>

</div>

</div>

__NOTOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__
[[category:Media Loan]]

16mm Film Projector Operating Guide

2020-04-17T18:15:20Z

Highberh:

<div class="container-fluid">
<div class="row">
<div class="col-md-8">
<div class="lead"></div>

[[File:Eiki-top.jpg|thumb||100px|left]]
'''A proficiency test is required to check out 16mm film projectors'''. Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[16mm Film Projector Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.

===Eiki 16mm Projector===
<gallery>
File:Parts_of_the_eiki_projector.jpg|16mm Projector Parts
File:16mm-2.png|16mm Function Lever Panel
</gallery>

{{#ev:vimeo|113955789|600|center|Eiki 16mm Projector - Setting up & Threading}}

===Setting Up===
please refer to above video for visual set up instructions

1. Open the latch on the front of the projector to remove the side cover.

2. Raise both Reel Arms until they click.

3. Make sure the Function Lever is in the STOP position, then connect the AC power cord into a standard wall outlet. A small lamp located beneath the lens will light up.

4. Before you thread the film, you can pre-focus and adjust the size of your picture by turning the function lever to the first forward lamp position. Move the projector back from the screen to enlarge the picture and closer to the screen to make the picture smaller.

5. Raise and lower the picture by using the black Elevating Knob on the front of the projector. When the picture is correctly sized and positioned, adjust the Focus knob until the edge of the light is sharp. Turn the Function Lever to stop.

6. Place the film to be shown on the Supply Reel Arm. It should feed off in a clockwise direction; the leader of the film will usually be green.
7. Place a take up reel on the other reel arm making sure its the same size or larger than the supply wheel
8. Lock down both reels by pushing down the small Arm Lock Buttons on the reel arms.

===Threading===
* Insert the leader of the film into the Film Trimmer.
* Press down firmly on the raised end to cut the film leader to the proper shape.
* Push the Self Threading Control into the self-thread position, then turn the Function Lever clockwise to the first forward position.
* Insert the lead end of the film into the film insert guide where the projector should pull the film in and thread it automatically.
* When enough film has come off the last roller to attach it to the take up reel, turn the Function Lever off.
* Gently tug the end of the film against the last roller to restore the self-threading mechanism to its normal operating position.
* You can also thread the film manually using the diagram on the reverse side of this operating guide.

===Showing Film===
When you've finished loading the film, turn the Function Lever clockwise to the first lamp position (the second lamp position is used only if you need a brighter image). Focus and frame using the controls near the lens as detailed under 'Setting Up.' Turn on the volume and adjust the treble and bass for tone. An external speaker may also be plugged into the front of the projector.

===Still Frame and Reverse Projection===
* To still frame the picture, depress the Still Picture Clutch lever. The image will be very dark in still frame. The lever must be fully depressed or film frames may get burned. If the shutter is blocking the picture, turn the Function Lever in either direction until the image is no longer blocked.
* For reverse projection, simply turn the Function Lever counterclockwise to the lamp position.

===Rewinding===
To rewind, wait until the film has run all the way through the projector and attach the loose end to the supply reel.
* Leaving the Function Lever in STOP, move the Rewind Lever down to the REWIND position. If this lever is pressed down when film is threaded through the projector, the film will tear. (To rewind when the film is threaded, turn the Function Lever to REVERSE as explained under 'Reverse Projection.')
* After the film is rewound, put the Rewind Lever back up to its normal position to stop the motor.
* After removing both reels from the arms, push the Arm Lock Buttons and lower the arms.
* Turn off the volume control switch.
* Replace the front cover and the plastic cover.
* The plastic cover should be used to carry the take-up reel and the spare lamps.

=== CHANGING LAMPS ===
The Eiki projector has two lamps: a PROJECTION LAMP and an EXCITER LAMP, which picks up the optical audio track on the film. To change either lamp:
* First disconnect the projector from the power source and pull out on the top edge of the LAMP HOUSING to remove it.
* To change the PROJECTION LAMP, first pull the black HEAT SHIELD away from the projector.
** Then pull the wire release lever located above the lamp toward you. The lamp may pop out, so be prepared to catch it.
** Make sure the replacement lamp snaps into place; proper seating is essential.
* To change the EXCITER LAMP, pull out on the black EXCITER LAMP COVER.
** Push in on release lever the lamp and turn it.
<gallery>
File:Lamp_cover_eiki.jpg|16mm Projector Lamps
</gallery>

=== TROUBLESHOOTING ===
* '''No Power'''
** Check power cord connection in wall outlet
** Check outlet for power
* '''Motor Runs but No Projection Light'''
** Replace projection lamp
* '''Motor and Lamp Operate, but Film Does Not Run'''
** Raise Still Picture Clutch
* '''No Sound'''
** Turn volume switch on and increase volume
** Check speaker connection if external speaker is being used
** Replace exciter lamp if it does not light
* '''Poor Sound'''
** Check the lower film loop - rethread if necessary
** Film may be defective, use new film if possible
* '''Poor Picture'''
** Check loops, rethread if necessary
** Clean projector lens with lens tissue
** Refocus lens
** Film may be defective
If these simple adjustments do not correct the problem, return the projector to Media Loan.
'''Please note:''' Media Loan is not responsible for film damage. If your projector is not running properly and the above adjustments do not help, remove your film manually and ask someone in Media Loan for help.

=== MANUAL UNTHREADING OF FILM ===
# Unplug projector
# Pull lens out
#Don't push operate/rewind switch
# Push controls in direction of arrows
# Manually thread the film from the supply reel side to the take up reel as pictured below
<gallery>
File:Manually_Threading_Eiki.jpeg|Manual Unthreading of Film
</gallery>


</div>
<div class="col-md-1"></div>
<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">
{{GetHelp}}


</div>

</div>

</div>

__NOTOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__
[[category:Media Loan]]

16mm Film Projector Operating Guide

2020-04-17T18:13:08Z

Highberh:

<div class="container-fluid">
<div class="row">
<div class="col-md-8">
<div class="lead"></div>

[[File:Eiki-top.jpg|thumb||100px|left]]
'''A proficiency test is required to check out 16mm film projectors'''. Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[16mm Film Projector Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.

===Eiki 16mm Projector===
<gallery>
File:Parts_of_the_eiki_projector.jpg|16mm Projector Parts
File:16mm-2.png|16mm Function Lever Panel
</gallery>

===Setting Up===

{{#ev:vimeo|113955789|600|center|Eiki 16mm Projector - Setting up & Threading}}

1. Open the latch on the front of the projector to remove the side cover.

2. Raise both Reel Arms until they click.

3. Make sure the Function Lever is in the STOP position, then connect the AC power cord into a standard wall outlet. A small lamp located beneath the lens will light up.

4. Before you thread the film, you can pre-focus and adjust the size of your picture by turning the function lever to the first forward lamp position. Move the projector back from the screen to enlarge the picture and closer to the screen to make the picture smaller.

5. Raise and lower the picture by using the black Elevating Knob on the front of the projector. When the picture is correctly sized and positioned, adjust the Focus knob until the edge of the light is sharp. Turn the Function Lever to stop.

6. Place the film to be shown on the Supply Reel Arm. It should feed off in a clockwise direction; the leader of the film will usually be green.
7. Place a take up reel on the other reel arm making sure its the same size or larger than the supply wheel
8. Lock down both reels by pushing down the small Arm Lock Buttons on the reel arms.

===Threading===
* Insert the leader of the film into the Film Trimmer.
* Press down firmly on the raised end to cut the film leader to the proper shape.
* Push the Self Threading Control into the self-thread position, then turn the Function Lever clockwise to the first forward position.
* Insert the lead end of the film into the film insert guide where the projector should pull the film in and thread it automatically.
* When enough film has come off the last roller to attach it to the take up reel, turn the Function Lever off.
* Gently tug the end of the film against the last roller to restore the self-threading mechanism to its normal operating position.
* You can also thread the film manually using the diagram on the reverse side of this operating guide.

===Showing Film===
When you've finished loading the film, turn the Function Lever clockwise to the first lamp position (the second lamp position is used only if you need a brighter image). Focus and frame using the controls near the lens as detailed under 'Setting Up.' Turn on the volume and adjust the treble and bass for tone. An external speaker may also be plugged into the front of the projector.

===Still Frame and Reverse Projection===
* To still frame the picture, depress the Still Picture Clutch lever. The image will be very dark in still frame. The lever must be fully depressed or film frames may get burned. If the shutter is blocking the picture, turn the Function Lever in either direction until the image is no longer blocked.
* For reverse projection, simply turn the Function Lever counterclockwise to the lamp position.

===Rewinding===
To rewind, wait until the film has run all the way through the projector and attach the loose end to the supply reel.
* Leaving the Function Lever in STOP, move the Rewind Lever down to the REWIND position. If this lever is pressed down when film is threaded through the projector, the film will tear. (To rewind when the film is threaded, turn the Function Lever to REVERSE as explained under 'Reverse Projection.')
* After the film is rewound, put the Rewind Lever back up to its normal position to stop the motor.
* After removing both reels from the arms, push the Arm Lock Buttons and lower the arms.
* Turn off the volume control switch.
* Replace the front cover and the plastic cover.
* The plastic cover should be used to carry the take-up reel and the spare lamps.

=== CHANGING LAMPS ===
The Eiki projector has two lamps: a PROJECTION LAMP and an EXCITER LAMP, which picks up the optical audio track on the film. To change either lamp:
* First disconnect the projector from the power source and pull out on the top edge of the LAMP HOUSING to remove it.
* To change the PROJECTION LAMP, first pull the black HEAT SHIELD away from the projector.
** Then pull the wire release lever located above the lamp toward you. The lamp may pop out, so be prepared to catch it.
** Make sure the replacement lamp snaps into place; proper seating is essential.
* To change the EXCITER LAMP, pull out on the black EXCITER LAMP COVER.
** Push in on release lever the lamp and turn it.
<gallery>
File:Lamp_cover_eiki.jpg|16mm Projector Lamps
</gallery>

=== TROUBLESHOOTING ===
* '''No Power'''
** Check power cord connection in wall outlet
** Check outlet for power
* '''Motor Runs but No Projection Light'''
** Replace projection lamp
* '''Motor and Lamp Operate, but Film Does Not Run'''
** Raise Still Picture Clutch
* '''No Sound'''
** Turn volume switch on and increase volume
** Check speaker connection if external speaker is being used
** Replace exciter lamp if it does not light
* '''Poor Sound'''
** Check the lower film loop - rethread if necessary
** Film may be defective, use new film if possible
* '''Poor Picture'''
** Check loops, rethread if necessary
** Clean projector lens with lens tissue
** Refocus lens
** Film may be defective
If these simple adjustments do not correct the problem, return the projector to Media Loan.
'''Please note:''' Media Loan is not responsible for film damage. If your projector is not running properly and the above adjustments do not help, remove your film manually and ask someone in Media Loan for help.

=== MANUAL UNTHREADING OF FILM ===
# Unplug projector
# Pull lens out
#Don't push operate/rewind switch
# Push controls in direction of arrows
# Manually thread the film from the supply reel side to the take up reel as pictured below
<gallery>
File:Manually_Threading_Eiki.jpeg|Manual Unthreading of Film
</gallery>


</div>
<div class="col-md-1"></div>
<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">
{{GetHelp}}


</div>

</div>

</div>

__NOTOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__
[[category:Media Loan]]

16mm Film Projector Operating Guide

2020-04-17T18:12:15Z

Highberh:

<div class="container-fluid">
<div class="row">
<div class="col-md-8">
<div class="lead">

</div>

[[File:Eiki-top.jpg|thumb||100px|left]]
'''A proficiency test is required to check out 16mm film projectors'''. Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[16mm Film Projector Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.

===Eiki 16mm Projector===
<gallery>
File:Parts_of_the_eiki_projector.jpg|16mm Projector Parts
File:16mm-2.png|16mm Function Lever Panel
</gallery>

===Setting Up===

{{#ev:vimeo|113955789|600|center|Eiki 16mm Projector - Setting up & Threading}}

1. Open the latch on the front of the projector to remove the side cover.
2. Raise both Reel Arms until they click.
3. Make sure the Function Lever is in the STOP position, then connect the AC power cord into a standard wall outlet. A small lamp located beneath the lens will light up.
4. Before you thread the film, you can pre-focus and adjust the size of your picture by turning the function lever to the first forward lamp position. Move the projector back from the screen to enlarge the picture and closer to the screen to make the picture smaller.
5. Raise and lower the picture by using the black Elevating Knob on the front of the projector. When the picture is correctly sized and positioned, adjust the Focus knob until the edge of the light is sharp. Turn the Function Lever to stop.
6. Place the film to be shown on the Supply Reel Arm. It should feed off in a clockwise direction; the leader of the film will usually be green.
7. Place a take up reel on the other reel arm making sure its the same size or larger than the supply wheel.
8. Lock down both reels by pushing down the small Arm Lock Buttons on the reel arms.

===Threading===
* Insert the leader of the film into the Film Trimmer.
* Press down firmly on the raised end to cut the film leader to the proper shape.
* Push the Self Threading Control into the self-thread position, then turn the Function Lever clockwise to the first forward position.
* Insert the lead end of the film into the film insert guide where the projector should pull the film in and thread it automatically.
* When enough film has come off the last roller to attach it to the take up reel, turn the Function Lever off.
* Gently tug the end of the film against the last roller to restore the self-threading mechanism to its normal operating position.
* You can also thread the film manually using the diagram on the reverse side of this operating guide.

===Showing Film===
When you've finished loading the film, turn the Function Lever clockwise to the first lamp position (the second lamp position is used only if you need a brighter image). Focus and frame using the controls near the lens as detailed under 'Setting Up.' Turn on the volume and adjust the treble and bass for tone. An external speaker may also be plugged into the front of the projector.

===Still Frame and Reverse Projection===
* To still frame the picture, depress the Still Picture Clutch lever. The image will be very dark in still frame. The lever must be fully depressed or film frames may get burned. If the shutter is blocking the picture, turn the Function Lever in either direction until the image is no longer blocked.
* For reverse projection, simply turn the Function Lever counterclockwise to the lamp position.

===Rewinding===
To rewind, wait until the film has run all the way through the projector and attach the loose end to the supply reel.
* Leaving the Function Lever in STOP, move the Rewind Lever down to the REWIND position. If this lever is pressed down when film is threaded through the projector, the film will tear. (To rewind when the film is threaded, turn the Function Lever to REVERSE as explained under 'Reverse Projection.')
* After the film is rewound, put the Rewind Lever back up to its normal position to stop the motor.
* After removing both reels from the arms, push the Arm Lock Buttons and lower the arms.
* Turn off the volume control switch.
* Replace the front cover and the plastic cover.
* The plastic cover should be used to carry the take-up reel and the spare lamps.

=== CHANGING LAMPS ===
The Eiki projector has two lamps: a PROJECTION LAMP and an EXCITER LAMP, which picks up the optical audio track on the film. To change either lamp:
* First disconnect the projector from the power source and pull out on the top edge of the LAMP HOUSING to remove it.
* To change the PROJECTION LAMP, first pull the black HEAT SHIELD away from the projector.
** Then pull the wire release lever located above the lamp toward you. The lamp may pop out, so be prepared to catch it.
** Make sure the replacement lamp snaps into place; proper seating is essential.
* To change the EXCITER LAMP, pull out on the black EXCITER LAMP COVER.
** Push in on release lever the lamp and turn it.
<gallery>
File:Lamp_cover_eiki.jpg|16mm Projector Lamps
</gallery>

=== TROUBLESHOOTING ===
* '''No Power'''
** Check power cord connection in wall outlet
** Check outlet for power
* '''Motor Runs but No Projection Light'''
** Replace projection lamp
* '''Motor and Lamp Operate, but Film Does Not Run'''
** Raise Still Picture Clutch
* '''No Sound'''
** Turn volume switch on and increase volume
** Check speaker connection if external speaker is being used
** Replace exciter lamp if it does not light
* '''Poor Sound'''
** Check the lower film loop - rethread if necessary
** Film may be defective, use new film if possible
* '''Poor Picture'''
** Check loops, rethread if necessary
** Clean projector lens with lens tissue
** Refocus lens
** Film may be defective
If these simple adjustments do not correct the problem, return the projector to Media Loan.
'''Please note:''' Media Loan is not responsible for film damage. If your projector is not running properly and the above adjustments do not help, remove your film manually and ask someone in Media Loan for help.

=== MANUAL UNTHREADING OF FILM ===
# Unplug projector
# Pull lens out
#Don't push operate/rewind switch
# Push controls in direction of arrows
# Manually thread the film from the supply reel side to the take up reel as pictured below
<gallery>
File:Manually_Threading_Eiki.jpeg|Manual Unthreading of Film
</gallery>


</div>
<div class="col-md-1"></div>
<div class="col-md-3 sidebar">
{{GetHelp}}


</div>

</div>

</div>

__NOTOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__
[[category:Media Loan]]

GoPro Hero 4 Proficiency Test

2020-04-17T17:59:22Z

Highberh: /* WRITTEN TEST */

GOPRO Hero 4 Proficiency Test

===WRITTEN TEST===
Answers may be found in [[GoPro Hero 4 Operating Guide]].
Complete this written portion and bring it with you to your scheduled operational proficiency. We will not be able to complete your GoPro proficiency without this component. Call (360) 867-6253 if you have any questions.

# What precautions should you take when using this camera? How do you clean the camera’s plastic housing?
# What is Protune?
# How do you adjust the camera's white balance?
# Describe the four different camera modes, as well as at least one way you can switch the camera mode.
# List and describe 3 different video resolutions.
# How do you import your footage onto your computer?
# List and describe the different types of video capturing modes.
# What settings can you change in Set-Up Mode? How do you access additional mode settings?
# Describe how to set up the camera to capture a timelapse.

===Operational Proficiency===
The following is to be done at your scheduled proficiency.

# Identify all of the controls and parts
# Identify the memory card
# Describe and go through the menu and settings
# Demonstrate changing the camera’s resolution
# Put camera into two different modes
# Record some video
# Take picture
# Playback the video and photos
# Format the memory card

[[Category:Media Loan]]

GoPro Hero 4 Gear Guide

2020-04-17T17:56:45Z

Highberh: /* SET-UP MODE */

A proficiency test is required to check out this camera. Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[GoPro Hero 4 Proficiency Test|proficiency test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.

The GoPro HERO4 can shoot video, photo, and timelapse footage. It is a small video camera that delivers super slow motion at 240 frames per second, high-resolution 4K30 and 2.7K60 video combines with 1080p120 and 720p240 slow motion to enable stunning, immersive footage. Waterproof to 131 feet (40 meter) with 12MP photos at 30 frames per second and improved audio. 

[http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/images/e/ef/GoPro_manual.pdf Complete Manual GoPro HERO4]

==CARE==

[[file:IMG 0110.jpg|thumb|500px|GoPro Hero4]]
[[file:IMG 0114.jpg|thumb|500px|Housing & Monopod]]
The GoPro Hero 4 is an extremely durable camera, however there are precautions you need to take. 

'''ALWAYS:'''
* Keep the plastic camera housing on the camera during all filming.
* Make sure the rubber lining of the housing is completely clean before exposing the camera to water.
* Make sure the locking bolt is always secured tightly.
* Transfer your footage with the included USB cable '''(do not remove card)'''
 

'''NEVER:'''
* Turn on the camera when it's wet.
* Expose the battery to rain or snow.
* Drop this camera from considerable heights or hit it with a heavy object.
* Remove Micro SD card from GoPro - they are very small and easy to lose track of

=====Proper Housing Cleaning=====
Rinse in fresh water and shake dry or let air dry. Do not dry with a cloth, as lint may compromise the seal. If the seal is broken, water may leak through and permanently damage the camera. Re-install the seal into the grooves in the backdoor of the camera housing.

==KIT CONTENTS==

Our kit includes:
* GoPro HERO4 Camera
* Durable plastic housing
* Monopod
* Head-mount & locking bolt
* One Micro USB 32GB memory card
* 2 Batteries
* Mini USB cable & wall charger

==NAVIGATION & OPERATION==
There are multiple ways to operate this camera. You can access the menus and functions by using the exterior buttons, as illustrated in the diagram. You can also navigate through the camera using the touch display, as described below the "parts" list.

[[file:GoPro parts.png|thumb|800px|center|GoPro Hero4 Parts]]

Exterior Parts:
# Camera Status Light (Red)
# Shutter/Select Button: use to record video, take pictures, and make selections in the menus
# Wireless Status Light (blue)
# Camera Status Screen
# Power/Mode Button: use to power the camera on/off, as well as cycle through the various camera modes
# Micro HDMI Port (cable not included)
# MicroSD Card slot (never remove included card)
# Mini-USB port (supports composite A/V cable & 3.5mm stereo mic adapter, not included)
# Audio Alert
# Microphone
# HERO Port
# Touch Display: use to navigate the functions/settings of the camera
# Touch Display Sleep/Wake Button
# Settings/Tag Button: use to change the settings of the selected camera mode
# Battery Door
 

====POWER ON/OFF====
'''On:''' Press the '''Power/Mode button''', located on the front of the camera. The status light will flash three times. When the camera status displays information, the camera is on. 
'''Off:''' Press and hold '''Power/Mode''' button for a few seconds, until the red light flashes mulitple times.

====TOUCH DISPLAY OPERATION====
Located on the back of the camera, the touch display lets you control the cameras settings and playback your photos/videos. It also functions as a viewfinder. 
* ''Swipe left'' to switch camera '''Modes'''
* ''Swipe right'' to display the last captured video or photo
* ''Swipe up'' from the bottom to access '''Mode Settings'''
* ''Swipe down'' from top to close menus
* ''Swipe up/down'' to navigate the menus
* ''Tap'' to make a selection
* ''Double tap'' to change the field of vision (FOV) in '''Preview Mode''' 
* Press on display for two seconds to lock the touch display. This is useful if you are capturing handheld footage.

==MODES==
The GoPro has multiple modes, listed below. Each mode is explained in the following corresponding sections. 

'''To access the various modes''': either ''swipe left'' on the '''touch display screen''' and ''tap'' to select your desired mode, OR cycle through the modes by pressing the '''Power/Mode''' button. The modes are listed below, as well as their location within the mode menu screen.

* Video (top right)
* Photo (top center)
* Multi-shot (top left)
* Playback (bottom left)
* Set up (bottom right)
 

'''Adjust mode settings:''' each mode has specific mode settings that you can adjust. To do so, either ''swipe up'' on the display or press the '''Settings''' button. 

'''Note:''' as you change the capture settings in video, photo, and multi-shot, a different icon will appear in the mode menu. The image below shows the various icons that represent these modes depending on the selected capture setting.

[[file:Go pro mode menu.png|thumb|500px|center|Video, Photo, and Multi-Shot Mode Icons]]

===VIDEO MODE===
To capture video in '''Video Mode''', simply press the '''Shutter/Select''' button to start and stop recording. 

====VIDEO SETTINGS====
To adjust the settings for video mode, either ''swipe up'' when in video mode OR press the '''Settings Button.''' Listed below are all the settings you can control in this menu.
* '''Mode:''' refers to video capturing modes, as explained in the section below.
* '''Resolution:''' change the video resolution, as explained below.
* '''Frames per second:''' choose between 24-60 FPS (24fps is the cinematic standard, 60fps is for slow-motion).
* '''Field of View (FOV):''' select the FOV. Choices depend on video resolution.
* '''Low-Light:''' enable for low-light environments. Camera will automatically adjust FPS.
* '''Spot Meter:''' allows you to record from a dark space while pointing into a brighter settings, such as in a car.
* '''Protune:''' enables the protune settings. See '''PROTUNE''' section.

====VIDEO CAPTURING MODES====
Video Mode contains 4 different capturing modes, located in the '''Video Settings.'''
* '''Video''' is the standard capturing mode to record video.
* '''Time Lapse''' mode creates video from frames captured at specific intervals. It is available only in 4K and 2.7K 4:3 resolutions and is captured without audio.
* '''Photo+Video''' will capture a photo at selected intervals while you record video.
* '''Looping''' lets you continuously record but only save select moments. Available intervals for Looping are 5, 20, 60 and 120 minutes. Only the most recent interval (ex: 5 minutes) is saved when you stop recording. If you record for an interval and do not press the Shutter/Select button to stop recording and save, the camera begins a new interval by recording over your previous footage. If you select '''Max Video''' as the interval, the camera records until the memory card is full, then overwrites the content. Monitor your footage carefully in looping mode!

====VIDEO RESOLUTIONS====
Adjust the video resolution in the '''Video Settings.''' 

Resolution correlates to the amount of pixels and frame rate of your footage. There are a few factors that will go into deciding which resolution you would like to film at (e.g. how much space is available on your memory card, what you will be filming). This camera is capable of filming at nine different resolutions and each one has its own practical usage. Keep in mind that the higher the resolution, the more room it will take up on your memory card. 
'''Make sure to pick a resolution that fits the aspect ratio of your tv or computer.''' 
Use the following chart to make a proper video resolution selection. '''FOV: Field of View.'''

{| class="wikitable"
|-
! Video Resolution !! FOV !! Screen Resolution !! Aspect Ratio !! Recommended Usage
|-
| 4K || Ultra Wide || 3840x2160 || 16:9 || Tripod/still video
|-
| 2.7K || Ultra Wide, Medium || 2704x1520 || 16:9 || Cinematic shots
|-
| 1440p || Ultra Wide || 1920x1440 || 4:3 || High-action shots (high FPS)
|-
| 1080p || Ultra Wide, Medium, Narrow || 1920x1080 || 16:9 || Standard for most situations
|-
| 1080p SuperView || Ultra Wide || 1920x1080 || 16:9 || Body- or gear-mounted shots. Vertical 4:3 content automatically stretched to 16:9 for widescreen playback.
|-
| 960p || Ultra Wide || 1280x960 || 16:9 || Body-mounted slow-motion shots
|-
| 720p || Ultra Wide, Medium, Narrow || 1280x720 || 16:9 || Hand-held slow-motion shots
|-
| 720p SuperView || Ultra Wide || 1280x720 || 16:9 || Body- or gear-mounted shots. Vertical 4:3 content automatically stretched to 16:9 for widescreen playback.
|-
| WVGA || Ultra Wide || 840x480 || 16:9 || Slow motion for when high res is not necessary
|}

===PHOTO MODE===
When in '''Photo Mode''', you can take a photo by pressing the '''Shutter/Select''' button.

====PHOTO SETTINGS====
To adjust the settings for photo mode, either "swipe up" when in photo mode OR press the '''Settings button.''' Listed below are all the settings you can control in this menu.
* Mode: change the way the camera captures images, as described in the section below
* Megapixels: adjust the size photos, shown in the chart below.
* Spot Meter: allows you to capture photos from a dark space pointing the camera into a brighter setting such as from a car.
* Protune: enables the protune settings. See '''PROTUNE''' section for full explanation.

====PHOTO CAPTURING MODES====
Adjust the photo capturing mode in the '''Photo Settings.'''
* Single: this mode will take a single photo adjusted to the manual settings.
* Continuous Shooting: will take pictures as long as the shutter button is pressed down.
* Night: allows you to manually adjust the shutter speed to get a properly exposed image.

====PHOTO RESOLUTIONS====
Select the photo resolution that best fits your needs. Keep in mind that the more Megapixels (MP), the more space the images will take up on the memory card. Adjust the photo resolution in the '''Photo Settings.'''

* 12MP/Wide & 7MP/Wide: Largest field of view (FOV). Good for action shots in which you want to capture as much as possible within the frame.
* 7MP/Medium & 5MP/Medium: Mid-range FOV.

===MULTI-SHOT MODE===
Multi-shot mode is a photo mode that contains three capture settings, described below. 

====MULTI-SHOT SETTINGS====
To change the '''Multi-shot Mode''' settings, either ''swipe up'' while in multi-shot mode OR press the '''Settings''' button. Below is the settings you will be able to change. 
* Mode: change the multi-shot capture mode, described in the section below.
* Rate (burst mode only): adjust the rate in which photos are captured.
* Interval (timelapse and nightlapse modes only): adjust the intervals in which time lapse photos are taken.
* Megapixels: described in the '''PHOTO RESOLUTION''' section.
* Spot meter: allows you to capture photos from a dark space pointing the camera into a brighter setting such as from a car.
* Protune: enables the protune settings. See '''PROTUNE''' section for full explanation.

====MULTI-SHOT CAPTURE MODES====
Adjust the Multi-shot captures modes in the '''Multi-Shot Settings.'''
* Burst (default): captures up to 30 photos in 1 second. Perfect for action shots. Change the rate under the Multi-shot settings.
* Time Lapse: captures a series of photos at specified intervals, which you can adjust in the Multi-shot settings.
* Night Lapse: captures a series of photos at specific intervals and exposure times, which you can adjust in the Multi-shot settings. Use this in low-light environments, such as the night sky.

===PLAYBACK MODE===
In Playback mode you can review your images. Select videos/pictures to view by ''tapping'' them, OR using the '''Power/Mode''' button to cycle through the files and selecting them with the '''Shutter/Select''' button. 

In video playback, you will see four icons on the bottom of the screen:
* '''Delete:''' will delete the selected file
* '''Play/ Pause:''' use this to pause the video, giving you the option to choose which frame to stop on.
* '''Scissors icon''': allows you to create a short clip from your video. This does not affect the original footage. The clip will be saved as a new file.
 

To exit Playback mode, ''tap'' the '''X''' in the top right hand corner.

===SET-UP MODE===
Use the '''Set-up Mode''' to control the following functions of the camera.
* '''Wireless:''' allows you to pair the camera with a smartphone/tablet or GoPro remote (not included)
* '''Touch display:''' change the sleep, brightness, etc
* '''Orientation:''' changes the orientation of the display (set this to auto)
* '''Default Mode:''' select which mode the camera is automatically set to when powered on
* '''QuickCapture:''' quickly turn your camera on and begin capturing video / time lapse photos. The options for this setting are on and off (default).

* '''LED's:''' control the status lights
* '''Beeps'''
* '''Video format:''' keep in '''NTSC'''
* '''On Screen Display:''' toggle to show more/less file info during playback
* '''Auto-Off'''
* '''Date/Time'''
* '''Delete:''' use this to format your card before/after usage
* '''Camera Reset:''' to restore default camera settings. If your camera is behaving strangely, use this function
* '''Reset Wi-Fi'''

==PROTUNE==
Protune enables manual control of additional settings for advanced control and customization of your video footage and photos. 
To turn '''Protune''' on/off, access the settings (in video, photo, or multi-shot mode) by either ''swiping up'' on the display, OR by pressing the '''Settings''' button. Navigate to "Protune" and toggle on/off. 

Enabling protune will give you access to the following settings:
* '''White balance:''' choose between auto, 3000K, 5500K, 6500K, and native (minimal color correction)
* '''Color:''' "GoPro Color" and "Flat"
* '''ISO limit:''' restrict the max ISO the camera can use
* '''Sharpness:''' low-high increased sharpness
* '''EV Compensation:''' exposure compensation
* '''Reset:''' restore default protune settings
 
'''DO NOT ENABLE PROTUNE IF YOU ARE UNFAMILIAR WITH THE ABOVE TERMS.'''

==FILE TRANSFER==
To save your footage or photos, connect the camera to a computer using the included USB cable. '''DO NOT REMOVE THE INCLUDED SD CARD.'''

# Remove input/output cover, located on the side of the camera. '''DO NOT LOSE THIS COVER.'''
# Connect the camera to a computer with the included USB cable. Insert the mini end into the camera, and the other into the computer.
# Press the power button. The camera and computer will automatically connect.
# Locate the camera on your computer.
# Drag & drop (or use your preferred transfer method) the files into the desired location on the computer.

==BATTERIES==
The battery compartment is located on the bottom side of the camera. 

====CHARGING====
To charge this camera, connect it with the included USB cable to a computer or other USB charging adapter. The camera status light will turn on during charging and off when completely charged. 

'''DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CHARGE WITH A CABLE NOT INCLUDED IN KIT, CAN RESULT IN FIRE AND/OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.'''

[[Category:Media Loan]]

GoPro Hero 4 Gear Guide

2020-04-17T17:55:59Z

Highberh:

A proficiency test is required to check out this camera. Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[GoPro Hero 4 Proficiency Test|proficiency test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.

The GoPro HERO4 can shoot video, photo, and timelapse footage. It is a small video camera that delivers super slow motion at 240 frames per second, high-resolution 4K30 and 2.7K60 video combines with 1080p120 and 720p240 slow motion to enable stunning, immersive footage. Waterproof to 131 feet (40 meter) with 12MP photos at 30 frames per second and improved audio. 

[http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/images/e/ef/GoPro_manual.pdf Complete Manual GoPro HERO4]

==CARE==

[[file:IMG 0110.jpg|thumb|500px|GoPro Hero4]]
[[file:IMG 0114.jpg|thumb|500px|Housing & Monopod]]
The GoPro Hero 4 is an extremely durable camera, however there are precautions you need to take. 

'''ALWAYS:'''
* Keep the plastic camera housing on the camera during all filming.
* Make sure the rubber lining of the housing is completely clean before exposing the camera to water.
* Make sure the locking bolt is always secured tightly.
* Transfer your footage with the included USB cable '''(do not remove card)'''
 

'''NEVER:'''
* Turn on the camera when it's wet.
* Expose the battery to rain or snow.
* Drop this camera from considerable heights or hit it with a heavy object.
* Remove Micro SD card from GoPro - they are very small and easy to lose track of

=====Proper Housing Cleaning=====
Rinse in fresh water and shake dry or let air dry. Do not dry with a cloth, as lint may compromise the seal. If the seal is broken, water may leak through and permanently damage the camera. Re-install the seal into the grooves in the backdoor of the camera housing.

==KIT CONTENTS==

Our kit includes:
* GoPro HERO4 Camera
* Durable plastic housing
* Monopod
* Head-mount & locking bolt
* One Micro USB 32GB memory card
* 2 Batteries
* Mini USB cable & wall charger

==NAVIGATION & OPERATION==
There are multiple ways to operate this camera. You can access the menus and functions by using the exterior buttons, as illustrated in the diagram. You can also navigate through the camera using the touch display, as described below the "parts" list.

[[file:GoPro parts.png|thumb|800px|center|GoPro Hero4 Parts]]

Exterior Parts:
# Camera Status Light (Red)
# Shutter/Select Button: use to record video, take pictures, and make selections in the menus
# Wireless Status Light (blue)
# Camera Status Screen
# Power/Mode Button: use to power the camera on/off, as well as cycle through the various camera modes
# Micro HDMI Port (cable not included)
# MicroSD Card slot (never remove included card)
# Mini-USB port (supports composite A/V cable & 3.5mm stereo mic adapter, not included)
# Audio Alert
# Microphone
# HERO Port
# Touch Display: use to navigate the functions/settings of the camera
# Touch Display Sleep/Wake Button
# Settings/Tag Button: use to change the settings of the selected camera mode
# Battery Door
 

====POWER ON/OFF====
'''On:''' Press the '''Power/Mode button''', located on the front of the camera. The status light will flash three times. When the camera status displays information, the camera is on. 
'''Off:''' Press and hold '''Power/Mode''' button for a few seconds, until the red light flashes mulitple times.

====TOUCH DISPLAY OPERATION====
Located on the back of the camera, the touch display lets you control the cameras settings and playback your photos/videos. It also functions as a viewfinder. 
* ''Swipe left'' to switch camera '''Modes'''
* ''Swipe right'' to display the last captured video or photo
* ''Swipe up'' from the bottom to access '''Mode Settings'''
* ''Swipe down'' from top to close menus
* ''Swipe up/down'' to navigate the menus
* ''Tap'' to make a selection
* ''Double tap'' to change the field of vision (FOV) in '''Preview Mode''' 
* Press on display for two seconds to lock the touch display. This is useful if you are capturing handheld footage.

==MODES==
The GoPro has multiple modes, listed below. Each mode is explained in the following corresponding sections. 

'''To access the various modes''': either ''swipe left'' on the '''touch display screen''' and ''tap'' to select your desired mode, OR cycle through the modes by pressing the '''Power/Mode''' button. The modes are listed below, as well as their location within the mode menu screen.

* Video (top right)
* Photo (top center)
* Multi-shot (top left)
* Playback (bottom left)
* Set up (bottom right)
 

'''Adjust mode settings:''' each mode has specific mode settings that you can adjust. To do so, either ''swipe up'' on the display or press the '''Settings''' button. 

'''Note:''' as you change the capture settings in video, photo, and multi-shot, a different icon will appear in the mode menu. The image below shows the various icons that represent these modes depending on the selected capture setting.

[[file:Go pro mode menu.png|thumb|500px|center|Video, Photo, and Multi-Shot Mode Icons]]

===VIDEO MODE===
To capture video in '''Video Mode''', simply press the '''Shutter/Select''' button to start and stop recording. 

====VIDEO SETTINGS====
To adjust the settings for video mode, either ''swipe up'' when in video mode OR press the '''Settings Button.''' Listed below are all the settings you can control in this menu.
* '''Mode:''' refers to video capturing modes, as explained in the section below.
* '''Resolution:''' change the video resolution, as explained below.
* '''Frames per second:''' choose between 24-60 FPS (24fps is the cinematic standard, 60fps is for slow-motion).
* '''Field of View (FOV):''' select the FOV. Choices depend on video resolution.
* '''Low-Light:''' enable for low-light environments. Camera will automatically adjust FPS.
* '''Spot Meter:''' allows you to record from a dark space while pointing into a brighter settings, such as in a car.
* '''Protune:''' enables the protune settings. See '''PROTUNE''' section.

====VIDEO CAPTURING MODES====
Video Mode contains 4 different capturing modes, located in the '''Video Settings.'''
* '''Video''' is the standard capturing mode to record video.
* '''Time Lapse''' mode creates video from frames captured at specific intervals. It is available only in 4K and 2.7K 4:3 resolutions and is captured without audio.
* '''Photo+Video''' will capture a photo at selected intervals while you record video.
* '''Looping''' lets you continuously record but only save select moments. Available intervals for Looping are 5, 20, 60 and 120 minutes. Only the most recent interval (ex: 5 minutes) is saved when you stop recording. If you record for an interval and do not press the Shutter/Select button to stop recording and save, the camera begins a new interval by recording over your previous footage. If you select '''Max Video''' as the interval, the camera records until the memory card is full, then overwrites the content. Monitor your footage carefully in looping mode!

====VIDEO RESOLUTIONS====
Adjust the video resolution in the '''Video Settings.''' 

Resolution correlates to the amount of pixels and frame rate of your footage. There are a few factors that will go into deciding which resolution you would like to film at (e.g. how much space is available on your memory card, what you will be filming). This camera is capable of filming at nine different resolutions and each one has its own practical usage. Keep in mind that the higher the resolution, the more room it will take up on your memory card. 
'''Make sure to pick a resolution that fits the aspect ratio of your tv or computer.''' 
Use the following chart to make a proper video resolution selection. '''FOV: Field of View.'''

{| class="wikitable"
|-
! Video Resolution !! FOV !! Screen Resolution !! Aspect Ratio !! Recommended Usage
|-
| 4K || Ultra Wide || 3840x2160 || 16:9 || Tripod/still video
|-
| 2.7K || Ultra Wide, Medium || 2704x1520 || 16:9 || Cinematic shots
|-
| 1440p || Ultra Wide || 1920x1440 || 4:3 || High-action shots (high FPS)
|-
| 1080p || Ultra Wide, Medium, Narrow || 1920x1080 || 16:9 || Standard for most situations
|-
| 1080p SuperView || Ultra Wide || 1920x1080 || 16:9 || Body- or gear-mounted shots. Vertical 4:3 content automatically stretched to 16:9 for widescreen playback.
|-
| 960p || Ultra Wide || 1280x960 || 16:9 || Body-mounted slow-motion shots
|-
| 720p || Ultra Wide, Medium, Narrow || 1280x720 || 16:9 || Hand-held slow-motion shots
|-
| 720p SuperView || Ultra Wide || 1280x720 || 16:9 || Body- or gear-mounted shots. Vertical 4:3 content automatically stretched to 16:9 for widescreen playback.
|-
| WVGA || Ultra Wide || 840x480 || 16:9 || Slow motion for when high res is not necessary
|}

===PHOTO MODE===
When in '''Photo Mode''', you can take a photo by pressing the '''Shutter/Select''' button.

====PHOTO SETTINGS====
To adjust the settings for photo mode, either "swipe up" when in photo mode OR press the '''Settings button.''' Listed below are all the settings you can control in this menu.
* Mode: change the way the camera captures images, as described in the section below
* Megapixels: adjust the size photos, shown in the chart below.
* Spot Meter: allows you to capture photos from a dark space pointing the camera into a brighter setting such as from a car.
* Protune: enables the protune settings. See '''PROTUNE''' section for full explanation.

====PHOTO CAPTURING MODES====
Adjust the photo capturing mode in the '''Photo Settings.'''
* Single: this mode will take a single photo adjusted to the manual settings.
* Continuous Shooting: will take pictures as long as the shutter button is pressed down.
* Night: allows you to manually adjust the shutter speed to get a properly exposed image.

====PHOTO RESOLUTIONS====
Select the photo resolution that best fits your needs. Keep in mind that the more Megapixels (MP), the more space the images will take up on the memory card. Adjust the photo resolution in the '''Photo Settings.'''

* 12MP/Wide & 7MP/Wide: Largest field of view (FOV). Good for action shots in which you want to capture as much as possible within the frame.
* 7MP/Medium & 5MP/Medium: Mid-range FOV.

===MULTI-SHOT MODE===
Multi-shot mode is a photo mode that contains three capture settings, described below. 

====MULTI-SHOT SETTINGS====
To change the '''Multi-shot Mode''' settings, either ''swipe up'' while in multi-shot mode OR press the '''Settings''' button. Below is the settings you will be able to change. 
* Mode: change the multi-shot capture mode, described in the section below.
* Rate (burst mode only): adjust the rate in which photos are captured.
* Interval (timelapse and nightlapse modes only): adjust the intervals in which time lapse photos are taken.
* Megapixels: described in the '''PHOTO RESOLUTION''' section.
* Spot meter: allows you to capture photos from a dark space pointing the camera into a brighter setting such as from a car.
* Protune: enables the protune settings. See '''PROTUNE''' section for full explanation.

====MULTI-SHOT CAPTURE MODES====
Adjust the Multi-shot captures modes in the '''Multi-Shot Settings.'''
* Burst (default): captures up to 30 photos in 1 second. Perfect for action shots. Change the rate under the Multi-shot settings.
* Time Lapse: captures a series of photos at specified intervals, which you can adjust in the Multi-shot settings.
* Night Lapse: captures a series of photos at specific intervals and exposure times, which you can adjust in the Multi-shot settings. Use this in low-light environments, such as the night sky.

===PLAYBACK MODE===
In Playback mode you can review your images. Select videos/pictures to view by ''tapping'' them, OR using the '''Power/Mode''' button to cycle through the files and selecting them with the '''Shutter/Select''' button. 

In video playback, you will see four icons on the bottom of the screen:
* '''Delete:''' will delete the selected file
* '''Play/ Pause:''' use this to pause the video, giving you the option to choose which frame to stop on.
* '''Scissors icon''': allows you to create a short clip from your video. This does not affect the original footage. The clip will be saved as a new file.
 

To exit Playback mode, ''tap'' the '''X''' in the top right hand corner.

===SET-UP MODE===
Use the '''Set-up Mode''' to control the following functions of the camera.
* '''Wireless:''' allows you to pair the camera with a smartphone/tablet or GoPro remote (not included)
* '''Touch display:''' change the sleep, brightness, etc
* '''Orientation:''' changes the orientation of the display (set this to auto)
* '''Default Mode:''' select which mode the camera is automatically set to when powered on
* '''QuickCapture:''' can quickly turn your camera on and begin
capturing video / time lapse photos. The options for this setting are
on and off (default).
* '''LED's:''' control the status lights
* '''Beeps'''
* '''Video format:''' keep in '''NTSC'''
* '''On Screen Display:''' toggle to show more/less file info during playback
* '''Auto-Off'''
* '''Date/Time'''
* '''Delete:''' use this to format your card before/after usage
* '''Camera Reset:''' to restore default camera settings. If your camera is behaving strangely, use this function
* '''Reset Wi-Fi'''

==PROTUNE==
Protune enables manual control of additional settings for advanced control and customization of your video footage and photos. 
To turn '''Protune''' on/off, access the settings (in video, photo, or multi-shot mode) by either ''swiping up'' on the display, OR by pressing the '''Settings''' button. Navigate to "Protune" and toggle on/off. 

Enabling protune will give you access to the following settings:
* '''White balance:''' choose between auto, 3000K, 5500K, 6500K, and native (minimal color correction)
* '''Color:''' "GoPro Color" and "Flat"
* '''ISO limit:''' restrict the max ISO the camera can use
* '''Sharpness:''' low-high increased sharpness
* '''EV Compensation:''' exposure compensation
* '''Reset:''' restore default protune settings
 
'''DO NOT ENABLE PROTUNE IF YOU ARE UNFAMILIAR WITH THE ABOVE TERMS.'''

==FILE TRANSFER==
To save your footage or photos, connect the camera to a computer using the included USB cable. '''DO NOT REMOVE THE INCLUDED SD CARD.'''

# Remove input/output cover, located on the side of the camera. '''DO NOT LOSE THIS COVER.'''
# Connect the camera to a computer with the included USB cable. Insert the mini end into the camera, and the other into the computer.
# Press the power button. The camera and computer will automatically connect.
# Locate the camera on your computer.
# Drag & drop (or use your preferred transfer method) the files into the desired location on the computer.

==BATTERIES==
The battery compartment is located on the bottom side of the camera. 

====CHARGING====
To charge this camera, connect it with the included USB cable to a computer or other USB charging adapter. The camera status light will turn on during charging and off when completely charged. 

'''DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CHARGE WITH A CABLE NOT INCLUDED IN KIT, CAN RESULT IN FIRE AND/OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.'''

[[Category:Media Loan]]

GoPro Hero 4 Gear Guide

2020-04-17T17:50:39Z

Highberh:

A proficiency test is required to check out this camera. Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[GoPro Hero 4 Proficiency Test|proficiency test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.

The GoPro HERO4 can shoot video, photo, and timelapse footage. It is a small video camera that delivers super slow motion at 240 frames per second, high-resolution 4K30 and 2.7K60 video combines with 1080p120 and 720p240 slow motion to enable stunning, immersive footage. Waterproof to 131 feet (40 meter) with 12MP photos at 30 frames per second and improved audio. 

[http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/images/e/ef/GoPro_manual.pdf Complete Manual GoPro HERO4]

==CARE==

[[file:IMG 0110.jpg|thumb|500px|GoPro Hero4]]
[[file:IMG 0114.jpg|thumb|500px|Housing & Monopod]]
The GoPro Hero 4 is an extremely durable camera, however there are precautions you need to take. 

'''ALWAYS:'''
* Keep the plastic camera housing on the camera during all filming.
* Make sure the rubber lining of the housing is completely clean before exposing the camera to water.
* Make sure the locking bolt is always secured tightly.
* Transfer your footage with the included USB cable '''(do not remove card)'''
 

'''NEVER:'''
* Turn on the camera when it's wet.
* Expose the battery to rain or snow.
* Drop this camera from considerable heights or hit it with a heavy object.
* Remove Micro SD card from GoPro - they are very small and easy to lose track of

=====Proper Housing Cleaning=====
Rinse in fresh water and shake dry or let air dry. Do not dry with a cloth, as lint may compromise the seal. If the seal is broken, water may leak through and permanently damage the camera. Re-install the seal into the grooves in the backdoor of the camera housing.

==KIT CONTENTS==

Our kit includes:
* GoPro HERO4 Camera
* Durable plastic housing
* Monopod
* Head-mount & locking bolt
* One Micro USB 32GB memory card
* 2 Batteries
* Mini USB cable & wall charger

==NAVIGATION & OPERATION==
There are multiple ways to operate this camera. You can access the menus and functions by using the exterior buttons, as illustrated in the diagram. You can also navigate through the camera using the touch display, as described below the "parts" list.

[[file:GoPro parts.png|thumb|800px|center|GoPro Hero4 Parts]]

Exterior Parts:
# Camera Status Light (Red)
# Shutter/Select Button: use to record video, take pictures, and make selections in the menus
# Wireless Status Light (blue)
# Camera Status Screen
# Power/Mode Button: use to power the camera on/off, as well as cycle through the various camera modes
# Micro HDMI Port (cable not included)
# MicroSD Card slot (never remove included card)
# Mini-USB port (supports composite A/V cable & 3.5mm stereo mic adapter, not included)
# Audio Alert
# Microphone
# HERO Port
# Touch Display: use to navigate the functions/settings of the camera
# Touch Display Sleep/Wake Button
# Settings/Tag Button: use to change the settings of the selected camera mode
# Battery Door
 

====POWER ON/OFF====
'''On:''' Press the '''Power/Mode button''', located on the front of the camera. The status light will flash three times. When the camera status displays information, the camera is on. 
'''Off:''' Press and hold '''Power/Mode''' button for a few seconds, until the red light flashes mulitple times.

====TOUCH DISPLAY OPERATION====
Located on the back of the camera, the touch display lets you control the cameras settings and playback your photos/videos. It also functions as a viewfinder. 
* ''Swipe left'' to switch camera '''Modes'''
* ''Swipe right'' to display the last captured video or photo
* ''Swipe up'' from the bottom to access '''Mode Settings'''
* ''Swipe down'' from top to close menus
* ''Swipe up/down'' to navigate the menus
* ''Tap'' to make a selection
* ''Double tap'' to change the field of vision (FOV) in '''Preview Mode''' 
* Press on display for two seconds to lock the touch display. This is useful if you are capturing handheld footage.

==MODES==
The GoPro has multiple modes, listed below. Each mode is explained in the following corresponding sections. 

'''To access the various modes''': either ''swipe left'' on the '''touch display screen''' and ''tap'' to select your desired mode, OR cycle through the modes by pressing the '''Power/Mode''' button. The modes are listed below, as well as their location within the mode menu screen.

* Video (top right)
* Photo (top center)
* Multi-shot (top left)
* Playback (bottom left)
* Set up (bottom right)
 

'''Adjust mode settings:''' each mode has specific mode settings that you can adjust. To do so, either ''swipe up'' on the display or press the '''Settings''' button. 

'''Note:''' as you change the capture settings in video, photo, and multi-shot, a different icon will appear in the mode menu. The image below shows the various icons that represent these modes depending on the selected capture setting.

[[file:Go pro mode menu.png|thumb|500px|center|Video, Photo, and Multi-Shot Mode Icons]]

===VIDEO MODE===
To capture video in '''Video Mode''', simply press the '''Shutter/Select''' button to start and stop recording. 

====VIDEO SETTINGS====
To adjust the settings for video mode, either ''swipe up'' when in video mode OR press the '''Settings Button.''' Listed below are all the settings you can control in this menu.
* '''Mode:''' refers to video capturing modes, as explained in the section below.
* '''Resolution:''' change the video resolution, as explained below.
* '''Frames per second:''' choose between 24-60 FPS (24fps is the cinematic standard, 60fps is for slow-motion).
* '''Field of View (FOV):''' select the FOV. Choices depend on video resolution.
* '''Low-Light:''' enable for low-light environments. Camera will automatically adjust FPS.
* '''Spot Meter:''' allows you to record from a dark space while pointing into a brighter settings, such as in a car.
* '''Protune:''' enables the protune settings. See '''PROTUNE''' section.

====VIDEO CAPTURING MODES====
Video Mode contains 4 different capturing modes, located in the '''Video Settings.'''
* '''Video''' is the standard capturing mode to record video.
* '''Time Lapse''' mode creates video from frames captured at specific intervals. It is available only in 4K and 2.7K 4:3 resolutions and is captured without audio.
* '''Photo+Video''' will capture a photo at selected intervals while you record video.
* '''Looping''' lets you continuously record but only save select moments. Available intervals for Looping are 5, 20, 60 and 120 minutes. Only the most recent interval (ex: 5 minutes) is saved when you stop recording. If you record for an interval and do not press the Shutter/Select button to stop recording and save, the camera begins a new interval by recording over your previous footage. If you select '''Max Video''' as the interval, the camera records until the memory card is full, then overwrites the content. Monitor your footage carefully in looping mode!

====VIDEO RESOLUTIONS====
Adjust the video resolution in the '''Video Settings.''' 

Resolution correlates to the amount of pixels and frame rate of your footage. There are a few factors that will go into deciding which resolution you would like to film at (e.g. how much space is available on your memory card, what you will be filming). This camera is capable of filming at nine different resolutions and each one has its own practical usage. Keep in mind that the higher the resolution, the more room it will take up on your memory card. 
'''Make sure to pick a resolution that fits the aspect ratio of your tv or computer.''' 
Use the following chart to make a proper video resolution selection. '''FOV: Field of View.'''

{| class="wikitable"
|-
! Video Resolution !! FOV !! Screen Resolution !! Aspect Ratio !! Recommended Usage
|-
| 4K || Ultra Wide || 3840x2160 || 16:9 || Tripod/still video
|-
| 2.7K || Ultra Wide, Medium || 2704x1520 || 16:9 || Cinematic shots
|-
| 1440p || Ultra Wide || 1920x1440 || 4:3 || High-action shots (high FPS)
|-
| 1080p || Ultra Wide, Medium, Narrow || 1920x1080 || 16:9 || Standard for most situations
|-
| 1080p SuperView || Ultra Wide || 1920x1080 || 16:9 || Body- or gear-mounted shots. Vertical 4:3 content automatically stretched to 16:9 for widescreen playback.
|-
| 960p || Ultra Wide || 1280x960 || 16:9 || Body-mounted slow-motion shots
|-
| 720p || Ultra Wide, Medium, Narrow || 1280x720 || 16:9 || Hand-held slow-motion shots
|-
| 720p SuperView || Ultra Wide || 1280x720 || 16:9 || Body- or gear-mounted shots. Vertical 4:3 content automatically stretched to 16:9 for widescreen playback.
|-
| WVGA || Ultra Wide || 840x480 || 16:9 || Slow motion for when high res is not necessary
|}

===PHOTO MODE===
When in '''Photo Mode''', you can take a photo by pressing the '''Shutter/Select''' button.

====PHOTO SETTINGS====
To adjust the settings for photo mode, either "swipe up" when in photo mode OR press the '''Settings button.''' Listed below are all the settings you can control in this menu.
* Mode: change the way the camera captures images, as described in the section below
* Megapixels: adjust the size photos, shown in the chart below.
* Spot Meter: allows you to capture photos from a dark space pointing the camera into a brighter setting such as from a car.
* Protune: enables the protune settings. See '''PROTUNE''' section for full explanation.

====PHOTO CAPTURING MODES====
Adjust the photo capturing mode in the '''Photo Settings.'''
* Single: this mode will take a single photo adjusted to the manual settings.
* Continuous Shooting: will take pictures as long as the shutter button is pressed down.
* Night: allows you to manually adjust the shutter speed to get a properly exposed image.

====PHOTO RESOLUTIONS====
Select the photo resolution that best fits your needs. Keep in mind that the more Megapixels (MP), the more space the images will take up on the memory card. Adjust the photo resolution in the '''Photo Settings.'''

* 12MP/Wide & 7MP/Wide: Largest field of view (FOV). Good for action shots in which you want to capture as much as possible within the frame.
* 7MP/Medium & 5MP/Medium: Mid-range FOV.

===MULTI-SHOT MODE===
Multi-shot mode is a photo mode that contains three capture settings, described below. 

====MULTI-SHOT SETTINGS====
To change the '''Multi-shot Mode''' settings, either ''swipe up'' while in multi-shot mode OR press the '''Settings''' button. Below is the settings you will be able to change. 
* Mode: change the multi-shot capture mode, described in the section below.
* Rate (burst mode only): adjust the rate in which photos are captured.
* Interval (timelapse and nightlapse modes only): adjust the intervals in which time lapse photos are taken.
* Megapixels: described in the '''PHOTO RESOLUTION''' section.
* Spot meter: allows you to capture photos from a dark space pointing the camera into a brighter setting such as from a car.
* Protune: enables the protune settings. See '''PROTUNE''' section for full explanation.

====MULTI-SHOT CAPTURE MODES====
Adjust the Multi-shot captures modes in the '''Multi-Shot Settings.'''
* Burst (default): captures up to 30 photos in 1 second. Perfect for action shots. Change the rate under the Multi-shot settings.
* Time Lapse: captures a series of photos at specified intervals, which you can adjust in the Multi-shot settings.
* Night Lapse: captures a series of photos at specific intervals and exposure times, which you can adjust in the Multi-shot settings. Use this in low-light environments, such as the night sky.

===PLAYBACK MODE===
In Playback mode you can review your images. Select videos/pictures to view by ''tapping'' them, OR using the '''Power/Mode''' button to cycle through the files and selecting them with the '''Shutter/Select''' button. 

In video playback, you will see four icons on the bottom of the screen:
* '''Delete:''' will delete the selected file
* '''Play/ Pause:''' use this to pause the video, giving you the option to choose which frame to stop on.
* '''Scissors icon''': allows you to create a short clip from your video. This does not affect the original footage. The clip will be saved as a new file.
 

To exit Playback mode, ''tap'' the '''X''' in the top right hand corner.

===SET-UP MODE===
Use the '''Set-up Mode''' to control the following functions of the camera.
* '''Wireless:''' allows you to pair the camera with a smartphone/tablet or GoPro remote (not included)
* '''Touch display:''' change the sleep, brightness, etc
* '''Orientation:''' changes the orientation of the display (set this to auto)
* '''Default Mode:''' select which mode the camera is automatically set to when powered on
* '''QuickCapture:''' turn QuickCapture On/Off
* '''LED's:''' control the status lights
* '''Beeps'''
* '''Video format:''' keep in '''NTSC'''
* '''On Screen Display:''' toggle to show more/less file info during playback
* '''Auto-Off'''
* '''Date/Time'''
* '''Delete:''' use this to format your card before/after usage
* '''Camera Reset:''' to restore default camera settings. If your camera is behaving strangely, use this function
* '''Reset Wi-Fi'''

==PROTUNE==
Protune enables manual control of additional settings for advanced control and customization of your video footage and photos. 
To turn '''Protune''' on/off, access the settings (in video, photo, or multi-shot mode) by either ''swiping up'' on the display, OR by pressing the '''Settings''' button. Navigate to "Protune" and toggle on/off. 

Enabling protune will give you access to the following settings:
* '''White balance:''' choose between auto, 3000K, 5500K, 6500K, and native (minimal color correction)
* '''Color:''' "GoPro Color" and "Flat"
* '''ISO limit:''' restrict the max ISO the camera can use
* '''Sharpness:''' low-high increased sharpness
* '''EV Compensation:''' exposure compensation
* '''Reset:''' restore default protune settings
 
'''DO NOT ENABLE PROTUNE IF YOU ARE UNFAMILIAR WITH THE ABOVE TERMS.'''

==FILE TRANSFER==
To save your footage or photos, connect the camera to a computer using the included USB cable. '''DO NOT REMOVE THE INCLUDED SD CARD.'''

# Remove input/output cover, located on the side of the camera. '''DO NOT LOSE THIS COVER.'''
# Connect the camera to a computer with the included USB cable. Insert the mini end into the camera, and the other into the computer.
# Press the power button. The camera and computer will automatically connect.
# Locate the camera on your computer.
# Drag & drop (or use your preferred transfer method) the files into the desired location on the computer.

==BATTERIES==
The battery compartment is located on the bottom side of the camera. 

====CHARGING====
To charge this camera, connect it with the included USB cable to a computer or other USB charging adapter. The camera status light will turn on during charging and off when completely charged. 

'''DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CHARGE WITH A CABLE NOT INCLUDED IN KIT, CAN RESULT IN FIRE AND/OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.'''

[[Category:Media Loan]]